seligman_offprint_catalogue - Excel

Document Sample
seligman_offprint_catalogue - Excel Powered By Docstoc
					AUTHOR      Forename       ARTICLE TITLE                           BOOK TITLE                                      YEAR          NUMBER OF COPIES
Aberle      David F.       The Influence of Linguistics….          Culture and Personality
                                                                  Culture and Personality Theory                          1960              3
Abrahams    Ray            Ch 1: Vigilantes                        Vigilant Citizens: Vigilantism and The State           1998              3
Abrahams    Ray            Ch 8: Limits of the Law                 Vigilant Citizens: Vigilantism and The State           1998              3
Abrahams    Ray                                                    Cambridge
                           Anthropology and the Inner Frontiers of the State Anthropology, 22:3                    2000/2001                4
            Ray/Sufian
Abrahams/Bukurura                                                  Socialism, Ideals, Socilalist State                    1993
                           Ch 5: Party, Bureaucracy, and Grassroots Initiatives in a Ideologies and Local Practices (Ed. Hann)              3
Abu-Lughod Lila            Ch 8: Writing Against Culture           Recapturing Anthropology (ed. by R. G. Fox)            1991              3
Abu-Lughod Lila            Ch 3: Anthropology's Orient             Theory, Politics and the Arab World (Ed. Sharabi)      1990              3
Abu-Lughod Lila                                                    Remaking Women: Feminism and Modernity Dynamic 1998    of East (Ed. Abu-Lughod)
                                                                                                                                            3
                           Ch 7: The Marriage of Feminism and Islamism in Egypt: Selecctive Repudiation as ain the MiddlePostcolonial Cultural Politics
Abu-Lughod Lila            A Tale of Two Pregnancies               Women Writing Culture (Eds. Behar & Gordon)            1995              3
Abu-Lughod Lila            Ch 1: Patrilineality                    Writing Women's Worlds: Bedouin Stories                1993              3
Abu-Lughod Lila            Ch 2: Polygyny                          Writing Women's Worlds: Bedouin Stories                1993              3
Abu-Lughod Lila            Chapter 1: Guest and Daughter           Veiled Sentiments: Honour and Poetry                   1986              3
Abu-Lughod (continued)     Chapter 2: Identity in Relationship     Veiled Sentiments: Honour and Poetry                   1986              3
Abu-Lughod (continued)                                             Veiled
                           Chapter 4: Modesty, Gender, and Sexuality Sentiments: Honour and Poetry                        1986              1
*Abu-Lughod Lila           Ch 9: The Objects of Soap Opera                                                                1995
                                                                   Worlds Apart: Modernity Through the Prism of the Local (Ed. Miller)      1
Acciaioli   Greg                                                   Canberra Anthropology 8
                           Culture as Art: From Practice to Spectacle in Indonesia                                        1985              3
*Acheson    James M.                                               Economic Anthropology (Ed. Plattner)
                           Ch 13: Management of Common-Property Resources                                                 1989              1
Achmat      Zackie                                                 Defiant Desire
                           My Childhood As An Adult Molester: A Salt River Moffie                                         1995              3
Adams       Kahleen M.                                             Art as                                                 2006
                           Ch 4: Mortuary Effigies and Identity Politics Politics: Re-crafting Identities, Tourism and Power in Tana Toraja,2Indonesia
Adams       Richard N.                                             Nation-States                                          1991
                           Ch 7: Strategies of Ethnic Surcical in Central Americaand Indians in Latin America (Eds. Urban & Sherzer)        2
Adas        Michael        Ch 18: The Reconstuction of Trad.       Articulating Hidden Histories (Eds. Schneider & Rapp) 1995               3
Agarwal     Bina                                                   A
                           Ch 2: Conceptualizing Gender Relations Field of One's Own                                      1995              3
Agarwal     Bina           Ch 4: Erosion and Disinheritance        A Field of One's Own                                   1995              3
Agelopoulos Georgios       Ch 7: From Bulgarievo to Neo Krasia Ourselves and Others (Eds. Mackridge & Yannakakis( 1997                      3
Agnes       Flavia                                                 Community, Gender                                      2000              3
                           Ch 4: Women, Marriage, and the Subordination of Rights and Violence: Subaltern Studies XI (Eds. Chatterjee & Jeganathan)
Ahern       Emily Martin   The Power and Pollution of Chinese WomenWomen and Chinese Society                              1975              3
Ahmad       Aijaz          Postcolonialism: What's in a Name?                                                             1995
                                                                   Late Imperial Culture (ed. by Campa, Kaplan, Sprinker)1995            3 3
Ahmad       Aijaz          Orientalism and After                   Economic and Political Weekly                          1992              3
Ahmad       Aijaz          Nation, Community, Violence             South Asia Bulletin, Vol. XIV                          1994              3
Ahmad       Imtiaz         Endogamy and Status Mobility            Caste and Soc. Stratifacation among Muslims            1973              3
Ahmad       Mumtaz         Ch 8: Islamic Fundamentalism S. Asia Fundamentalisms Observed (eds. Marty / Appleby)           1991              2
*Aitcheson J                                                       T
                           Ch 10: The Tower of Speech: Expansionhe Seeds of Speech                                        1996              1
Akeroyd     Anne                                                   the Profession and Governments                         1984
                           Ch 6: Ethics in Relation to Informants, evidence and Inference in History and Law (Eds. Twinning & Hampsher-Monk)2
Alam           Javeed       Tradition in India Under Interpretive.. Thesis Eleven, 39                                       1994              3
Alavi          Hamza                                                State and Ideology in the Middle East and Pakistan
                            Ch 4: Pakistan and Islam: Ethnicitity and Ideology                                              1988              3
*Alavi         Hamza        Kinship in West Punjab Villages         Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 6               1972              1
Al-Azm         Sadik J.     Islamic Fundamentalism Reconsidered South Asia Bulletin, Vol. XII                               1993              3
Al-Azmeh       A.           Ch 2: Kings and Gods                    Muslim Kingship: Power and The Sacred                   1997              3
Al-Azmeh       A.           Ch 2: The Discourse of Cultural…        Islams and Modernities                                  1993              2
Albo           Xavier       El Alto: Mobilizing Block by Block      Nacla Report on the Americas, vol. 40(4)                2007              3
*Alejo                      Ch 1: Politics, Culture, Existence      Generating Energies in Mount Apo                        2000              1
*Alga           H.                                                  Religion and State in Iran: The role of the Ulama in the Qajar Period
                            Ch 1: The Foundations of Clerical Influence                                                     1969              1
Ali                                                                 Fertility and in Male                                   2000              3
                Kamran AsdarCh 4: Making 'Responsible' Men: Planing the Familythe Egypt Life-Cycle in the Era of Fertility Decline (Eds. Bledsoe, Lerner & Guy
Allen           M.R.                                                Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 10, no. 2
                            Kumari or 'Virgin' Worship in Kathmandu Valley                                                  1976              2
Allerton        Catherine   Authentic Housing, Authentic Culture? Indonesia and the Malay World, vol. 31, no. 89            2003              3
Allerton        Catherine                                           Textiles as Super-Skins
                            The Secret Life of Sarongs: Manggarai Journal of Material Culture, vol. 12(1)                   2007              2
*Allerton       Catherine   Ch 1: What Does it Mean to be Alone? Questions of Anthropology (Eds. Astuti & Stafford)         2007              1
Altorki         Soraya      At Home in the Field                    Arab Women in the Field                                 1988              3
Alvarez         Sonia E.    Introduction                                                                                    1990
                                                                    Engendering Democracy in Brazil: Women's Networks in Transition Politics  3
Alvarez                                                             Engendering Democracy in Brazil: and the State          1990
                (continued) Ch 1: Theoretical and Comparative Perspectives on Women's Movements Women's Networks in Transition Politics       3
Alvarez                                                             Engendering Democracy in Brazil: Women's Networks in Transition Politics
                (continued) Ch 2: Women in the New Social Movements of Urban Brazil                                         1990              3
*Anderlini &    Luca/ Hamid Ch 4: Some notes on the economics of Barter, Exchange and Value (Eds. Humphrey & Hugh-Jones)
               Sabourian                                             barter, money and credit                               1992              1
Anderson        Benedict    Ch 2: Cultural Roots                    Imagined Communities                                    1983              3
Anderson        (continued) Ch 5: Old Languages, New Models         Imagined Communities                                    1983              2
Anderson                                                            Imagined Communities
                (continued) Ch 6: Official Nationalism and Imperialism                                                      1983              1
Anderson        (continued) Ch 10: Census, Map, Museum              Imagined Communities                                    1983              2
Anderson        Benedict                                            Language and Power
                            Ch 1: The Idea of Power in Javanese Culture                                                     1990              2
Anderson        Benedict    Ch 11: The Goodness of Nations          Nation and Religion (Eds. Van Der Veer & Lehmann) 1999                    2
Anderson        Benedict                                            Writing (1978-1982)
                            Reading 'Revenge' by Pramoedya Ananta Toer on the Tongue (Ed. By Becker)                        1999              2
*Anderson       David G.                                            Civil Society
                            Ch 5: Bringing Civil Society to an Uncivilised Place - Approaches from Anthropology (Ed. Hann)  1996              1
Anderson        Jon W.      Ch 29: Internet Islam                   Popular Expression of Religion                          1999              3
Anderson        Jon W.                                              New Media
                            Ch 4: The Internet and Islam's New Interpreters in the Muslim World (Eds. Eickelman & Anderson) 1999              3
*Anderson       Terence J.                                          E                                                       2003
                            Ch 4: Wigmore Meets 'The Last Wedge' vidence and Inference in History and Law (Eds. Twinning & Hampsher-Monk)     1
An-na'im        Abdullahi                                           Is Cause                                                1999
                            Promises We Should All Keep in Common Multiculturalism Bad for Women? (Eds. Cohen, Howard & Nussbaum) 2
*Appadurai      Arjun       Ch 10: The Production of Locality       Counterworks (ed. Fardon)                               1995              1
Appadurai       Arjun                                                Global Cultural Economy
                            Ch 2: Disjuncture and Difference in theDimensions of Globalization                              1996              3
Appadurai       Arjun       Ch 5: Topographies of the Self                                                                  1990
                                                                    Language and the Politics of Emotion (Eds. Lutz & Abu-Lughod)             3
Appadurai    Arjun                                               The Social Life of Things (Ed. Appadurai)
                         Ch 1: Introduction: Commodities and the Politics of Value                                     1986            3
Appadurai    Arjun                                               Modernity a Large
                         Ch 3: Global Ethnoscapes: Notes and Queries for at Transnational Anthropology                 1996            2
Appadurai    Arjun                                               Orientalism and the Postcolonial Predicament (Eds. Breckenridge & van der Veer)
                         Ch 10: Number in the Colonial Imagination                                                     1993            3
Appadurai    Arjun       Ch 2: Playing with Modernity            Consuming Modernity (Ed. Breckenridge)                1996            3
             Arjun/Carol Public Modernity in India
Appadurai/Breckenridge                                           Consuming Modernity (Ed. Breckenridge)                1996            3
             Arjun/Carol The South Indian Temple
Appadurai/Breckenridge                                           Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 10, no. 2     1976            3
*Appelbaum Richard P.    The Future of Law in a Global EconomySocial and Legal Studies, vol. 7(2)                      1998            1
Appich       K.A.        Epilogue: In My Father's House          In My Father's House                                  1992            3
Arce/Long                Ch
             Alberto/Norman 9: Bridging Two Worlds                                                                     1993            3
                                                                 An Anthropological Critique of Development: The Growth of Ignorance (Ed. Hobart)
Arce/Long                Ch                                      Anthropology, Development and Modernities: Explaining Discourses, Counter-tendencies
             Alberto/Norman 1: Reconfiguring Modernity and Development From an Anthropological Perspective             2000            3
Archetti                                                         The
             Eduardo P. Ch 4: The Moralities of Argentinian FootballEthnography of Moralities (Ed. Howell)             1996            3
Ardener      Edwin       Ch 11: Comprehending Others                                                                   1989
                                                                 Edwin Ardener: The Voice of Prophecy and Other Essaeys (Ed. Chapman)  3
Ardener                                                          Edwin Ardener: The                                    1989
             (continued) Ch 13: Social Anthropology and the Decline of Modernism Voice of Prophecy and Other Essaeys (Ed. Chapman)     1
Ardener      (continued) Ch 14: 'Remote Areas'                                                                         1989
                                                                 Edwin Ardener: The Voice of Prophecy and Other Essaeys (Ed. Chapman)  1
Arjomand     Said Amir                                           Histroy and Power in the Study of Law (Eds. Starr & Collier)
                         Ch 4: Constitution-Making in Islamic Iran                                                                     1
             Sonia/James F.
*Arellano-Lopez/Petras                                           Development and in Bolivia
                         Non-Governmental Organizations and Poverty Alleviation Change, vol. 25                        1994            1
Århem        Kaj         Ch 10: The Cosmic Food Web              Nature & Society (Eds. Descola & Palsson)             1996            3
Århem        Kaj                                                 Body and Space (Ed. Jacobsen-Widding)
                         The Symbolic World of the Maasai Homestead                                                    1991            2
Arias et al  Arturo                                              The Rigoberta Menchu Controversy                      2001
                         Rigoberta Menchu's History within the Guatemalan Context (incl. responses by Warren and others)               3
Arjomand     Said Amir                                           History and Power in the Study of Law (Eds. Starr & Collier)
                         Ch 4: Constitution-Making in Islamic Iran                                                     1989            2
*Arnold      David       Introduction                            Colonizing the Body                                   1993            1
Aron         Raymond     Karl Marx                               Main Currents in Sociological Thought I               1968            3
Asad         Talal       Ch 2: Thinking about Agency and Pain Formations of the Secular                                2003            3
Asad         (continued)                                          Human Rights
                         Ch 4: Redeeming the 'Human Through Formations of the Secular                                  2003            3
Asad         Talal       Introduction                            Anthropology and the Colonial Encounter               1998            2
Asad         Talal       Introduction                            Genealogies of Religion                               1993            1
Asad         (continued)                                         Genealogies of Religion
                         Ch 1: The Construction of Religion as Anthropological Category                                1993            3
Asad         (continued)                                         Genealogies
                         Ch 2: Toward a Genealogy of the Concept of Ritual of Religion                                 1993            3
Asad         (continued)                                         Genealogies of Religion
                         Ch 3: Pain and Truth in Medieval Christian Ritual                                             1993            3
Asad         (continued)                                         Genealogies of Monasticism
                         Ch 4: On Discipline and Humility in Medieval Christian Religion                               1993            3
Asad         (continued)                                         Genealogies East
                         Ch 6: The Limits of Religious Criticism in the Middle of Religion                             1993            3
Asad         Talal                                               Nation and Religion (Eds. Van der Veer & Lehmann) 1999
                         Ch 10: Religion, Nation-State, Secularism                                                                     3
Asad         Talal                                                                                                     1996
                         The Idea of an Anthropology of Islam The Social Philophy of Ernest Gellner (Eds. Hall and Jarvie)             3
Asad         Talal                                               Writing Culture
                         The Concept of Cultural Translation in British Social Anthropology                            1986            3
Asad             Talal         Miscellanous:                                                                                                     2
Asad             (continued)   Ch 1: Introduction                                                                              a Nomadic Tribe
                                                                         The Kababish Arabs - Power, Authority and Consent in 1970               1
Asad             (continued)                                             Human Rights, Culture and Context - Anthropological Perspectives (Ed.
                               Ch 5: On Torture, or Cruel, Inhuman and Degrading Treatment                                     1996              1
                                                                                                                                                 Wilson)
Ashforth         Adam                                                    W
                               Ch 3: On Living in a World With Witches itchcraft, Violence and Democracy in South Africa       2005              1
Ashforth         (continued)   Ch 8: A Brief History of the Spirit World Witchcraft, Violence and Democracy in South Africa    2005              1
Ashforth         (continued)   Ch 9: Invisible Beings in Everyday Life Witchcraft, Violence and Democracy in South Africa      2005              1
Assayag          Jackie        Miscellanous:                                                                                                     3
Assayag          (continued)   Ritual Action or Political Reaction?      South Asia Research, Vol. 18, No. 2                   1998              1
Assayag          (continued)   Ch 1: Introduction                        Globalising India (Eds. Assayag & Fuller)             2005              1
Assayag          (continued)   Ch 4: Seeds of Wrath                      Globalising India (Eds. Assayag & Fuller)             2005              1
Assayag          (continued)   De la Caste au 'Casteisme'                L'Inde Contemporaine (ed. Jaffrelot)                  1995              1
Assayag          (continued)                                             Cites 24
                               Quand guerre et paix s'emmelent: geopolotique des espaces imaginaires contemporains             2005              1
Assayag          Jackie        Ch 1: The Politisation of Caste           The Making of Democratic Inequality                   1995              3
Assayag          (continued)   Ch 2: Castification of Politics           The Making of Democratic Inequality                   1995              3
Assayag          (continued)                                             The Making Reservation
                               Ch 3: Democratic Goverrnment and the System of of Democratic Inequality                         1995              3
Assayag          (continued)                                             The
                               Ch 4: Caste and Politics on State(s) Level Making of Democratic Inequality                      1995              3
Assayag          (continued)   Ch 5: Castes and Class                    The Making of Democratic Inequality                   1995              3
Assayag          (continued)   Ch 6: Economy, Caste and Politics         The Making of Democratic Inequality                   1995              3
Astuti           Rita                                                    Bodies and Persons (Eds. Lambed & Strathern)
                               It's a Boy, It's a Girl - Reflections on Sex and Gender                                         1998              3
Astuti           Rita          Invisible Objects                         Anthropology and Aesthetics                           1994              3
Astuti           Rita          Are People Like Chickens?                 Terrain, No. 34                                       2000              2
Astuti           Rita          Food for Pregnancy                        Social Anthropology, Vol. 1, No. 3                    1993              2
Astuti           Rita          Are We All Natural Dualists?              JRAI                                                  2001              2
Astuti           Rita          The Vezo Are Not a Kind of People         American Ethnologist, Vol. 22, No. 3                  1995              3
Astuti           Rita                                                    Cultures of Relatedness (Ed.
                               Kindreds and Descent Groups: New Perspectives From Madagascar Carsten)                          2000              3
Astuti           Rita          The Pleasure of the Market                4th EASA Conference: Culture and Economy              1996              3
Astuti           Rita          Ch 2: Acting Vezo in the Present          People of the Sea                                     1995              3
Astuti           Rita          Ritual, History and the Swazy Ncwala AFRICA, XLIII, No. 4                                       1988              3
Astuti           Rita          Ch 6: Ancestors and the Afterlife         Questions of Anthropology (Eds. Astuti & Stafford)    2007              3
*Astuti/Knight   Rita/Nicola   Some Problems With Property Ascription    JRAI                                                  2008              1
Atkinson         Jane M.                                                 The                                                   1988
                               Ch 1: Religion and the Wana of Sulawesi Real and Imagined Role of Culture in Development (Ed. Dove)               3
Atkinson         Jane M.                                                 Power and                                             1990
                               How Gender Makes a Difference in Wana Society Difference: Gendere in Island Southeast Asia (Eds. Atkinson         2
                                                                                                                                                 & Errington)
*Atran           Scott                                                    and Categorical Constraints on Biological Reasoning Across Cultures
                               Ch 8: Causal Constraints on CategoriesCausal Cognition: A Multi-Disciplinary Debate             1995              1
Auslander        Mark                                                     Politics of Modern Ngoni Witchfinding
                               Ch &: Open the Wounds: The SymbolicModernity and Its Malcontents (Eds. Comaroff)                1993              2
Austin-Broos Diane J.    Redefining the Moral Order               Meaning of Freedom (Eds. Drescher & McGlynn)           1992             3
Babb         Lawrence A. Introduction                                                                                    1998             3
                                                                  Media and the Transformation of Religion in South Asia (Eds. Babb & Wadley)
Babb         Lawrence A. Ch. 1: The Ethnographic Setting          The Divine Hierarchy                                   1975             3
Babb         (continued) Ch. 6: Brahman and Baiga                 The Divine Hierarchy                                   1975             3
Babb         (continued) Ch 7: Divine Hierarchy: The Pantheon The Divine Hierarchy                                       1975             1
Badone       Ellen       Introduction                                                                                    1990
                                                                  Religious Orthodoxy and Popular Faith in European Society (ed. Badone)  3
Badone       Ellen                                                 the Boderlands of Ethnography, Tourism and Pilgrimage  and
                         Ch 10: Crossing Boundaries: Exploring Intersecting Journeys- The Anthropology of Pilgrimage2004Tourism           2
*Bahre       Erik        Introduction                                                                                    2007             1
                                                                  Money and Violence: Financial Self-Help Groups in a South African Township
Bahuchet     Serge                                                African
                         Food Sharing Among Pygmies of Central AfricaStudy Monographs 11(1)                              1990             2
Bailey       F.G.        Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
Bailey                                                            - A Case Study in Orissa
             (continued) Traditional Society and Representation Archies Europeanes de Sociologie, vol. 1                 1960             1
Bailey       (continued) Ch 3: Leaders and Teams                  Stratagems and Spoils                                  1969             1
Bakker       Laurens                                              Performing Objects: Museums, Material West Indonesian Island
                                                                                                                         2004             2
                         At Nias or from Nias? Museum Displays, National Images and Local Reality in a Culture and Performance in Southeast Asia (Ed.
Baks/Breman/Nooij                                                 Dijdragen, Vol. 122
                         Slavery as a System of Produciton in Tribal Society                                             1966             3
Balandier    Georges     Ch 2: The Political Sphere               Political Anthropology                                 1970             3
Balandier    (continued) Ch 5: Religion and Power                 Political Anthropology                                 1970             3
Balee        William     Histoire, Histoires                      L'homme                                                1993             3
Balen        Frank van                                            Infertility around the Globe (Eds. Inhorn & Balen)
                         Ch 1: Introduction: Interpreting Infertility: A View from the Social Sciences                   2002             3
*Bamberger Joan                                                    in Primitive Society
                         The Myth of Matriarchy: Why Men RuleWomen, Culture and Society (Eds. Rosaldo & Lamphere)        1974             1
Bamford      Sandra                                               Bodies and Persons (Eds. Lambed & Strathern)           1998
                         Ch 7: To Eat For Another: Taboo and the Elicitation of Bodily Form Among the Kamea of Papua New Guinea           2
Banerjee     Nirmala     Working Women in Colonial Bengal         Recasting Women (Eds. Sangari & Vaid)                  1990             3
Bank         Leslie      The Social Life of Paraffin              African Studies, vol. 56(2)                            1996             3
Bano         Samia       Ch 10: Muslim and South Asian Women                                                             2005
                                                                  Women, Citizenship and Difference (Eds. Yuval/Davis & Werbner)          3
Barber       Karin       Ch 23: How Man Makes God in West Africa                                                         1997
                                                                  Perspectives on Africa: A Reader in Culture, History and Representation 3
Bardhan      Pranab      Ch 8: The State Against Society          Democracy and Development (Eds. Bose & Jalal)          1996             3
Barker                                                             the Passiion of Christ in the Philippines
             Nicholas H. Flesh and Blood: Animistic Elements of European Conference of Philippine Studies, SOAS          1994             3
*Barker                                                           The Southeast of Southeast Asian Studies, SOAS
             Nicholas H. The Revival of Religious Self-Mortiication inAssociation Asia                                   1996             1
                                                                  Research
Barnard/GoodAlan/Anthony Ch 2: Collecting Census Data and Genealogies Practicesin the Study of Kinship                   1984             2
Barnard/Good(continued) Ch 5: Descent and Residence               Research Practicesin the Study of Kinship              1984             1
Barnes       J. A.       Ch 2: Real Models                        Three Styles in the Study of Kinship                   1971             3
Barnes       (continued) Ch 3: Irreducible Principles             Three Styles in the Study of Kinship                   1971             3
Barnes       J.A.        Genetrix:Genitor::Nature:Culture         The Character of Kinship (Ed. Jack Goody)              1973             2
Barnes       J.A.        Discussion: Physical and Social KinshipPhilosophy of Science, vol. 28                           1961             2
Barnes       Ruth                                                 Frigle Traditions: Indonesian Art in
                         Without Cloth We Cannot Marry': The Textiles of Lamaholot in Transition Jeopardy (Ed. Taylor)   1994             3
Baron           Beth                                                  Women in in Modern Egypt
                              Ch 15: The Making and Breaking of Marital Bonds Middle Eastern History (Ed. Baron & Keddie)    1993             3
Barth           Fredrik                                               Capital, Savings and Credit in Peasant in South
                              Ch 4: Capital Investment and the Social Structure of a Pastoral Nomad Group Societies Persia 1964               3
Barth           Fredrik       Introduction                                                                                   1969             3
                                                                      Ethnic Groups and Boundaries: The Social Organisation of Culture Difference
Barth           Fredrik       Pathan Identity and its Maintenance                                                            1969             3
                                                                      Ethnic Groups and Boundaries: The Social Organisation of Culture Difference
Barth           Fredrik       Ch 1: The Problem                       Cosmologies in the Making                              1987             3
Barth           (continued)   Ch 2: Descent and Conception            Cosmologies in the Making                              1987             3
Barth           (continued)   Ch 11: Theory and Method                Cosmologies in the Making                              1987             3
Barth           Fredrik       Ch 5: 'Models' Reconsidered                                                                    Fredrik          3
                                                                      Processes and Form of Social Life - Selected Essays of 1981 Barth, Vol. I (Ed. Kuper)
Barth           Fredrik                                                                                                      1981             3
                              Ch 2: Models of Social Organisation I Features of Person and Society in Swat - Selected Essays of Fredrik Barth, vol. II
Barth           (continued)                                                                                                  1981             3
                              Ch 3: Models of Social Organisation II Features of Person and Society in Swat - Selected Essays of Fredrik Barth, vol. II
Barth           (continued)                                                                                                  1981             3
                              Ch 4: Models of Social Organisation III Features of Person and Society in Swat - Selected Essays of Fredrik Barth, vol. II
Barth           (continued)   Ch 7: Swat Pathans Reconsidered                                                                1981             3
                                                                      Features of Person and Society in Swat - Selected Essays of Fredrik Barth, vol. II
Basch et al.                                                          Nations Unbound
                              Ch 1: Transnational Projects: A New Perspective                                                1993             3
Basch et al.    (continued)   Ch 2: Theoretical Premises              Nations Unbound                                        1993             3
Basch et al.    (continued)                                           Nations Unbound
                              Ch 7: Transnationalism as a Global Process                                                     1993             3
Basch et al.    (continued)   Ch 8: There's No Place Like Home        Nations Unbound                                        1993             3
Bashkow         Ira           Whitemen are good to think with         Global studies in culture and power                    2000             3
*Bassett        Thomas J.                                             Land in African Agrarian Systems (Ed.
                              Ch 5: Land Use Conflicts in Pastoral Development in Northern Cote d'Ivoire Bassett), part 11993                 1
Basso           Keith H.      Ch 2: Wisdom Sits in Places             Senses of Place                                        1996             3
Basso           Keith H.                                              Text, and and Story: The among the and Reconstruction of Self and Society (Ed. Brun
                              Ch 1: 'Stalking with Stories': Names, Places, Play, Moral NarrativesConstructionWestern Apache 1983             3
Basso           Keith H.      Ch 4: Wise Words of the Western Apache  Meaning in Anthropology (eds. Basso & Selby)           1976             3
Basu et al.     Tapan         Preface and ch 1: Introduction          Khaki Shorts and Saffron Flags                         1993             1
Basu et al.     (continued)   Ch 2: A Sketch of RSS History           Khaki Shorts and Saffron Flags                         1993             1
Basu et al.     (continued)                                           Khaki Shorts and Saffron Flags
                              Ch 3: The VHP: Organizing Mass Communalism                                                     1993             1
Basu et al.     (continued)   Ch 4: Conclusion                        Khaki Shorts and Saffron Flags                         1993             1
Baudrillard     Jean          The System of Objects                   Selected Writings                                      1988             3
Baudrillard     Jean                                                  The
                              Ch 5: Towards a Theory of Consumption Consumer Society                                         1998             3
Baudrillard     (continued)                                           The Consumer Society
                              Ch 6: Personalization or the Smallest Marginal Difference                                      1998             3
Baudrillard     (continued)   Ch 7: Mass-Media Culture                The Consumer Society                                   1998             3
Bauman          Gerd          Ch 4: Conditions and Choices            National Integration and Local Integrity: Sudan        1988             3
Bauman          Richard                                               Let Your Words Be Few
                              Ch 1: Introduction: They Say None Speak Like Us                                                1983             3
*Baxandall      M.            Ch 1: Conditions of Trade               Painting and Experience in Fifteenth Century Italy     1988             1
Bayart          J.F.          Ch 9: The Politics of the Belly         The State in Africa: The Politics of the Belly         1993             3
Bayart et al.   J.F.          Introduction                            The Criminalisation of the State in Africa             1999             3
                                                                   The Criminalisation of the State in Africa
Bayart et al. (continued) Ch 1: From Kleptocracy to the Felonious State                                                  1999          2
Bear          Laura                                                Lines of the
                           Pt 2, Ch 1: Personalising the Railway Bureaucracy Nation                                      2007          3
Bear          Laura                                                Lines of the Nation
                           Ch 2: Traces of the Archive: Documents, Bodies and Nations in Anglo-Indian Family Histories 2007            3
Bear          Laura        Miscegenations of Modernity             Women's History Reviews, Vol. 3 (4)                   1994          2
Bear          Laura        School Stories and Internal Frontiers Manufacturing Citizenship (ed. Benei)                   2005          2
Beard         Mary                                                 Shamanism, History, and the State (Eds. Humphrey & 1994
                           The Roman and the Foreign: The Cult of the 'Great Mother' in Imperial Rome                    Thomas)       3
*Beattie      J.H.M.       On Understanding Sacrifice              Sacrifice (Eds. Bourdillon & Fortes)                  1980          1
              Peter
Beaumont et al.            Introduction                            The Middle East - A Geographical Study (2.ed)         1988          3
Beck          Brenda E. F. Miscellanous:                                                                                               3
Beck                                                               AAA
              (continued) Sister's Daughter Marriage in South India Convention, New Orleans, Novembere                   1961          1
Beck          (continued) The Goddess and the Demon                Purusartha, vol 5                                     1981          1
Beck                                                               Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 10, no. 2
              (continued) The Symbolic Merger of Body, Space and Cosmos in Hindu Tamil Nadu                              1976          1
              S                                                    Ethnicity and                                         1981
Beck/McArthur am/Marilyn Romania: Ethnicity, Nationalism and Development Nationalism in South Eastern Europe (Eds. Beck & Cole) 2
*Beer         W.R.                                                 The Unexpected Rebellion
                           Ch 4: The Social Charactiristics of Ethnic Activists                                          1980          1
Behar         Ruth         Introduction: Out of Exile              Women Writing Culture (Eds. Behar & Gordon)           1995          3
Bell          Catherine    Ch 5: The Ritual Body                   Ritual Theory, Ritual Practice                        1992          1
Bell          (continued) Ch 8: Ritual, Belief, and Ideology       Ritual Theory, Ritual Practice                        1992          1
Bell          (continued) Ch 9: The Power of Ritualization         Ritual Theory, Ritual Practice                        1992          1
Bell/Coleman Sandra/simonCh 1: Enduring themes and future..        The Anthropology of Friendship                        1999          3
Benedict      Ruth         Ch 1: The Science of Custom             Patterns of Culture                                   1935          1
Benedict      (continued) Ch 2: The Diversity of Cultures          Patterns of Culture                                   1935          1
Benedict      (continued) Ch 3: The Integration of Culture         Patterns of Culture                                   1935          1
Benedix       R.           Ch IV: Introduction                     Max Weber: An Intellectual Portait                    1966          3
Benei         Veronique                                                                                                  2008          3
                           Ch 1: Singing the Nation into ExistenceSchooling Passions: Nation, History and Language in Contemporary India
Benei         Veronique                                            Everyday State and Society in Modern India (Eds. Fuller & Benei)
                           Teaching Nationalism in Maharastra Schools                                                    2000          3
Benjamin      Walter                                               Illuminations
                           The Work of Art in the Age of Mechanical Reproduction                                         1999          3
Bennett       L.                                                   Dangerous Wives and Sacred Sisters
                           Ch 1: Village and Family: The Socioeconomic Context of Women's Lives                          1983          3
Bennion       Janet        Ch 2: The People                                                                              1998          2
                                                                   Women of Principle: Female Networking in Contemporary Mormon Polygyny
*Benson       Susan        Body Health and Eating Disorders        Media, Culture, Identity                              1996          1
Berezin       Mabel                                                State/Culture (Ed. Fascist Italy
                           Ch 2: Political Belonging: Emotion, Nation, and Identity inSteinmetz)                         1999          3
Berger        Peter        Ch 1: Religion and World-Construction The Sacred Canopy: Elements of a Sociological Theory1969 o fReligion  3
Berry         Sara         Ch 2: Hegemony on a Shoestring - Indirect Rule and Farmers' Access to Resources               1993          3
Berry                                                              No Condition in the Era of - The Social Dynamics      1993
              (continued) Ch 3: Inconclusive Encounters - Farmers and States is Permanent Planned Development of Agrarian Change in 3  Sub-Saharan Afr
Berthoud      Gerald       Market                                  The Development Dictionary (Ed. Sachs)                1992          3
Beteille      Andre        Ch 2: Class and Status                                                                            Thoery
                                                                   Equality and Universality: Essays in Social and Political2002             1
Beteille                                                           Equality and Universality: Essays in Social and Political2002
              (continued) Ch 6: Distributive Justice and Institutional Well-being                                            Thoery          3
Beteille      Andre                                                Society and Politics in India
                           Ch 8: Equality as a Right and as a Policy                                                        1991             2
Beteille      Andre        Ch 9: Individualism and Equality        Society and Politics in India                            1991             3
Beteille                                                           Society and Politics in India
              (continued) Ch 10: Individual and Person as Subjects for Sociology                                            1991             3
Beteille      Andre        Ch 6: Caste in Contemporary India       Caste Today (Ed. Fuller)                                 1995             3
Beteille      Andre        The Secularism and/ Intellectuals       Economic and Political Weekly                            1994             3
Beteille      Andre        Ch 14: Caste in a South India Village Social Inequality - Selected Readings (Ed. Beteille)       1969             3
Beteille      Andre        Ch 1: The Two Sources of Inequality Inequality among Men                                         1977             3
Beteille      Andre        Harmonic and Disharmonic Social Systems Independent Essay Publ. by Sydney University Press 1971                   2
Beteille      Andre        The Idea of Natural Inequality          The Idea of Natural Inequality and Other Essays          1983             3
Beteille      (continued) Homo Hierarchicus, Homo Equalis          The Idea of Natural Inequality and Other Essays          1983             3
Bever                      Migration and The Transformation of Gender Roles and Hierarchies in Yucatan
              Sandra Weinstein                                     Urban Anthropology, vol. 31(2)                           2002             3
*Beynon       Huw          Ch 6: Controlling the Line              Working for Ford                                         1984             1
Bhabba        Jacqueline                                           Women, Citizenship and Difference (Eds.
                           Ch 11: Embodied Rights: Gender Persecution, State Sovereignty and Refugees Yuval/Davis & Werbner)1999             3
Bhabha        Homi K.      Liberalism's Sacred Cow                                                                          1999
                                                                   Is Multiculturalism Bad for Women? (Eds. Cohen, Howard & Nussbaum) 2
Bharadwaj     Krishna                                              Agriculture and the Development of Capitalism
                           A View on Commercialisation in Indian Journal of Peasant Studies, vol. 12(4)                     1985             3
Bhargava      Rajeev       How Not to Defend Secularism            South Asia Bulletin, Vol. XIV (1)                        1994             3
Biardeau      Madeleine                                            Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 18, no.1
                           The Sami Tree and the Sacrificial Buffalo                                                        1984             3
Bidou         Patrice      Ch 8: On Incest and Death               Between Belief and Transgression (Ed. Izard)             1982             3
Biesele       Megan                                                Contemporary
                           Tradition and Creativity in !Kung Narrative and Song Studies on Khoisan, vol. 1 (Eds. Vossen1986  & Kaultmann     3
Billig        Michael      Introduction                            Banal Nationalism                                        1997             2
Binsbergen Wims van                                                 Conflict Change in the Lumpa Rising
                           Ch 8: Religious Innovation and PoliticalReligious in Zambia: Zambia                              1981             3
Bird-David    Nurit                                                Dimensions of Social Life:
                           Single Persons and Social Cohesion in a Hunter-Gatherer Society Essays in Honor of David G. 1987                  3
                                                                                                                            Mandelbaum (Ed. Hockings)
Bird-David    Nurit                                                Hunters and Gatherers,
                           Ch 2: Hunter-gatherers and Other People: a Re-examination vol. 1 (Eds. Ingold, Riches, Woodburn) 1988             3
*Black        Max                                                  Theory in Anthropology - A Sourcebook (ed. Manners & Kaplan)
                           Linguistic Relativity: The Views of Benjamin Lee Whorf                                           1968             1
Black /Coward              Ch                                      Feminist Critique of Language (Ed. Deborah Cameron)1998
              Maria/Rosalind 8: Linguistic, Social and Sexual Relations: a Review of Dale Spender's Man Made Language                        3
Blackburn     Roderic H.   Ch 3: Okiek History                     Kenya Before 1900 (Ed. Ogot)                             1978             2
Blackburn     Roderic H.                                           Cultural Diversity Among Twentieth Century Foragers (Ed. Kent)
                           Ch 8: Fission, fusion, and foragers in East Africa                                               1996             2
Blackmore     Susan        Ch 2: The Memes' Eye View               Darwinizing Culture (Ed. Aunger)                         2000             3
Blackwood     Evelyn       Ch 3: Senior Women and Their HousesWebs of Power                                                 1999             2
Blackwood     Evelyn                                               Bewitching Women, Pious Men (Eds. Ong & Peletz)
                           Ch 4: Senior Women, Model Mothers and Dutiful Wives: Managing Gender Contradictions in a1995                      3
                                                                                                                             Minangkabau Village
              Piers/Harols Ch 6: Colonialism, Development and Degration
Blaikie/Brookfield                                                 Land, Degredation and Society                            1987             3
              Piers/Harols Ch 8: Degradation under pre-capitalist Land, Degredation and Society
Blaikie/Brookfield                                                 social systems                                           1987             3
Blanchet   Therese                                               Lost Innocence, Stolen Childhood
                         Ch 3: Persons, Society, State and Human Rights                                                 1996              3
Blanchet   (continued)   Ch 6: Child Workers in Bidi Factories Lost Innocence, Stolen Childhood                         1996              3
Blanchet   (continued)   Appendix: Bangladesh: An Overview Lost Innocence, Stolen Childhood                             1996              2
Blauner    Robert        Death and Social Structure              Psychiatry, vol. 29                                    1966              3
Bleier     Ruth                                                  Science and Gender - A Critique of Biology and Its Theories on Women 1
                         Ch 2: Sociobiology, Biologicacl Determinism and Human Behavior                                 1984
Bleier     (continued)                                           Science and Gender - A Critique of Biology and Its Theories on Women 1
                         Ch 7: Sexuality, Ideology, and Patriarchy                                                      1984
Bloch      Marc                                                  Slavery and Serfdom in the Middle Ages (transl. W.R. Beer)
                         Ch 1: How and Why Ancient Slavery Came to an End                                               1975              3
Bloch      Maurice       Miscellanous:                                                                                                   12
Bloch      (continued)   Ch 1: Introduction                                                                             1971              1
                                                                 Placing the Dead: tombs, ancestral villages, and kinship organisation in Madagascar
Bloch      (continued)                                           Cambridge Papers on Social Anthropology, no. 7
                         Decision/making in Councils Among the Merina of Madagascar                                     1970              1
Bloch      (continued)                                           Annales de le Regne de Radama Premier
                         Notes sur L'organisation Sociale de l'Imerina avantl'Universite de Madagascar, no. 7           1967              2
Bloch      (continued)                                           Nature, Culture and Gender (Eds. MacCormack & Strathern)
                         Ch 2: Women and the Dialectics of Nature in 18th Century French Though                         1980              1
Bloch      (continued)   Why do Malagasy Cows Speak French? !Kung: The Magazine of the LSE Anthropology Society 1972                      1
Bloch      (continued)                                           Man, vol.
                         The Moral and Tactical Meaning of Kinship Terms6(1)                                            1971              1
Bloch      (continued)   Astrology and Writing in Madagascar Literacy and Traditional Society (Ed. Goody)               1968              1
Bloch      (continued)                                           Man, in 1(2)
                         Discovery of an Apparently Neolithic Artefactvol.Madagascar                                    1966              1
Bloch      (continued)                                            from across the atlantic                      ?
                         Anthropology Since the Sixties as seen Transformation: Comparative Study of Social Transformation                1
Bloch      (continued)                                           JRAI
                         Truth and Sight: Generalising Without Universalising                                           2008              1
Bloch      (continued)                                            the 'Social' Among Names and Naming (Eds. Vom         2006
                         Ch 5: Teknonymy and the Evocation ofThe Anthropology ofthe Zafimaniry of Madagascar Bruck & Bodenhorn)1
Bloch      Maurice       Are Religious Beliefs Counter-intuitive Radical Interpretation in Religion (Ed. Frankenberry) 2002               2
Bloch      Maurice       Zafimaniry Birth and Kinship Theory Social Anthropology, vol. 1                                1993              3
Bloch      Maurice       Ch 1: Introduction                      Political Language and Oratory in Traditional Society 1974               2
Bloch      Maurice       Tombs and States                                                                               1982
                                                                 Mortality and Immortality: the Anthropology and Archaeology of Death 2
Bloch      Maurice                                               Shamanism, History, and
                         The Slaves, the King, and Mary in the Slums of Antananaarivo the State (Eds. Humphrey & 1994   Thomas)           3
Bloch      Maurice                                               Not published
                         Sex in the Tomb or the Origin of the State in Madagascar                               Not published             3
Bloch      Maurice                                                in Madagascar: Two Case of Slavery (Ed. Watson)
                         Ch 5: Modes of Production and SlaveryAsian and African Systems Studies                         1980              3
Bloch      Maurice       Commensality and Poisoning              Social Research, vol. 66(1)                            1999              3
Bloch      Maurice                                               Lse Communauties Rurales                               1983              2
                         The Changing Relationship Between Rural Communities and the State in Central Madagascar During the 19th and 20th Centurie
Bloch      Maurice                                               Coming into Existence (Ed. Aijmer)
                         Birth and the Beginning of Social Life among the Zafimaniry of Madagascar                      1992              3
Bloch      Maurice       Marriage Among Equals                   Man, vol. 13                                           1977              3
Bloch      Maurice       Property and the End of Affinity        Marxist Analysis in Social Anthropology                1975              3
Bloch      Maurice                                               Ancestors,
                         Ch 6: 'Eating' Young Men Among the Zafimaniry Power and History in Madagascar (Ed. Middleton)  1999              3
Bloch      Maurice       Hierarchy and Equality in Merina Kinship                                                       1986              3
                                                                 Madagascar - Society and History (Eds. Kottak, Rakotoarisoa, Southall & Verin)
Bloch      Maurice                                                Descent: Categories for Merina
                         The Implications of Marriage Rules andAmerican Anthripologist 73(1) Social Structures          1971              3
Bloch   Maurice                                              T
                      Why Trees, Too, Are Good to Think Withhe Social Life of Trees (Ed. Rival)                    1998       3
Bloch   Maurice                                              From Blessing to Violence
                      Ch 2: Background Politico-Religious History of the Merina, 1770-1970                         1986       2
Bloch   (continued)                                          From Blessing to Violence
                      Ch 3: Background to Merina Social Organisation and Religion                                  1986       2
Bloch   (continued)                                          From Blessing to Violence
                      Ch 8: The Circumcision Ritual in History                                                     1986       2
Bloch   Maurice                                              The Character of Kinship (Ed. Jack Goody)             Kinship
                      The Long Term and the Short Term: the Economic and Political Significance of the Morality of 1985       3
Bloch   Maurice       People Into Places                     The Anthropology of Landscape (Eds. Hirsch & O'Hanlon 1995       3
Bloch   Maurice       Literacy and Enlightenment             Literacy and Society (Eds. Schousboe & Larsen)        1989       3
Bloch   Maurice                                              Religion, Anthropology and Cognitive Science (Eds.    2007       3
                      Ch 2: Durkheimian Anthropology and Religion: Going In and Out of Each Other's Bodies Whitehouse & Laidlaw)
Bloch   Maurice       Ch 8: Death, Women and Power                                                                 1982
                                                             Death and the Regeneration of Life (Eds. Bloch & Parry)          3
Bloch   Maurice                                              How We Think
                      Ch 1: Language, Anthropology and Cognitive Science They Think                                1998       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          How We Think They Zafimaniry Society
                      Ch 2: What Goes Wihtout Saying: The Conceptualization of Think                               1998       3
Bloch   (continued)   Ch 3: Cognition and Ethnography        How We Think They Think                               1998       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          and We Think
                      Ch 4: Domain-Specificity, Living Kinds How SymbolismThey Think                               1998       2
Bloch   Maurice                                              How We Ways of Being in
                      Ch 5: Internal and External Memeory: Different Think They Think History                      1998       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          How We Think They Think
                      Ch 6: The Resurrection of the House Amongst the Zafimaniry of Madagascar                     1998       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          How We Think They Think
                      Ch 7: Time, Narratives and the Multiplicity of Representations of the Past                   1998       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          How We Think They Think
                      Ch 8: Autobiographical Memory and the Historical Memory of the More Distant Past             1998       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          How We Think They Think
                      Ch 11: The Uses of Schooling and Literacy in a Zafimaniry Village                            1998       3
Bloch   Maurice                                              Ritual,                                               1989
                      Ch 1: The Past and the Present in the Present History and Power: Selected Papers in Anthropology        3
Bloch   (continued)                                          Ritual, History and                                   1989
                      Ch 2: Symbols, Song, Dance and Features of Articulation Power: Selected Papers in Anthropology          3
Bloch   (continued)                                          Ritual, History a Process
                      Ch 3: The Disconnection Between Power and Rank as and Power: Selected Papers in Anthropology 1989       3
Bloch   Maurice       Ch 5: From Cognition to Ideology                                                             1989
                                                             Ritual, History and Power: Selected Papers in Anthropology       3
Bloch   (continued)                                           Kinship                                              1989
                      Ch 6: Hierarchy and Equality in Merina Ritual, History and Power: Selected Papers in Anthropology       1
Bloch   (continued)                                          Ritual, Representations of Women Papers in Anthropology
                      Ch 7: Descent and Sources of Contradiction inHistory and Power: Selected and Kinship         1989       3
Bloch   (continued)   Ch 8: Almost Eating the Ancestors                                                            1989
                                                             Ritual, History and Power: Selected Papers in Anthropology       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          Ritual, History and Power: Selected Papers in Anthropology
                      Ch 9: The Ritual of the Royal Bath in Madagascar                                             1989       3
Bloch   Maurice       Introduction                           Prey Into Hunter                                      1996       3
Bloch   (continued)   Ch 2: Initiation                       Prey Into Hunter                                      1996       3
Bloch   (continued)   Ch 4: Cosmogony and the State          Prey Into Hunter                                      1996       3
Bloch   (continued)   Ch 5: Marriage                         Prey Into Hunter                                      1996       3
Bloch   (continued)   Ch 6: Millenarianism                   Prey Into Hunter                                      1996       3
Bloch   Maurice                                              Marxism and Anthropology
                      Ch 1: Anthropology and the Work of Marx and Engels                                           1983       3
Bloch   (continued)   Ch 2: Marx and Engels on Anthropology  Marxism and Anthropology                              1983       3
Bloch   (continued)                                          Marxism and Anthropology
                      Ch 3: The Present-Day Standing of Marx's and Engels' Anthropology                            1983       3
Bloch        Maurice       Ch 5: Marxism and American Anthropology  Marxism and Anthropology                              1983           3
Bloch                                                               Marxism and
             (continued) Ch 6: Marxism and British and French Anthropology Anthropology                                   1983           3
Bloch        Maurice                                                Darwinising culture: the status                       2000           3
                           Ch 10: A well-disposed social anthropologist's problems with memes of memetics as a science (Eds. Robert Aunger)
             Maurice/S.
Bloch/Guggenheim                                                    Man, vol. 16
                           Compadrazgo, Baptism and the Symbolism of a Second Birth                                       1981           3
                           Ch 1:                                    Money Exchange
Bloch/Parry Maurice/Jonathan Introduction: Money and the Morality of and the Morality of Exchange (Eds. Bloch & Parry)    1989           3
                           Ch 1:                                    Death and the Regeneration of Life (Eds. Bloch & Parry)
Bloch/Parry Maurice/Jonathan Introduction: Death and the Regeneration of Life                                             1982           3
                                                                    Current The Mother's
Bloch/SperberMaurice/Dan Kinship and Evolved Psychological Dispositions:Anthropology Brother Controversy Reconsidered     2001           2
Bloom        Harold        Ch 1: What Is Religious Criticism?                                                             1992
                                                                    The American Religion: The Emergence of Post-Christian Nation        2
Blum         Joseph A.     Ch 4: Degradation without Deskilling Social Policy, vol. 32(4)                                 2002           3
Boas         Franz         Ch 8: Race, Language and Culture         The Mind of Primitive Man                             1911           3
Boas         (continued) Ch 9: Early Cultural Traits                The Mind of Primitive Man                             1911           3
Boas         Franz         Ch 10: The Interpretations of Culture The Mind of Primitive Man                                1911           3
Boas         Franz                                                  The Mind of of Culture
                           Ch 11: The Mind of Primitive Man and the Progress Primitive Man                                1911           3
Boas         Franz                                                  The Mind
                           Ch 12: The Emotional Associations of Primitives of Primitive Man                               1911           3
Boas         Franz         Introduction                             Primitive Art                                         1927           3
*Boas        Franz                                                  Science, vol. 4
                           The Limitations of the Comparative Method of Anthropology                                      1896           1
Boddy        Janice        Ch 5: Possession, Marriage, and Fertility                                                      Northern Sudan 3
                                                                    Wombs and Alien Spirits: Women, Men and the Zar in 1989
Bodenhorn    Barbara                                                Cambridge Anthropology, vol. 13(1)
                           Core Metaphors in a Contemporary Whaling Society                                               1988           2
Bodenhorn    Barbara                                                Cultures of of northern (Ed. Carsten)
                           Exploring the Bases of Relatedness among Inupiat Relatedness Alaska                            2000           3
Bodenhorn    Barbara       Gendered Spaces, Public Places           Political Landscapes (Ed. Bender)                     1993           3
Bodenhorn    Barbara       Person, Place and Parentage              Arctic Ecology and Identity (Ed. Mousalimas)          1995           3
Bodenhorn    Barbara       I'm Not the Great Hunter, My Wife Is Etudes/Inuit/Studies, vol. 14(1-2)                        1990           3
                           On Plissart                               the Occult and of Street
*Boeck/Marie Filip de/FrancoiseBeing Shege in Kinshasa- Children, Kinshasa: Talesthe the Invisible City                   2004           1
*Boer        H.S. de       Review of Nutrition in Uganda                                                                  1945
                                                                    Independent Essay Publ. by The Government Printer, Uganda            1
Bohannan     Laura                                                  Tribes Without Rulers (Eds. Middleton & Tait)
                           Political Aspects of Tiv Social Organization                                                   2004           3
Bohannan     Paul          The Differing Realms of the Law                                                                1967
                                                                    Law and Warfare - Studies in the Anthropology of Conflict            3
Bohannan     Paul                                                   Tribal and Peasant Economies (Ed. Dalton)
                           Ch 9: The Impact of Money on an African Subsistence Economy                                    1967           3
Bohannan     Paul          Ch 1: The People and the Problem         Justice and Judgement Among the Tiv                   1957           3
Bohannan     Paul          Miscellaneous:                                                                                                4
Bohannan     (continued) Ch 4: The Strucutre of the Jir             Justice and Judgement Among the Tiv                   1957           1
Bohannan     (continued) Introduction                                                                                     1967
                                                                    Law and Warfare - Studies in the Anthropology of Conflict            1
Bohannan     (continued) Anthropology and the Law                   The Voice of America Forum Lectures, vol. 15          1964           1
Bohannan     (continued) A Tiv Political and Religious Idea         Southwestern Journal of Anthropology, vol. 11(2)      1955           1
Bollig       Michael                                                The Other Nomads (Ed. Aparna Rao)
                           Ch 8: Ethnic Relations and Spatial Mobility in Africa                                          1987           3
*Bordo       Susan         Introduction                            Unbearable Weight: Feminism, Western Culture and the Body1993             1
Borenstein   Eliot                                                 Consuming Russia: Popular Culture, Sex and Societ Since Gorbachev (Ed. Barker)
                           Suspending Disbelief: 'Cults' and Postmodernism in Post-Soviet Russia                            1999             3
*Born        Georgina                                              Social Anthorpology, vol. 4(2)                           1996
                           (Im)materiality and Sociality: The Dynamics of Intellectual Property in a Computer Software Research Culture 1
Borneman     John                                                  Culture, Power, Two Berlins, 1945-1995                   1997             &
                           State, Territory, and National Identity Formation in the Place, Explorations in Critical Anthropology (Eds. Gupta 3 Ferguson
*Bornstein   Erica                                                 The Limits of in World Case Zimbabwe's Anthropology of Christianity 1
                                                                                                                            2006
                           Ch 4: Rituals Without Final Acts: Prayer and SuccessMeaning: VisionStudies in theHumanitarian Work                (Eds. Engelke &
Bose/Jalal                 C                                       Nationalism, Democracy and Development
             Sugata/Ayesha h 1: Nationalism, Democracy and Development                                                      1999             3
             T.B./Maximilien 1: Introduction: Marx's Sociology and Social Philosophy Writings in Sociology and Social Philosophy
Bottomore/Rubel            Ch                                      Karl Marx - Selected                                     1975             3
             (continued) Ch 2: The Influence of Marx's Sociological ThoughtSelected Writings in Sociology and Social Philosophy
Bottomore/Rubel                                                    Karl Marx -                                              1975             2
Boulay       Juliet Du                                              and Destiny in Rural Greece
                           Ch 7: Women - Images of Their NatureGender and Power in Rural Greece (Ed. Dubisch)               1986             3
Boulay       Juliet Du                                             Contested Identities: Gender and Kinship in Modern Greece (Eds. Loizos3 Papataxiarchis
                           Ch 2: Cosmos and Gender in Village Greece                                                        1991              &
Bouquet      Mary          Introduction                                                                                     1993             3
                                                                   Reclaiming English Kinship: Portuguese Refractions of British Kinship Theory
Bouquet      (continued) Ch 5: Disclosing English Kinship                                                                   1993             3
                                                                   Reclaiming English Kinship: Portuguese Refractions of British Kinship Theory
Bourdieu     Pierre        Preface                                 The Logic of Practice                                    1990             3
Bourdieu     (continued) Introduction                              The Logic of Practice, Book 1                            1990             3
Bourdieu     (continued) Ch 1: Objectification Objectified         The Logic of Practice, Book 1                            1990             3
Bourdieu                                                           The Logic of
             (continued) Ch 2: The Imaginary Anthropology of Subjectivism Practice, Book 1                                  1990             3
Bourdieu     (continued) Ch 3: Structures, Habitus, Practices      The Logic of Practice, Book 1                            1990             3
Bourdieu     (continued) Ch 4: Belief and the Body                 The Logic of Practice, Book 1                            1990             3
Bourdieu     Pierre        Ch 2: The Social Uses of Kinship        The Logic of Practice, Book 2                            1990             3
Bourdieu                                                           The Logic of
             (continued) Appendix: The Kabyle House or the World ReversedPractice                                           1990             3
Bourdieu     Pierre                                                 of Legitimate Language
                           Ch 1: The Production and ReproductionLanguage and Symbolic Power                                 1991             1
Bourdieu                                                           Language and
             (continued) Ch 2: Price Formation and the Anticipation of Profits Symbolic Power                               1991             2
Bourdieu     (continued) Ch 3: Authorized Language                 Language and Symbolic Power                              1991             3
Bourdieu     (continued) Ch 4: Rites of Institution                Language and Symbolic Power                              1991             1
Bourdieu     Pierre                                                Outline of a Theory of Practice
                           Ch 1: The Objective Limits of Objectivism                                                        1977             3
Bourdieu     Pierre        Ch 2: Structures and the Habitus        Outline of a Theory of Practice                          1977             3
Bourdieu                                                           Outline Invention of Practice
             (continued) Ch 3: Generative Schemes and Practical Logic:of a TheoryWithin Limits                              1977             2
Bourdieu     Pierre                                                The Field of Cultural Production: Essays on Art and Literature
                           Ch 8: Outline of a Sociological Theory of Art Perception                                         1993             3
Bourdieu     Pierre                                                Honour and Shame (Ed. Peristiany)
                           The Sentiment of Honour in Kabyle Society                                                        1965             3
Bourdieu     Pierre        Ch 1: The Aristocracy of Culture                                                                 1984
                                                                   Distinction: A Social Critique of The Judgement of Taste, Part 1          3
Bourdieu     Pierre                                                Social
                           The Three Forms of Theoretical Knowledge Science Information, vol. 12                            1973             3
Bourdillon   M.F.C.        Introduction                            Sacrifice (Eds. Bourdillon & Fortes)                     1980             1
             (continued)                                           Sacrifice (Eds. Bourdillon & Fortes)
Bourdillon/Barrington-WardPostscript: A Place for Sacrifice in Modern Christianity?                                         1980             1
Bowen        John R.       Ch 1: Introduction                                                                               1993
                                                                   Muslims Through Discourse: Religion and Ritual in Gayo Society            3
Bowen                                                             Kenduri and its Critics                               1993
             (continued) Ch 10: Transacting Through Food: The Muslims Through Discourse: Religion and Ritual in Gayo Society              2
Bowen                                                            Muslims                                                1993
             (continued) Ch 14: The Social Forms of Religious Change Through Discourse: Religion and Ritual in Gayo Society               3
Bowler       P.                                                  The Non-Darwinian Revolution
                          Ch 1: The Myth of the Darwinian Revolution                                                    1988              3
Bowler       (continued) Ch 2: Darwin's Originality              The Non-Darwinian Revolution                           1988              3
Bowler       (continued) Ch 6: Human Evolution                   The Non-Darwinian Revolution                           1988              3
Boxill       Bernard                                             Racism as Divided by Race
                          Ch 10: Why We Should Not Think of Ourselvesin Mind (Eds. Levine & Pataki)                     2004              3
             R./P.J.
Boyd/Richerson                                                   Roots of Social Instincts
                          Ch 17: Culture and the Evolution of the Human Human Sociality (Eds. Mestell & Pels)           2005              3
Boyer        Dominic      Ch 1: Talking Media, Thinking Media Understanding Media: A Popular Philosophy                 2007              3
Boyer        Pascal                                              Mapping the Mind: Natural Ontologies and Religious IdeasCulture (Eds. Hirschfeld & Gelman
                          Ch 15: Cognitive Constraints on Cultural Representations: Domain Specificity in Cognition and1994               3
Boyer        Pascal                                              Anthropological Theory Today (Ed. Moore)
                          Ch 8: Human Cognition and Cultural Evolution                                                  1999              2
Boyer        Pascal       Ch 3: The Kind of Mind it Takes        Religion Explained                                     2001              3
BrandtstadterSusanne                                             The Postsocialist Agrarian Question (Ed. Hann)
                          Ch 14: The Moral Economy of Kinship and Property in Southern China                            2003              3
Brass        Tom                                                 The Journal of Peasant Studies, vol. 10(1)
                          Class Struggle and the Deproletarianinsation of Agricultural Labour in Haryana (India)        1990              3
Brass        Tom                                                 New in India
                          Introduction: The New Farmers' MovementsFarmers' Movements in India                           1995              3
Brass        Tom                                                 New the Discrouse of the in India
                          The Politics of Gender, Nature and Nation inFarmers' Movements New Farmers' Movement          1995              3
Brass        Tom                                                 International Review of and Deproletarianization
                          Some Observations on Unfree Labour, Capitalist Restructuring,Social History, vol. 39(2)       1994              2
Brass        Paul         Preface                                Theft of an Idol                                       1997              1
Brass        (continued) Ch 1: Text and Context                  Theft of an Idol                                       1997              1
Brass                                                            Theft
             (continued) Ch 7: Kala Bachcha: Portrait of a BJP Hero of an Idol                                          1997              3
Braverman Harry           Ch 4: Scientific Management            Labour and Monopoloy Capital                           1974              3
             Carol/Peter                                         Orientalism and the Postcolonial Predicament (Eds. Breckenridge & van der Veer)
Breckenridge/van der Veer Orientalism and the Postcolonial Predicament                                                  1993              3
Breman       Jan                                                   Post-Colonial India - The Formal Sector: An Introductory Review
                          Ch 1: The Study of Industrial Labour inThe Worlds of Indian Industrial Labour                 1999              3
Breman       Jan          Ch 4: Contact Between Demand and Supply                                                       1
                                                                 Footloose Labour: Working in India's Informal Economy 996                3
Breman       Jan                                                 Footloose                                              1
                          Ch 8: Proletarian Life and Social Consciousness Labour: Working in India's Informal Economy 996                 3
*Breman      Jan                                                 Wage Hunters and Gatherers
                          Prologue: Dualistic Laobur System? A Critique of the Informal Sector Concept                  1994              1
Briggs       Jean         Ch 4: 'Want to Come Live with Me?'                                                            1993
                                                                 Inuit Morality Play: The Emotional Education of a Three-year Old         3
Brittan      Arthur       Ch 1: Masculinities                    Masculinity and Power                                  1989              3
Brody        Hugh         Seeming to be Real: Disappearing World and the Film in Pond Inlet                             1977              3
Brokensha    David                                                Control of African Aids
                          Social Factors in the Transmission and Aids in Africa?                                        1988              2
                          Ch                                     Ethnicity at Foundries
Brooks/Singh Dennis/Karamjit 4: Pivots and Presents - Asian Brokers in BritishWork (Ed. Wallman)                        1979              1
Brown                                                            Society for Comparative Study from Madagascar
             Margaret L. Reclaiming Lost Ancestors and Acknowledging Slave Descent: Insightsof Society and History 2004                   3
Brown        Peter                                               The
                          Ch 19: Augustine: Sexuality and Society Body and Society                                      1988              2
Brown        K.S                                                  the Landscapes
                          Seeing stars: Character and Identity inAntiquity vol. 68 of Modern Macedonia                  1994              3
Brubaker     R.           Rationalism of Modern Civilisation     The Limits of Rationality                              1984              3
*Bruce      Steve        Introduction                           Religion in the Modern World                           1996             1
Bruck                                                           La Violence View of (Eds. Roy & of Legitimate Violence in the Yemeni Imamate
            Gabriele vom The Ambiguity of Peacemaking: An Anthropologicalet L'Etat the Concept Trotha)                 1993             3
Bruck       Gabriele vom Miscellaneous:                                                                                                 9
Bruck       (continued) Kinship and the Embodiment of HistoryHistory and Anthropology, vol. 10(4)                      1998             1
Bruck                                                           Die Welt of Religion
            (continued) Disputing Descent-Based Authority in the Idiom des Islams, XXXVIII(2)                          1998             1
Bruck                                                           Journal of Women in Culture and Society, vol. 23(1) 1997
            (continued) Elusive Bodies: The Politics of Aesthetics among Yemeni Elite Women                                             1
Bruck       (continued) Ibrahim''s Childhood                    Middle Eastern Studies, vol. 35(2)                     1999             1
Bruck                                                           Le Yemen
            (continued) Ch 8: Being a Zaydi in the Absence of an Imam Contemporain                                     1999             1
Bruck                                                            Marriage Practices amongst Yemeni
            (continued) Enacting Tradition: The Legitimation of Cambridge Anthropology, vol. 16(2) Sadah        1992/1993               1
Bruck                                                           Social Anthropology, vol. 4(2)
            (continued) Being Worthy of Protection: The Dialectics of Gender Attributes in Yemen                       1996             1
Bruck       (continued) Down-Playing Gender                     QSA, vol. 12                                           1994             1
Bruck       (continued) A House Turned Inside Out               Journal of Material Culture, vol. 2(2)                 1997             1
Bruckner    Heidrum      Miscellanous:                                                                                                  2
Bruckner                                                        Flags of Interrelated Oral Traditions
            (continued) Kannalaye: The Place of a Tulu Paddana AmongFame: Studies in South Asian Folk Culture          1993             1
Bruckner                                                        Tender Ironies: A Tribute to
            (continued) Dimensions of Intertextuality in Anantha Murthy's Novel Samskara Lothar Lutze (Eds. Chitre, 1994                1
                                                                                                                        Sontheimer, Bruckner, Feldhaus,
            Deborah/Ulla Ch 1: Transnational Families in the Twentyfirst Century Family - New European Frontiers and Global Networks
Bryceson/Vuorela                                                The Transnational                                      2002             3
Bryson      Norman                                              Rape (Eds. and the & Porter)
                         Two Narratives of Rape in the Visual Arts: LucretiaTomaselliSabince Women                     1986             3
Buchli      Victor                                                                                                     2007
                         Ch 2: Astana: Materiality and the City Urban Life in Post-Soviet Asia (Eds. Alexander, Buchli & Humphrey       3
Buenconsejo Jose         Ch 1: The Rivers of Exchange           Songs and Gifts at the Frontier                        2002             3
*Bulag      V.E.         Ch 5: The Discourse of Race in MongoliaNationalism and Hybridity in Mongolia                  1998             1
*Bundgaard Helle                                                Folk, an 45
                         Waste Matters: The Social Life of Garbage invol. Upper-Middle-Class Area of Chennai, India 2003                1
Bunt        Gary R.                                             Religion Online: Finding Faith on the Internet (Eds. Dawson & Cowan) 3
                         Ch 9: 'Rip.Burn. Pray.': Islamic Expression Online                                            2004
Burawoy     Michael      Thirty Years of Making Out                                                                    1988
                                                                On Work: Historical, Comparative and Theoretical Approaches             3
Burawoy     Michael      Miscellaneous:                                                                                                 3
Burawoy                                                         The Politics of Production
            (continued) Ch 3: The Changing Face of Factory Regimes under Advanced Capitalism                           1987             1
Burawoy     (continued) Ch 4: Workers in Workers' States        The Politics of Production                             1987             1
            (continued) Introduction (Burawoy & Verdery, K.) Uncertain Transition (Eds. Burawoy & Verdery)
Burawoy/Verdery                                                                                                        1999             1
Burghart    Richard                                             The Conditions of Nepal
                         Ch 9: The Category of 'Hindu' in the Political Discourseof Listening                          1996             3
Burghart                                                        The Conditions of Listening
            (continued) Ch 10: Cultural Collusion in Ethnography: The Religious Tolerance of Hindus                    1996             1
Burman      Sandra                                              Women and Property, Women as
                         Divorce and the Disadvantaged: African Women in Urban South Africa Property                   1984             4
Burridge    Kenelm       Ch 2: Opening the Problem                                                                     1969
                                                                New Heaven, New Earth - A Study of Millenarian Activities               1
Burridge    (continued) Ch 3: Polynesian Illustrations                                                                 1969
                                                                New Heaven, New Earth - A Study of Millenarian Activities               1
Burridge    (continued) Ch 7: Aspects of Integrity                                                                     1969
                                                                New Heaven, New Earth - A Study of Millenarian Activities               1
Burridge    Kenelm       Ch 1: The New Guinea Scene             Mambu                                                  1960             1
Burridge      (continued) Ch 2: The People                            Mambu                                                1960             1
Burridge      Kenelm        Ch 1: History, Land and Work              Tangu Traditions                                     1969             3
Butler        Judith        Introduction                              Bodies That Matter                                   1993             2
Butler        (continued) Ch 4: Gender is Burning?                    Bodies That Matter                                   1993             2
Buur          Lars                                                    States of Imagination
                            The South African Truth and Reconciliation Commission                                          2001             3
Bynum         Caroline                                                Holy Feast and Holy Fast
                            Ch 5: Food in the Writings of Women Mystics                                                    1987             2
Bynum         Caroline                                                The
                            Intro: Seed Images, Ancient and Modern Resurrection of the Body in Western Christianity 1995                    2
Cadena                                                                and Mestizaje in Latin Americas, vol 34 (6)
              Marisol de la Reconstructing Race - Racism, Culture NACLA - Report on theAmerica                             2001             3
Cadena                                                                Ethnicity, Markets, a Community in the Andes: the Crossroads of History and Anthropolo
              Marisol de la Ch 11: 'Women Are More Indian': Ethnicity and Gender in and Migration near Cuzco               1995             3
Callaway      Helen                                                   Defining Females: Birth                              1978
                            Ch 7: 'The Most Essentially Female Function of all' Giving The Nature of Women in Society (Ed. Ardener)         3
Cameron       Avril         Introduction                              Christianity and the Rhetoric of Empire              1991             2
              Charles/Philip/David
Camic/Gorski/Trubek         Introduction                                                                                   2005
                                                                      Max Weber's Economy and Society - A Critical Companion                3
Campbell      J.K           Ch 8: The Family as a Corporate GroupHonour, Family and Patronage                              1964             3
Campbell      J.K           The Kindred in a Greek Mountain Community Mediterranean Countrymen (Ed. Pitt-Rivers)           1963             1
Campbell-JonesSuzanne                                                 Sacrifice (Eds. a Convent Setting
                            Ritual in Performance and Interpretation: The Mass in Bourdillon & Fortes)                     1980             1
Cannadine     David                                                   Mirrors of Mortality (Ed. Whaley)
                            Ch 8: War and Death, Grief and Mourning in Modern Britain                                      1981             2
Cannell       Fenella                                                 The Anthropology of Christianity (Ed. Cannell)
                            Introduction: The Anthropology of Christianity                                                 2006             2
Cannell       Fenella       Introduction                              Power and Intimacy in the Christian Phillipines      1998             3
Cannell       Fenella                                                 Power
                            Part 3, ch 8: The Funeral of the 'Dead Christ' and Intimacy in the Christian Phillipines       1998             2
Cannell                                                               Power and
              (continued) Part 3, ch 10: Beauty and the Idea of 'America' Intimacy in the Christian Phillipines            1998             2
Cannell       Fenella                                                 Power and
                            Conclusion: Oppression, Pity and Transformation Intimacy in the Christian Phillipines          1998             3
Cannell       Fenella                                                 Royal
                            The Imitation of Christ in Bicol, Philippines Anthropological Institute vol. 1 (2)             1995             3
Cannell       Fenella                                                 Report
                            Concepts of Parenthood: The Warnock American Ethnologist, vol. 17                              1990             3
Cannell       Fenella       Fear and the Fate of the Soul in Bicol Anthropology of Fear (Eds. Barnes, Morphy & Banks) 1993                  3
*Cannell      Fenella       What Makes Ritual Work?                   Questions of Anthropology (Eds. Astuti & Stafford)   2007             1
Cannell       Fenella                                                 Spirited Politics (Eds. Willford & George)
                            Immaterial Culture: 'Idolatry' in the Lowland Philippines                                      2005             3
Caplan        Ann-Patricia Ch 1: Ecology, Population and Economy      Choice and Constraint in a Swahili Community         1975             3
Caplan        Lionel        Dimensions of Urban Poverty: Anglo-Indian Poor and Their Guardians in Madras                   1996             3
Caplan        Pat           Introduction                              The Cultural Construction of Sexuality               1987             2
Caplan        Patricia                                                Women and Property, Women as Property
                            Ch 2: Cognatic Descent, Islamic Law and Women's Property on the East-African Coast             1984             3
Caraveli      Anna                                                    Gender and Power
                            Ch 8: The Bitter Wounding: The Lament as Social Protest in Rural Greece (Ed. Dubisch)          1986             3
*Carey/Spelke               Ch                                        Conceptual Change
              Susan/Elizabeth 7: Domain-Specific Knowledge and Mapping the Mind (Eds. Hirschfeld & Gelman)                 1994             1
Carrier       Achsah                                                  The Business of Marriage - Transformations in Oceanic1993
                            Marriage Exchange on Ponam Island, from 1920 to 1985                                                            2
                                                                                                                            Matrimony (Ed. Marksbury)
              A
Carrier/Carrier chsah/James Approaching Ponam                         Structure and Process in a Melanesian Society        1991             3
Carrier       James G.     Gifts in a World of Commodities        Social Analysis, vol. 29                                1990              2
Carrier       James G.     Introduction                           Meanings in the Market                                  1997              3
Carrier       James G.                                            The Anthropology of Friendship (Eds. Bell & Coleman) 1999
                           Ch 2: People Who Can Be Friends: Selves and Social Relationships                                                 3
Carrithers    Michael      Ch 1: The Question                     Why Humans Have Cultures: Explaining Anthropology 1992                    1
                                                                                                                          and Human Diversity
Carrithers    (continued) Ch 2: The Great Arc                     Why Humans Have Cultures: Explaining Anthropology 1992                    1
                                                                                                                          and Human Diversity
Carsten       Janet        Ch 2: Houses of Memory and Kinship After Kinship                                               2004              1
Carsten       (continued) Ch 6: Families into Nation              After Kinship                                           2004              3
Carsten       Janet        Introduction: Cultures of Relatedness Cultures of Relatedness                                  2000              3
Carsten       Janet                                               Coming among Malays
                           The Process of Childbirth and becoming related into Existance                                  1992              3
Carsten       Janet        Introduction                           About the House, Levi-Strauss and Beyond                1995              3
Carsten       Janet        Ch 5: Houses in Langkawi               About the House, Levi-Strauss and Beyond                1995              3
*Carsten      Janet                                               De la Hutte au Pulau Societes 'a maison' en             1987
                           Analogues of Opposites: Household and Community inPalais: Langkawi, Malayasia Asie du sud-est insulaire 1
*Casey        Edward S.                                           Senses of Place Stretch of Time
                           Ch 1: How to Get from Space to Place in a Fairly Short (Eds. Feld & Basso)                     1996              1
Cassidy       Rebecca      Ch 5: Having a Flutter                 The Sport of Kings                                      2002              2
Cassidy       (continued) Ch 9: Blood Will Tell                   The Sport of Kings                                      2002              1
*Cassin       Elena        The Death of the Gods                                                                          1981              1
                                                                  Mortality and Immortality: the Anthropology and Archaeology of Death (Eds. Humphreay
Castells      Manuell      Ch 1: Communal Heavens                 The Power of Identity                                   1997              3
Castells      Manuell                                             The Power of Identity
                           Ch 2: The Other Face of the Earth: Social Movements Against the New Global Order               1997              3
Castillo                   Genero y Ciudadania Diferenciada en Mexico: Mujeres y Hombres Indigenas: Reinventando la2005
              Rosalva Aida Hernandez                                                                                       Cultura y Redefiniendo la Nacion
                                                                                                                                            2
                                                                  Citizenship, Political Culture and State Transformation in Latin America (Eds. Assies, Cald
Castillo                                                          Citizenship, Political Culture Women and Men Re-invent Culture and Redefine the Nation
              (continued) Ch 18: Gender and Differentiated Citizenship in Mexico: Indigenousand State Transformation 2005                   1
                                                                                                                          in Latin America (Eds. Assies, Cald
Castro                     Ch de                                  Beyond the Visable and Material: The Amerindianisation of society in the works of Peter R
              Eduardo Viveiros 2: Gut Feelings about Amazonia: Potential Affinity and the Construction of Sociality       2002              3
Castro                     AND
              Eduardo Viveiros de                                                                                         2003
                                                                  Speech at Anthropology and Science, 5th Decennial Conference…             2
*Castro                    Dravidian and Related Kinship SystemsTransformation of Kinship Systems (Ed. Godelier, Trautman & Fat)
              Eduardo Viveiros de                                                                                         1998              1
               et al.
Cavalli-SforzaL. et al.                                           The History and Geography of Human Genes
                           Ch 1.5: Classical Attempts to Distinguish Human 'Races'                                        1994              3
               et al.                                             The History and Geography of Human Genes
Cavalli-Sforza(continued) Ch 1.6: Scientific Failure of the Concept of Human Races                                        1994              3
               et al.
Cavalli-Sforza(continued) Ch 1.7: Identifying Population Units    The History and Geography of Human Genes                1994              3
Cernea        Michael                                             Human Organization vol. 54 (3)
                           Social Organization and Development Anthropology                                               1995              3
Certeau       Michel de    General Introduction                   The Practice of Everyday Life                           1984              3
Certeau       (continued) Ch 7: Walking in the City               The Practice of Everyday Life, Pt 3                     1984              2
Certeau                                                           The
              (continued) Ch 8: Railway Navigation and IncarcerationPractice of Everyday Life, Pt 3                       1984              2
Certeau       (continued) Ch 9: Spatial Stories                   The Practice of Everyday Life, Pt 3                     1984              3
                           Ch 1:
Chabal/Daloz Patrick/Jean-Pascal W(h)ither the State?             Africa Works: Disorder and Political Instrument         1999              1
Chabal/Daloz (continued) Ch 2: The Illusions of Civil Society     Africa Works: Disorder and Political Instrument         1999              2
                                                                  The Worlds of Indian Industrial Labour (Eds. Parry, Breman & Kapadia) 3
ChandavarkarRajnarayan Ch 7: Questions of Class: The General Strikes in Bombay                                            1999
ChandavarkarRajnarayan Miscellanous:                                                                                                         2
                                                                  The Origins
Chandavarkar(continued) Ch 2: The Setting: Bombay City and its Hinterland of Industrial Capitalism in India              1994                1
                                                                  Imperial Power Between the Wars                        and the State in India
Chandavarkar(continued) Ch 4: Workers' Politics and the Mill Districs in Bombay and Popular Politics: Class, Resistance 1998                 1
             Marie-Francoise 5: Narrative Structures, Social Models and Symbolic The Feminist Practice of Oral History (Eds. Gluck & Patai)
Chanfrault-Duchet         Ch                                      Women's Work: Represetnation in the Life Story         1991                1
Chanock      Martin                                               Law, Custom and Social Order
                          Ch 1: Social and Legal History in Central Africa                                               1985                3
Chanock      Martin       Ch 2: African Law and Anthropologists Law, Custom and Social Order                             1985                3
Chanock      Martin                                               Beyond Rights Talk and Culture Talk
                          Culture' and Human Rights: Orientalising, Occidentalising and Authenticity                     2000                3
Chatterjee   Indrani                                              Gender, Slavery and Lawa in Colonial India
                          Ch 1: Searching for Slaves in Indian History                                                   1999                3
Chatterjee   Indrani                                              Gender, Murschidabad
                          Ch 2: Kinship and Kinlessness in the Nizamat ofSlavery and Lawa in Colonial India              1999                3
Chatterjee   Indrani      Ch 3: Making and Becoming Kin           Gender, Slavery and Lawa in Colonial India             1999                3
Chatterjee   Partha       Miscellanous:                                                                                                      2
Chatterjee   (continued) Ch 3: The Politics of the Governed                                                              2006                1
                                                                  The Politics of the Governed: Reflections on Popular Politics in Most of the World
Chatterjee                                                        Contested Transformations: Changing Econimies and Identities in Contemporary India (E
             (continued) Ch 7: Are Indian Cities Becoming Bourgeois at Last?                                             2006                1
Chatterjee   Partha       Ch 1: Whose Imagined Community                                                                 1994
                                                                  The Nation and it's Fragments: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories         3
Chatterjee   (continued) Ch 6: The Nation and Its Women                                                                  1994
                                                                  The Nation and it's Fragments: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories         3
Chatterjee   (continued) Ch 7: Women and the Nation                                                                      1994
                                                                  The Nation and it's Fragments: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories         3
Chatterjee   (continued) Ch 11: Communties and the Nation                                                                1994
                                                                  The Nation and it's Fragments: Colonial and Postcolonial Histories         3
Chatterjee   Partha       Ch 1: The Facts of the Matter                                                                  2002                2
                                                                  A Princely Impostor?: The Strange and Universal History of the Kumar of Bhawal
Chatterjee   (continued) Ch 18: The Decision                                                                             2002                2
                                                                  A Princely Impostor?: The Strange and Universal History of the Kumar of Bhawal
Chhachhi     Amrita                                               Women, Islam and the State
                          Forced Identities: the State Communalism, Fundamentalism and Women in India                    1991                3
*Chopra      Radhika                                              Educational Migration                                  2005
                          Ch 14: Sisters and Brothers: Schooling, Family andRegimes in Contemporary India (Eds. Chopra & Jeffery)            1
Chung        Kwan Lee     Ch 6: Localistic Despotism                                                                     1998
                                                                  Gender the South China Miracle: Two Worlds of Factory Women                3
Chomsky      Noam                                                 Knowledge of
                          Ch 1: Knowledge of Language as a Focus of Inquiry Language                                     1986                3
             S
Christopherson usan                                               Post Consumer Citizenship
                          Ch 14: The Fortress City: Privatised Spaces,Fordism                                            1994                3
Clammer      J.                                                   Ethnographic Research (Ed. Ellen)
                          Ch 4: Approaches to Ethnographic Research                                                      1984                3
Clark        David                                                 Limits on the Scope of Ethnicity
                          Ch 8: Politics and Business Enterprise -Ethnicity at Work (Ed. Wallman)                        1979                1
Clark        Jeffrey                                              Narratives of Nation the Highlands of Papua New Guinea.
                          Imagining the State; or Tribalism and the art of memory in in the South Pacific                1997                3
Classen      Constance    Ch 4: The Odour of the Other                                                                   1993
                                                                  Worlds of Sense: Exploring the Senses in History and Across Cultures 2
Clastres     Pierre       Exchange and Power                      Society Against the State                              1987                3
Clastres     (continued) Of Torture in Primitive Societies        Society Against the State                              1987                3
Claussen     Heather L.   Ch 1: Sign Me Sister, OSB                                                                      the Philippines 2
                                                                  Unconventional Sisterhood - Feminist Catholic Nuns in 2001
Cliford      James        Ch 1: On Ethnographic Authority         The Predicament of Culture                             1988                3
Clifford     (continued) Ch 10: On Collecting Art and Culture The Predicament of Culture                                 1988                2
Cliford      (continued) Ch 12: Identity in Mashpee               The Predicament of Culture                             1988                1
Cliford       James          Ch 7: Museums as Contact Zones         Travel and Translation in the Late Twentieth Century 1997                2
Cliford       James          Introduction: Partial truths           Writing Culture                                       1986               3
Cockburn      Cynthia                                                the Printers
                             Ch 10: The Nature of Skill: the Case ofThe Experience of Work (ed. Littler)                  1985               2
Cohen         Abner          Introduction: The Lesson of Ethnicity Urban Ethnicity (Ed. Cohen)                            1974               1
Cohen         Abner          Ch 5: Symbolic Strategies in Group.. Two-Dimensional Man                                     1974               2
Cohen                                                               Two-Dimensional Man
              (continued) Ch 6: 'Invisible' Organisations: Some Case Studies                                              1974               1
Cohen         Anthony P. Introduction                                                                                     1988
                                                                    Whalsay: Symbol, Segment and Boundary in a Shetland Island Community     3
Cohen         D.W.           The Several Landscapes of Siaya        Siaya                                                 1989               3
Cohen         Myron                                                   China
                             Ch 2: Writs of Passage in Late ImperialContract and Proprty in Early Modern China            2004               3
Cohen         Myron                                                 The of Traditional Identity                           1994
                             Ch 4: Being Chinese: The Peripheralization Living Tree: The Changing Meaning of Being Chinese Today             3
*Cohen        Myron                                                 Locating Capitalism Share,       Space: Global Restructurings, Politics and Identity (Ed. N
                                                                                                                          2002
                             Commodity Creation in Late Imperial China - Corporations,in Time and Contracts in One Rural Community           1
Cohen         Stanley        Towards Cultures of Denial             States of Denial                                      2001               3
Cohen         Stanley                                               American Bar Foundation
                             State Crimes of Previous Regimes: Knowledge, Accountability, and the Policing of the Past    1995               3
Cohn          B.                                                    An Anthropologist Amongst the Historians
                             Antrhropology and History in the 1980s: Towards a Rapproachment                              1981               3
Cole/Wolf     John W.        Ch 11: Cultural Confrontation          The Hidden Frontier                                   1974               3
Cole          Jennifer                                              Ancestors, Madagascar                                 1999
                             Ch 7: Sacrifice, Narratives and Experience in East Power and History in Madagascar (Ed. Middleton)              3
Cole          M.                                                     and Schooling
                             Ch 3: Cognitive Development, Culture, Cultural Psychology                                    1996               3
Cole                                                                Cultural Psychology
              (continued) Ch 4: From Cross-Cultural Psychology to the Second Psychology                                   1996               1
Cole          (continued) Ch 7: A Cultural Approach to OntogenyCultural Psychology                                        1996               1
Cole                                                                Cultural Psychology
              (continued) Ch 8: The Cognitive Analysis of Behavior in Context                                             1996               3
*Cole/Cole                   Ch
              Jennifer/Michael 15: Rethinking the Goody Myth                                                              2006
                                                                    Technology, Literacy and the Evolution of Society (Eds. Olson & Cole) 1
Coleman       Simon                                                 Ethnos, vol. 56
                             Faith Which Conquers the World'- Swedish Fundamentalism and the Globalization of Culture 1991                   3
Coleman       Simon                                                 The in the modern
                             Ch 1: A 'weird babel of tongues': charisma Globalisation of Charismatic Christianity         2000               2
Collard       Anna                                                  History Context                                       1989
                             Ch 6: Investigating 'Social Memory' in a Greek and Ethnicity (Eds. Tonkin, McDonald & Chapman)                  3
              Jane/Bill/Liliana
Collier/Maurer/Suarez-Navaz                                         Identities, vol. 2(1-2)
                             Sanctioned Identities: Legal constructions of Modern Personhood                              1995               3
              J                                                                                                            and
Collier/Rosaldoane/Michelle Politics and Gender in Simple Societies Sexual Meanings; The Cultural Construction of Gender 1981Sexuality       3
              Jane/Michelle/Sylvia                                    Views
Collier/Rosaldo/Yanagisako Is there a Family? New AnthropologicalRethinking the Family - Some Feminist Questions          1992               3
                             Ch                                     Global Assemblages: Technology, Politics and Ethics as Anthropological Problems (Eds. C
Collier/Ong Stephen J./Aihwa1: Global Assemblages, Anthropological Problems                                               2005               3
              Jane/Sylvia Introduction
Collier/Yanagisako                                                  Gender and Kinship                                    1987               2
Collins       Jane                                                   Chains; The and Globalization
                             Tracing Social Relations in Commodity Commoditiescase og Grapes in Brazil                    2000               3
Colson        Elisabeth      Ch 3: The Move and Its Aftermath                                                             1971
                                                                    Kariba Studies - The Social Consequences of Resettlement                 2
Comaroff      Jean                                                  Body of Power, Spirits of Resistance
                             Ch 6: Alienation and the Kingdom of Zion                                                     1985               2
Comaroff                                                            Body of Power, Spirits Context
              (continued) Ch 7: Ritual as Historical Practice Mediation in the Neocolonialof Resistance                   1985               6
Comaroff      John                                                  Gender and Kinship: Essays                             (Eds.             4
                             Sui genderis; Feminism, Kinship Theory, and Structural "Domains" Toward a Unified Analysis 1987 Collier & Yanagisako)
              John/Jean
Comaroff/Comaroff            Miscellanous:                                                                                                    3
              (continued)
Comaroff/Comaroff            Ch 6: Conversion and Conversation                                                                and             1
                                                                     Of Revelation and Revolution: Christianity, Colonialism1991 Consciousness in South Afric
              (continued)
Comaroff/Comaroff            Ch 1: Introduction                      Civil Society and the Political Imagination of Africa   1999             1
              (continued)
Comaroff/Comaroff            Ch 17: Of Revelation and Revoluation The Antrhopology of Politics (Ed. Vincent)                 2002             1
              John/Jean
Comaroff/Comaroff                                                    Economy and Society, vol. 18(3)
                             The Colonization of Consciousness in South Africa                                               1989             3
              John/Jean
Comaroff/Comaroff                                                    Ethnography and the Historical Imagination
                             Ch 3: Bodily Reform as Historical Practice                                                      1992             3
              (continued)
Comaroff/Comaroff            Ch 6: The Madman and the Migrant        Ethnography and the Historical Imagination              1992             3
              John/S.
Comaroff/Roberts             Ch 4: The Context of Dispute            Rules and Processes                                     1981             3
              (continued)
Comaroff/Roberts             Ch 5: Dispute Processes 1               Rules and Processes                                     1981             3
Connerton     Paul           Ch 3: Bodily Practices                  How Societies Remember                                  1989             2
              Bob/Robin
Connolly/ Anderson           Ch: 1 What is Beyond                                                                            1988
                                                                     First Contact: New Guinea's Highlanders Encounter the Outside World. 3
              Bob/Robin
Connolly/Anderson            Ch:3 Skymen and the Living Dead         (continued)                                             1988             3
              Bob/Robin
Connolly/Anderson            Ch 5: The Wahgi                         (continued)                                             1988             3
              Bob/Robin
Connolly/Anderson            Ch 6: Men of All Things                 (continued)                                             1988             3
              Bob/Robin
Connolly/Anderson            Ch 7: Moka                              (continued)                                             1988             3
Constable     Nicole                                                 Cross-Border Marriages: Gender and Mobility in Transnational Asia (Ed. 3
                             Ch 1: Introduction: Cross-Border Marriages                                                      2004             Constable)
Constable     (continued)                                            Cross-Border Marriages: Gender Mobility                 2004
                             Ch 9: A tale of two Marriages: International Matchmaking and Genderedand Mobility in Transnational Asia (Ed. 3   Constable)
Constable     Nicole         Preface                                 Maid to Order in Hong Kong                              2007             1
Constable     (continued)                                            Maid
                             Ch 1: Foreign and Domestic in Hong Kong to Order in Hong Kong                                   2007             1
Constable     (continued)                                            Maid to Order in of Romance
                             Ch 4: Fairy Tales, Family Values, and the Global Politics Hong Kong                             2007             2
Constable     Nicole         Ch 1: Making Introductions              Romance on a Global Stage                               2003             2
Cook          V. J.                                                  C
                             Ch 1: The Nature of Universal Grammer homsky's Universal Grammer: an Introduction               2007             3
Cooper        Frederick                                              Colonialism and Culture
                             Colonizing Time: Work Rhythms and Labour Conflict in Colonial Mombasa                           1992             3
*Cooper       Frederick                                              Africa since 1940: The Change in an Unequal World, 1945-2000
                             Ch 5: Development and Disappointment: Social and EconomicPast of the Present                    2002             1
Cooper/PackardFrederick/R.   Introduction                                                                                    1999             3
                                                                     International Development and the Social Sciences; essays on the History of Politics of K
*Coplan       David                                                  In the Time of Cannibals
                             Ch 1: 'Hyenas Do Not Sleep Together' - The Interpretation of Basotho Migrants' Auriture         1995             1
              S./J.
*Corbridge/Harriss                                                   Reinventing India: Liberalisation, the Reshaping of and Popular Democracy
                                                                                                                             2000
                             Ch 9: Transfers of Power? Subaltern Politics, Sites of Empowerment and Hindu NationalismIndia's Democracy 1
Cornwall      Andrea                                                 Dislocating among transvestites in Brazil
                             Ch 6: Gendered Identitiesn and Gender ambiguity Masculinity (Eds. Cornwall & Lindisfarne) 1994                   2
Corr          Rachel                                                 Power in Ecuador                                        2003             2
                             Ch 4: The Catholic Church, Ritual, and Millennial Salasaca - Critical Essay on Cultural Transformations and Social Dynamics (Ed.
Corrigan/FrithPaul/Simon     Ch 17: The Politics of Youth Culture                                                            1993
                                                                     Resistance Through Rituals: Youth Subcultures in Post-War Britain (Eds.1  Hall & Jefferson)
              Leda/John
*Cosmides/Tooby                                                      Mapping the Functional Organization
                             Ch 4: Origins of Domain Specificity: the Evolution ofMind (Eds. Hirschfeld & Gelman)            1994             1
Course        Magnus         Why Mapuche Sing                        JRAI                                                    2009             2
Course        Magnus                                                 PhD
                             Death, Biography, and the Mapuche Person Thesis, LSE also published in Ethnos, vol. 72(1) 2007                   3
Coutin        Susan Bibler                                           Globalisation Under Construction: Governmentality, Law and Identity (Eds. Perry & Maur
                             Ch 6: Illegality, Borderlands, and the Space of Nonexistence                                    2003             2
Cowan        Jane                                                 Culture and Rights (Eds. Cowan, Dembour & Wilson) 2001
                           Ambiguities of an Emancipatory discourse                                                                        3
             (continued)
*Cowan/Dembour/Wilson Ch 1: Introduction                          Culture and Rights: Anthropological Perspectives       2001              1
             Libbet
Crandon-Malamud                                                   From the
                           Introduction: Locating a Theoretical Perspective Fat of Our Souls                             1993              3
Crapanzano Vincent         Ch 2: Sanctification                                                                          2000
                                                                  Serving the Word: Literalism in America from the Pulpit to the Bench     2
Crapanzano Vincent                                                New Psycoanalytic Anthropology
                           Ch 14: Some Thoughts on Hermenutics and Directions in Psychological Anthropology              1992              3
Creighton    Millie                                               Remade in Japan: Everyday                              1992              3
                           Ch 2: The Depato: Merchandising the West While selling Japanese Life and Consumer Taste in a Changing Society (Ed. J.J. Tob
Crisp        Jeff          Ch 3: Productivity and Protest                                                                1993              3
                                                                  Struggle for the City: Migrant Labour, Capital and the State in Urban Africa (Ed. Fred Coo
Crocker      J. ChristopherMy Brother the Parrot                  The Social Use of Metaphor                             1978              3
Crocker      J. ChristopherThe Stench of Death                                                                           1985
                                                                  Vital Souls - Bororo Cosmology, Natural Symbolism, and Shamanism         3
Croll        Elisabeth                                            Women
                           Ch 3: The Exchnage of Women and Property and Poverty: Women as Property (Ed. Hirschon)        1984              3
             Gergely/Gyorgy
*Csibra/Gergely                                                   Processes of Change in                                 2006
                           Social Learning and Social Cognition: The Case for Pedagogy Brain and Cognitive Development, Attention and1      Performance, vo
Csordas      Thomas                                               Language, Charisma and Creativity
                           Ch 2: Religion in the Postmodern Condition                                                    1997              3
Csordas      (continued) Ch 6: Ritual Language                    Language, Charisma and Creativity                      1997              3
Csordas      Thomas                                               Etnofoor vol. 3 of
                           Oxymorons and Short-Circuits in the Re-enchantment (1)the World                               1995              3
Csordas      Thomas        Ch 7: The Body's Career in AnthropologyAnthropological Theory Today (Ed. Moore)               1999              3
*Csordas     Thomas                                               Embodiment and Experience - The Existential Ground of Culture and Self (Ed. Csodras)
                           Ch 12: Words from the Holy Pople: a Case Study in Cultural Phenomenology                      1994              1
Dahlberg     Andrea        The Body as a Principle of Holism      Contesting the Sacred                                  1991              3
Dalianis     A. Mando                                             After the War was Over
                           The Children and Mothers of the Averof Women's Prison Then and Now                            1996              3
             Vasudha/Heinrich
Dalmia/Stietencron         Introduction                                                                                  Traditions and National Identity
                                                                  Representing Hinduism: The Construction of Religious 1995                3
*Dalton      George                                               The
                           Production in Primitive African Economies Quarterly Journal of Economics, vol. 76             1962              1
Dalton       George        Introduction                                                                                  1968              3
                                                                  Primitive, Archaic and Modern Economies: Essays of Karl Polanyi (Ed. Dalton)
Dalton       George        Primitive Money                        Tribal and Peasant Economies                           1968              3
Daly         Martin        Killing the Competition                Human Nature, vol. 1(1)                                1989              2
D'Andrade    R.            Ch 6: The Growth of Schema Theory The Development of Cognitive Anthropology                   1995              3
D'Andrade    (continued) Ch 7: Models and Theories                The Development of Cognitive Anthropology              1995              3
D'Andrade                                                         The Development of
             (continued) Ch 8: Cultural Representations and Psychological Processes Cognitive Anthropology               1995              3
Danforth     Loring M.     Ch 1: Death in Potamia                 The Death Rituals of Rural Greece                      1979              3
Daniel       E.            Ch 4: Sexuality Exposed                Fluid Signs                                            1984              3
Daniel       V.            Ch 1: Of Heritage and History          Charred Lullabies                                      1996              3
Daniel                                                            Charred Nation
             (continued) Ch 2: History's Entailments in the Violence of a Lullabies                                      1996              3
D'Arcy       Paul                                                 The since the Pacific Dumont d'Urville
                           Cultural Divisions and Island Environments Journal of Time ofHistory, vol 38(2)               2003              3
Das          Veena         Ch 1: Introduction                     Critical Events                                        1995              1
Das                                                               Critical
             (continued) Ch 3: National Honour and Practical Kinship Events                                              1995              3
Das          (continued) Ch 4: Communties as Political Actors Critical Events                                            1995              3
Das           Veena                                                Assessing Cultural Anthropology
                           Ch 9: The Anthropological Discourse on India                                                   1994             3
Das           Veena        On Female Body and Sexuality            Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 21(1)          1987             3
Das           Veena                                                Listen
                           Ch 14: Our Work to Cry: Your Work to Mirrors of Violence: Communities, Riots and Survivors 1990                 2
                                                                                                                          in South Asia (Ed. Das)
Das           Veena        The Spatialization of Violence          Unravelling the Nation (Eds. Basu and Subrahmanyam) 9961                3
Das           Veena                                                Worlds Apart Object Is It?                             1995
                           Ch 8: On Soap Opera: What Kind of Anthropological - Modernity Through The Prism of the Local (Ed. Miller)       2
*Das          Veena                                                Social Suffering (Eds.
                           Language and Body: Transactions in the Construction of Pain Kleinman, Das & Lock)              1997             1
Davies        Christie     Ch 5: Dirt, Death, Decay and DissolutionContemporary Issues in the Sociology of Death          1995             2
                           Introduction: The Impact of Post-Mao Reforms on Family Life
Davis/Harrell Deborah/Stevan                                                                                              1
                                                                   Chinese Families in Post-Mao Era (Eds. David & Harrell) 993             3
Davis         Mike         Ch 4: Fortress L.A.                     City of Quartz - Excavating the Future in Los Angeles 1992              2
Davis         Richard      Ch 1: The Iconography of Rama's Chariot Contesting the Nation (Ed. Ludden)                     1996             3
Dawkins       Richard      Ch 11: Memes: The New Replicators The Selfish Gene                                             1999             3
Dawson/Cowan               Ch
              Lorne/Douglas 1: Introduction                                                                               2004
                                                                   Religion Online: Finding Faith on the Internet (Eds. Dawson & Cowan) 3
Day           Sophie                                               Culture and Aids (Ed.
                           Ch 7: Prostitute Women and the Ideology of Work in London Feldman)                             1990             3
Dean          Carolyn      Ch 1: Corpus Christi Triumphant         Inka Bodies and the Body of Christ                     1999             3
Dean          (continued) Ch 5: Inka Bodies                        Inka Bodies and the Body of Christ                     1999             1
Dean          (continued) Ch 7: The Composite Inka                 Inka Bodies and the Body of Christ                     1999             3
                                                                   The Observation of of Savage Peoples
*Degerando Joseph-Marie Preface, Translator's Introduction + Text: The ObservationSavage Peoples                          1969             1
Degler        Carl N.      Ch 3: Laying the Foundation             In Search of Human Nature                              1991             3
Degler        (continued) Ch 4: In the Wake of Boas                In Search of Human Nature                              1991             3
Delaney       Carol                                                Naturalizing Power - Essays in Feminist Cultural Analysis (Eds. Yanagisako & Delaney)
                           Ch 7: Father State, Motherland, and the Birth of Modern Turkey                                 1995             3
Delius        P.           Ch 6: Cadres, Comrades and Witches A Lion Amongst the Cattle                                   1996             2
Dembour                    Following the Movement of a Pendulum: Between Universalism and Relativism
              Marie-Benedicte                                      Culture and Rights - Anthropological Perspectives      2001             3
Deng          Xiaoping                                             Selected
                           Answers to the Italian Journalist Oriana Fallaci Works of Deng Xiaoping                 1975-1982               3
Dennet        Daniel                                               Consciousness Explained
                           Ch 1: Prelude: How are Hallucinations Possible?                                                1992             2
Dennet        Daniel       The Evolution of Culture                Charles Simonyi Lecture, Oxford (Feb. 17)              1999             3
*Derne        Steve        Ch 2: Filmgoing in Two Cities                                                                   Men's           1
                                                                   Movies, Masculinity and Modernity: AN Ethnography of2000 Filmgoing in India
*Desai        Meghnad      Why is India a Democracy                Divided by Democracy (Ed. Page)                        2005             1
Descola       Philippe     Ch 9: The Good Life                     In the Society of Nature                               1994             3
Descola       Philippe     Ch 5: Constructing Natures              Nature and Society (Eds. Descola & Palson)             1996             3
Descola       Philippe                                             Conceptualising Society
                           Ch 5: Societies of Nature and the Nature of Society                                            1992             3
Deshpande Satish           Ch3: The Nation an an Imagined Economy  Contemporary India, a Sociological View.               2003             3
Deshpande (continued) Ch 4:Hindutva and its Spatial Strategies     Contemporary India, a Sociological View.               2003             3
Deshpande (continued) Ch 5: Caste Inequalties in India Today Contemporary India, a Sociological View.                     2003             3
                                                                    of Cultural regions
Deshpande (continued) Ch 7: Globalization and the Geography Contemporary India, a Sociological View.                      2003             3
*Deva        Indra                                                   Can Sociologists Do?                                 1997
                           The Future of Independent India: WhatPresidential Address: XXIV All India Sociological Conference              1
*Devereaux Leslie                                                   Fields                                                1995            1
                           Ch 4: Experience, Re-presentation, and Film of Vision - Essays in Film Studies, Visual Anthorpology, and Photography (Eds. Dev
*Dezalay     Yves                                                   Theory, Culture and Society, vol. 7(2/3)
                           The Big Bang and the Law: The Internationalization and Restructuration of the Legal Field      1990            1
             Neil et al
*Diamant et al                                                      Engaging the Law
                           Ch 1: Law and Society in the People's Republic of China in China (Ed. Diamant et al)           2005            1
Dickey       Sara          Ch 6: Consuming Utopia                   Consuming Modernity (Ed. Breckenridge)                1996            3
Dickey       Sara          Ch 1: Introduction                       Cinema and the Urban Poor in South India              1993            1
Dickey       (continued)   Ch 8: Audiences                          Cinema and the Urban Poor in South India              1993            1
Dickey       (continued)   Ch 9: Fan Clubs and Politics             Cinema and the Urban Poor in South India              1993            1
Dickson      Mora          Chapter 8                                Sarawak and Its People                                1962            3
*Diemberger Hildegard      Ch 4: Blood, Sperm, Soul and the MountainGendered Anthropology (Ed. Del Valle)                 1993            1
Dijk, van    Rijk                                                    and the State: Contested Representations             1998
                           Ch 6: Pentecostalism, Cultural MemoryMemory and the Postcolony (Ed. Werbner) of Time in Postcolonial Malawi    2
Dilley       Roy                                                    Contesting Markets
                           Contesting Markets: A General Introduction                                                     1992            3
Dirks        Nicholas B.   Ch 10: Recasting Tamil Society           Caste Today (Ed. Fuller)                              1996            3
Dirks        Nicholas B.                                            Culture, Power, History: A Readerr in Contemporary Social Theory (Eds.3
                           Ch 15: Ritual and Resistance: Subversion as a Social Fact                                      1994             Dirks, Eley, Ortn
Dirks        Nicholas B.                                             Hierachy in South Asia
                           The Original Caste: Power, History and Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 23(1)           1989            4
Dirks        Nicholas B.                                             and the Mind: Colonialism and
                           Ch 9: The Body of Caste: AnthropologyCastes of Criminalization of Castethe Making of Modern 2001India          1
Dirks        (continued)                                            Castes of as Colonial Rule
                           Ch 10: The Enumeration of Caste: Anthropology Mind: Colonialism and the Making of Modern 2001   India          1
Dirks        (continued)                                            Castes of Mind: Colonialism and the Making of Modern 2001
                           Ch 11: Toward a Nationalist Sociology of India: Nationalism and Brahmanism                      India          1
Dirks        Nicholas B.                                            From the Margins: of History                          2002
                           Annals of the Archive: Ethnographic Notes on the SourcesHistorical Anthropology and Its Futures (ed. Axel      3
Dolar        Mladen        Ch 1: The Linguistics of the Voice       A Voice and Nothing More                              2006            2
Dolgin       J.L.          Ch 1: The Transformation of the Family                                                         1997
                                                                    Defining the Family, Law, Technology and Reproduction in an Uneasy Age2
Dolgin       (continued)                                             Motherhood                                           1997
                           Ch 3: Status and Contract in SurrogateDefining the Family, Law, Technology and Reproduction in an Uneasy Age   3
Dolgin       (continued)                                            Defining the Family, Law, Technology and Reproduction in an Uneasy Age
                           Ch 5: Social Implications of Biological Transformations                                        1997            1
Donham       Donald        Ch 1: Homo Economicus: A Male Mystery    History, Power, Ideology                              1999            3
Donnelly     Michael                                                Towards a
                           Ch 2: Foucalt's Genealogy of the Human Sciences Critique of Foucalt (Ed. Gane)                 1987            3
Donner       Henrike                                                 Interest: Changing Educational Strategies            2005            Middleclass Fami
                           Children are Capital, Grandchildren areGlobalising India (Eds. Assayag & Fuller) and Kin-relations in Calcutta 2
Donner       Henrike                                                Critical Journesy: and Fieldwork in the City          DeNeve & Unnithan-Kumar)
                           Ch 10: Working in the Metropolis: Reflections on Gender The Making of Anthropologists (Eds. 2006               3
Dore         Ronald        Ch 8: The Enterprise as Community        British Factory - Japanese Factory                    1973            3
Douglas      Mary          Ch 1: Ritual Uncleanness                                                                       1966
                                                                    Purity and Danger: An Analysis of the Concepts of Pollution and Taboo 3
Douglas      (continued)   Ch 2: Secular Defilement                                                                       1966
                                                                    Purity and Danger: An Analysis of the Concepts of Pollution and Taboo 2
Douglas      (continued)                                                                                                  1966
                           Ch 3: The Abominations of Leviticus Purity and Danger: An Analysis of the Concepts of Pollution and Taboo 3
Douglas      Mary          The Cloud God and the Shadow Self Social Anthropology, vol. 3(2)                               1995            3
Douglas      Mary          Ch 16: Deciphering a Meal                Implicit Meanings                                     1975            2
Douglas      Mary          Ch 19: Self-Evidence                     Implicit Meanings                                     1975            3
Douglas      Mary           Is Matriliny Doomed in Africa?           Man in Africa (Eds. Douglas & Kaberry)                 1969              2
Douglas      Mary           Ch 2: To Inner Experience                Natural Symbols                                        1973              3
Douglas      (continued)    Ch 4: Grid and Group                     Natural Symbols                                        1973              4
Douglas      (continued)    Ch 5: The Two Bodies                     Natural Symbols                                        1970              4
Douglas      Mary                                                    Tribal
                            Raffia Cloth Distribution in the Lele Economy and Peasant Economies                             1968              3
Douglas      Mary                                                    Witchcraft: and Magic
                            Introduction: Thirty Years after Witchcraft, OraclesConfessions and Accusations                 1970              2
             Greg/Melissa
*Downey/Fisher                                                       Frontier of Capitalism: Ethnographic                    New
                            Introduction: The Anthrpology of Capital and the Frontier of Ethnography. Reflections on the2006 Economy 1
Draper       Patricia                                                Toward an
                            !Kung Women: Contrasts in Sexual Egalitarianism Anthropology of Women                           1975              2
             Hubert/Paul
Dreyfus/Rabinow                                                      Michel
                            Ch 2: The Archaelogy of the Human Sciences Foucault: Beyond Structuralism and Hermeneutics      1983              2
Dube         Leela                                                   Visibility and Power
                            Seed and Earth: The Symbolism of Biological Reproduction and Sexual Relations of Production     1986              3
*Dube        Saurabh                                                 Subalteran Studies VII: Writings                       1992
                            Ch 4: Myths, Symbols and Community: Satnampanth of Chhattisgarh on South Asian History and Society                1
*Dubisch     Jill                                                    Contested Identities: Gender and Kinship               1991               &
                            Ch 1: Gender, Kinship and Religion: Reconstructing the Anthropology of Greece in Modern Greece (Eds. Loizos1 Papataxiarchis
Dubois       Olivier                                                  the International Tribunal
                            Rwanda's National Criminal Courts and International Review of the Red Cross                     1997              3
*Duffield    Mark                                                     War: Assest Transfer, Complex Emergencies and International Aid
                                                                                                                            1994
                            Ch 3: The Political Economy of InternalWar and Hunger: Rethinking International Responses (Eds. McRae & Zwi)      1
Dumont       Louis          North India in Relation to South India Family, Kinship and Marriage in India                    1993              2
Dumont       Louis                                                   The Category of Person of Modern Individualism         1985              3
                            Ch 5: A Modified View of Our Origins: the Christian Beginnings - Anthropology, Philosophy and History (Eds. Carrithers, Collins &
Dumont       Louis                                                   Occasional Papers
                            Hierarchy and Marriage Alliance in South Indian Kinship of RAJ of UK and Ireland                1957              2
Dumont       Louis          Introduction                             Homo Hierarchichus                                     1966              3
Dumont       (continued)    Ch 1: History of Ideas                   Homo Hierarchichus                                     1966              1
Dumont       (continued)                                             Homo Hierarchichus
                            Ch 2: From System to Structure: the Pure and the Impure                                         1966              3
Dumont       (continued)    Ch 3: Hierachy: The Theory of the 'Varna'Homo Hierarchichus                                     1966              3
Dumont       Louis                                                   From Mandeville      the Place Genesis and Triumph of 1977
                            Ch 1: A Comparative Approach to Modern Ideology and to Marx: Thewithin It of Economic Thought   Economic Ideology 3
Dumont       Louis                                                   Religion/Politics and History in India
                            Ch 2: A Structural Definition of a Folk Detiy of Tamil Nad: Aiyanar, The Lord                   1970              1
Dumont       (continued)                                             Religion/Politics and History in India
                            Ch 3: World Renunciation in Indian Religions                                                    1970              3
Dumont       Louis          Miscellaneous                                                                                                     2
Dumont       (continued)    A Note on Locality in Relation to DescentContributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 7              1964              1
             Chris/Mai
Dunton/Palmberg                                                      Current African
                            Human Rights and Homosexuality in Southern Africa Issues 19                                     1996              3
Dureau       Christine                                               Cultural Memory: reconfiguring History and Identity in 2001
                            Ch 6: Recounting and Remembering 'First Contact' on Simbo                                                         1
                                                                                                                            the Postcolonial pacific (Ed. Mageo
Durkheim     Emile          Introduction                             Elementary Forms of Religious Life                     1964              3
Durkheim     Emile                                                   Elementary Forms
                            Ch 1: Definition of Religious Phenomena and of Religion of Religious Life, vol. 1               1964              2
Durkheim     (continued)    Ch 5: Origins of These Beliefs           Elementary Forms of Religious Life, vol. 2             1964              2
Durkheim     (continued)                                             Elementary Forms of Religious Life, vol. 2
                            Ch 7: Origins of These Beliefs (Conclusion)                                                     1964              3
Durkheim     (continued)    Conclusion                               Elementary Forms of Religious Life                     1964              3
Durkheim     Emile          Ch 4: The Positive Cult (Continued)      Elementary Forms of Religious Life, vol. 3             1964              3
Durkheim     Emile                                                 Function
                           Ch 1: The Method for Determining this The Division of Labour in Society                       1947            3
Durkheim                                                          The Division of Labour in Society
             (continued) Ch 2: Mechanical Solidarity Through Likeness                                                    1947            3
Durkheim                                                          The of Labour
             (continued) Ch 3: Organic Solidarity due to the DivisionDivision of Labour in Society                       1947            3
Durkheim     (continued) Conclusion                               The Division of Labour in Society                      1947            3
Durkheim     Emile         Ch 5: Forms of Social Solidarity       Emile Durkheim: Selected Writings (Ed. Giddens)        1972            3
Durkheim     Emile                                                Emile Durkheim:
                           Ch 6: The Division of Labour and Social Differentiation Selected Writings (Ed. Giddens)       1972            3
Durkheim     Emile                                                Essays on Sociology and Philosophy
                           The Dualism of Human Nature and its Social Conditions                                         1964            3
Durkheim     Emile                                                Durkheim on Religion (Ed. Pickering)
                           Ch 4: Individualism and the Intellectuals                                                     1975            3
Durkheim     Emile                                                Durkheim on Religion (Ed. Pickering)
                           Ch 5: Concerning the Definition of Religious Phenomena                                        1975            3
             Emile/Marcel Ch 3: Zuni, Sioux
Durkheim/Mauss                                                    Primitive Classification                               1963            3
Durkheim     Emile         Miscellanous:                                                                                                 2
Durkheim     (continued) Ch 1: What is a Social Fact?             The Rules of Sociological Method                       1962            1
Durkheim     (continued) Anomic Suicide                           Suicide: A Study in Sociology                          1952            1
D'Urville                  On the Islands of
             Jules-Sebastien-Cesar Dumont the Great Ocean         The Journal of Pacific History, vol 38(2)              2003            3
Dwyer        Rachel        Miscellanous:                                                                                                 2
Dwyer                                                             Religion, Media Hindi Film
             (continued) Ch 13: The Saffron Screen? Hindu Nationalism and theand the Public Sphere (Eds. Meyer & Moors)  2006            1
Dwyer                                                              Bombay                                                2000
             (continued) Ch 3: The Rise of the Middle Classes ofAll You Want Is Money, All You Need Is Love: Sexuality and Romance in 1  Modern India
Edelman      Marc                                                 Social Movements - An Anthropological Reader in Central2005
                           Ch 1: When Netwrks Don't Work: The Rise and Fall and Rise of Civil Society Initiatives (Ed. Nash) America     3
Edwards                                                           Central Asian Survey,
             David-Busby Charsmatic Leadership and Political Process in Afghanistan vol. 5(3-4)                          1986            3
             Jeanette/Marilyn 8: Including Our Own
Edwards/Strathern          Ch                                     Cultures of Relatedness                                2000            2
             Barbara/Arlie Introduction
Ehrenreich/Hochschild      Russel                                                                                        2004            3
                                                                  Global Woman - Nannies, Maids and Sex Workers in New Economy (Eds. Ehrenreich & Ho
Eickelman    Dale F.                                              The Middle East and Central Asia
                           Ch 10: Islam and the 'Religions of the Book'                                                  1998            3
             Dale/Jon
Eickelman/Anderson         Ch 1: Redefining Muslim Publics                                                               1999
                                                                  New Media and the Muslim World (Eds. Eickelmen & Anderson)             2
             Dale/James The Invention of Tradition in Muslim Politics
Eickelman/Piscatori                                               Muslim Politics                                        2004            3
             Dale/James Social Theory in the Study of Muslim Societies Travellers - Pilgrimage, Migration, and the Religious Imagination3
Eickelman/Piscatori                                               Muslim                                                 1990
Eidheim      Harald        When Ethnic Identity is a Social Stigma                                                       1969            3
                                                                  Ethnic Groups and Boundaries: The Social Organisation of Culture Difference (Ed. Barth)
Eliade       Mircea        Foreword                               Shamanism: Archaic Techniques of Ecstasy               1951            3
Eliade                                                            Shamanism: Archaic Techniques of Ecstasy
             (continued) Ch 1: General Considerations, Recruiting Methods, Shamanism and Mystical Vocation               1951            3
*Ellemers    J.E.                                                 The Netherlands' Journal of Sociology, vol. 15.        1979
                           Minorities and Policy-Making in the Netherlands: South Moluccans and Other Aliens in Comparative Perspective1
Elvin        Mark          Female Virtue and the State in China Past & Present                                           1984            3
Endicott     Karen                                                Canberra Anthropology, Societies
                           Conditions of Egalitarian Male-Female Relationships in Foraging vol. 4(2)                     1981            2
Engard       Ronald                                                                                                      1989            2
                           Dance and Power in Bafut (Cameroon) Creativity in Power: Cosmoloy and Action in African Societies (Eds. Arens & Karp)
Engelke      Matthew       Ch 1: Up in Smoke                                                                              Church
                                                                  A problem of Presense: Beyond Scripture in an African2007              2
Engelke      Matthew                                              A problem of Presense: Beyond Scripture in an African2007
                           Ch 6: Singing and the Metaphysics of sound                                                     Church         3
Engelke      Matthew                                              Critique of About' Human Rights, Homosexuality and the Zimbabwe International Book F
                          We Wondered what Human Rights he was Talking Anthropology 19(3)                                1999           3
Engelke      Matthew                                              Materiality (Ed. Miller, D.)
                          Sticky Subjects and Sticky Objects: The substance of African Christian Healing                 2005           3
Engels       Frederick    Ch 3: The Iroquois Gens                                                                1972(1884)
                                                                  The Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State              3
Engelshoven Miranda                                               The Worlds of Indian Industrial Labour
                          Diamonds and Patels: A report on the Diamond Industry of Surat                                 1999           3
*Entzinger   Han                                                  New Community, vol.
                          Immigrant Minorities in the Netherlands: Research and Policy9Development                       1981           1
*Epprecht    Mark         Ch 1: 'Traditions'                                                                             2004
                                                                  Hungochani: The History of a Dissident Sexuality in southern Africa   1
             Gerhard/Nadine International Criminal Tribunal for International Review of the Red Cross
Erasmus/Fourie            The                                     Rwanda                                                 1997           3
Erb          Maribeth                                             Rice in Southeast Asian Myth and Ritual (Ed. Walker) 1994
                          Cuddling the Rice: Myth and Ritual in the Agricultural Year of the Rembong of Northern Manggarai, Indonesia 3
Eriksen                   Ch
             Thomas Hylland 5: Ethnicity in History               Ethnicity and Nationalism                              1993           1
Eriksen      (continued) Ch 6: Nationalism                        Ethnicity and Nationalism                              1993           2
Eriksen      (continued) Ch 8: That which is not Ethnic           Ethnicity and Nationalism                              1993           2
Eriksen      (continued) Ch 9: The Non-Ethnic                     Ethnicity and Nationalism                              1993           3
*Eriksen                  Ch                                      Small Places, Large
             Thomas Hylland 18: The Politics of Identity: Nationalism and Minorities Issues                              1995           1
Erlmann      V.                                                   The Early Social
                          "Singing Brings Joy to the Distressed": African Stories History of the Zulu Migrant Workers' 1991             3
Errington    Shelly       Recasting Sex, Gender, and Power                                                               1990           3
                                                                  Power and Difference - Gender in Island Southeast Asia (Eds. Atkinson & Errington)
Esterik      Penny van    Representing Thai Culture               Materializing Thailand                                 2000           2
             Evan
Evans-Pritchard                                                   Kinship
                          Ch 3: Marriage (only point 5-6, pp. 99-123) and Marriage among the Nuer                        1951           3
             Evan
Evans-Pritchard           Ch 3: Sociological Theories             Theories of Primitive Religion                         1965           3
             Evan
Evans-Pritchard           The Nuer of the Southern Sudan                                                                 1940
                                                                  African Political Systems (Eds. Fortes & Evans-Pritchard)             3
             Evan
Evans-Pritchard           Foreword (by C.G. Seligman)             Witchcraft, Oracles and Magic Among the Azande         1937           1
             (continued) Introduction
Evans-Pritchard                                                   Witchcraft, Oracles and Magic Among the Azande         1937           1
             (continued) Ch 4: The Notion of Witchcraft Explains Unfortunate Events
Evans-Pritchard                                                   Witchcraft, Oracles and Magic Among the Azande         1937           1
             (continued) Ch 5: Witchcraft, Orcales, and Magic, in the Situation of Death Magic Among the Azande
Evans-Pritchard                                                   Witchcraft, Oracles and                                1937           1
             (continued) Ch 9: Problems arising from consultation of the Poison Oracle Magic Among the Azande
Evans-Pritchard                                                   Witchcraft, Oracles and                                1937           1
             (continued) Appendix: Some Reminiscences and Reflections on Fieldwork Magic Among the Azande
Evans-Pritchard                                                   Witchcraft, Oracles and                                1937           1
             Evan
Evans-Pritchard                                                   The
                          Ch 1: Nuer Politics: Structure and System Anthropology of Politics (Ed. Vincent)               2002           2
Evans-Pritchard           Ch IV: The political system             The Nuer                                               1940           3
Evers        Sandra                                               Ancestors, Power and History in Madagascar
                          Ch 9: The Construction of History and Culture in the Southern Highlands                        1999           3
Evers        Sandra                                               Cultures                                               1995           3
                          Stigmatization as a self-perpetuating Process of Madagascar: Ebb and Flow of Influences (Eds. Evers & Spindler)
Ewing        Katherine                                            New Directions in Psychological Anthropology (Eds. White & Lutz)
                          Ch 12: In Psychoanalysis relevent for Anthropology                                             1992           3
             James/Melissa
Fairhead/Leach            Rethinking the Forest-Savanna Mosaic The lie of the Land (Eds. Leach & Mearns)                 1996           3
             James/Melissa 2: Webs of Power and the Construction of Environmental Policy Problems: Forest Loss in Guinea
Fairhead/Leach            Ch                                      Discourses of Development: Anthropological Perspectives1997           3
Fanon        Frantz       Preface                                 The Wretched of the Earth                              1961           1
Fanon        (continued) Ch 1: Concerning Violence                The Wretched of the Earth                              1961           1
Farmer        Victoria                                               Contesting the Nation
                            Ch 4: Mass Media: Images, Mobilization, and Communalism (Ed. Ludden)                              1996             3
*Farrer       James         Introduction: Sex and the Market                                                                  2002
                                                                     Opening Up: Youth Sex Culture and Market Reform in Shanghai               1
              J.
Farrington et al.et al.     Introduction: Many Roads Lead to NGOs    Reluctant Partners? Non-Governmental Organisations, 1993                  3
                                                                                                                               the State and Sustainable Agricult
              J.
Farrington et al.et al.     Ch 4: NGOs and the Rural Poor            Reluctant Partners? Non-Governmental Organisations, 1993                  3
                                                                                                                               the State and Sustainable Agricult
Featherstone Mike           Body Modification: An Introduction       Body Modification                                        2000             3
              Katie
Featherstone et al et al.                                            Risky Relations: Family, Kinship and the New Genetics2006
                            Ch 1: Risky Relations and Other Complexities                                                                       3
Feeley-HarnikGillian        Finding Memories in Madagascar                                                                    1991
                                                                     Images of Memory: On Remembering and Representation (Eds. Kuchler 3 Melion)&
Fei           Xiaotong                                                                                                         from            3
                            The Shallowness of Cultural Tradition Land Mithoug Ghosts, Chinese Impressions of America 1989 the Mid-Nineteenth Century
Ferguson      James         Ch 1: Globalizing Africa?                Global Shadows: Africa in the Neoliberal World Order 2006                 3
Ferguson      (continued)   Ch 6: Of Mimicry and Membership          Global Shadows: Africa in the Neoliberal World Order 2006                 3
Ferguson      (continued)   Ch 8: Governing Extraction               Global Shadows: Africa in the Neoliberal World Order 2006                 1
Ferguson      James                                                                                                           1997             3
                            Ch 5: Anthropology and its Evil Twin International Development and the Social Sciences; essays on the History of Politics of K
Ferguson      James         Introduction                                                                                      1990
                                                                     The Anti-Politics Machine: Development, Depoliticization & Bureaucratic 3 Power in Lesotho
Ferguson      (continued)   Epilogue                                                                                          1990
                                                                     The Anti-Politics Machine: Development, Depoliticization & Bureaucratic 1 Power in Lesotho
Ferguson      James         Ch 5: The Bovine Mystique                                                                         1990
                                                                     The Anti-Politics Machine: Development, Depoliticization & Bureaucratic 2 Power in Lesotho
Ferguson      James         Ch 6: Livestock Development                                                                       1990
                                                                     The Anti-Politics Machine: Development, Depoliticization & Bureaucratic 3 Power in Lesotho
Ferguson      James         Ch 2: Expectations of permanence         Expectations of Modernity                                1999             1
Ferguson      (continued)   Ch 3: Rural connections, Urban styles Expectations of Modernity                                   1999             1
Ferguson      (continued)   Ch 4: 'Back to the Land'?                Expectations of Modernity                                1999             1
Ferguson      (continued)   Ch 7: Global Disconnect                  Expectations of Modernity                                1999             1
Ferguson      James         Development                                                                                       1996
                                                                     Ecyclopedia of Social and Cultural Anthropology (Eds. Barnard & Spencer)  2
Ferguson      James                                                  Power in Lesotho
                            Ch 22: Development and Bureaucratic The Post-Development Reader (Eds. Rahnema & Bawtree)          2003             1
*Ferguson     R. Brian      Ch 5: Tribal Warfare                                                                              2004
                                                                     Violence in War and Peace: An Anthology (Eds. Scheper-Hughes & Bourgois)  1
Fernandes     Leela                                                  India's middle class: democratic politics in an era of reform
                            Ch 2: Framing the liberalising Middle Class                                                       2007             3
Fernandes     Leela                                                  Comparative Studies of South Asia, Africa and the Middle East, Vol xx. Nos 1&2
                            Restructuring the Middle-Classes in Liberalising India                                                             2
Fernandez     James W.                                                the Beast in Every Body and the Metaphors of Everyman
                            Ch 1: Persuasions and Performances ofPersuasions and Performances: The Play of Tropes in Culture  1986             3
Fernandez     (continued)   Ch 7: Edification by Puzzlement                                                                   1986
                                                                     Persuasions and Performances: The Play of Tropes in Culture               3
Fernandez     (continued)                                            Persuasions and in symbolic inquiry and some strategies for
                                                                                                                              1986
                            Ch 9: The dark at the bottom of the stairs: the inchoatePerformances: The Play of Tropes in Culture coping with it 2
Fernandez     (continued)   Ch 10: Moving up in the world                                                                     1986
                                                                     Persuasions and Performances: The Play of Tropes in Culture               3
Feuchtwang Stephan                                                   Dialogue
                            Between Civilisations: One Side of a Dialogue and Difference                                      2003             3
Feuchtwang Stephan          Ch 1: History, Identification and Belief Popular Religion in China: The Imperial Metaphor         1992             3
Feuchtwang Stephan          Ch 2: The Annual Apocalypse              Popular Religion in China: The Imperial Metaphor         1992             3
Feuchtwang Stephan          Ch 3: Local Festivals and Their Cults Popular Religion in China: The Imperial Metaphor            1992             3
Feuchtwang Stephan                                                    of Extravaganse as Self-government
                            Centres and Margins: the Organisation Conference on the Margins of Religionin China               2003             3
Feuchtwang    Stephan       A Chinese Religion Exists               An Old State in New Settings (Eds. Baker & Feuchtwang)1991            3
Feuchtwang    Stephan       Ch 2: Charisma                          Grassroots Charism - Four Local Leaders in China      2001            1
Feuchtwang    (continued)   Ch 4: Revolution, Fortune and Respect Grassroots Charism - Four Local Leaders in China        2001            1
Feuchtwang    Stephan       Ch 8: Religion as Resistance                                                                  2000            3
                                                                    Chinese Society: Change, Conflict and Resistance (Eds. Perry and Seldon)
Feuchtwang    Stephan       Domestic and Communal Worship in Taiwan Religion and Ritual in Chinese Society (Ed. Wolf)     1974            3
Feuchtwang    Stephan                                                Anthropology
                            The Colonial Formation of British SocialAnthropology and the Colonial Encounter (Ed. Asad) 1973               3
Fifi's        Johnatan                                              The Big Death: Solomon
                            World war II and the Origins of maasina Rule: One Kwaioi View Islanders Remember World War II.1988            3
Firth         Raymond                                               Essays Anthropology
                            Ch 1: Comment on 'Dynamic Theory' in Social on Social Organisation and Values          1964(1962)             3
Firth         Raymond                                               Essays
                            Ch 2: Social Organization and Social Change on Social Organisation and Values          1964(1954)             3
Firth         (continued)                                           Essays
                            Ch 3: Some Principles of Social Organisation on Social Organisation and Values         1964(1955)             3
Firth         Raymond                                               Essays on Social Organization and Values
                            Ch 9: The Study of Values by Social Anthropologists                                    1964(1953)             2
Firth         Raymond       Education and Kinship                   We, the Tikopia                                       1961            3
Fitzgerald    Frances       Liberty Baptist 1981                    Cities on a Hill                                      1986            2
*Fitzgerald   Timothy                                               IIIS-MU Paper Series in Hindu Studies
                            Problems with 'religion' as a category for understanding Hinduism                             2000            1
Fitzpatrick   Sheila                                                Stalinism: times
                            Everyday Stalinism: Ordinary life in Extraordinarythe Essential Readings (Ed. D. Hoffman)     2003            3
Fleischer     Cornell                                               Ibn Khaldun and Islamic Ideology
                            Royal Authoritry, Dynastic Cyclism, and 'Ibn Khaldunism' in Sixteenth Century Ottoman Letters 1984            3
Flex          Jane          Ch 7: The End of Innocence              Feminists Theorist                                    1992            3
*Fligstein    Neil                                                  The                                                    21st
                            Ch 5: The Logic of Employment Systems Architecture of Markets: An Economic Sociology of2001 Century Societies 1
Forshee       Jill          Ch 9: On Other Islands                                                                        2001
                                                                    Between The Folds: the Stories of Cloth, Lives and Travels from Sumba 2
Fortes        Meyer         Ch 10: The Concept of the Person        Religion, Morality & the Person (Ed. Goody)           1987            2
Fortes        Meyer                                                 Time & Social Structure
                            Ch 2: The Significance of Descent in Tale Social Structure                                    1970            3
Fortes        Meyer         Ch 4: Descent, Filiation and Affinity   Time & Social Structure                               1970            3
Fortes        Meyer         Ch 7: Pietas in Ancestor Worship        Time & Social Structure                               1970            3
Fortes        Meyer                                                 Time Study of Social Organization
                            Ch 9: Radcliffe-Brown's Contributions to the & Social Structure                               1970            3
Fortes        Meyer                                                 African Systems
                            Ch 5: Some Reflections on Ancestor Worship in Africa Thought                                  1965            2
Fortes        Meyer         Introduction                            The developmental Cycle of Domestic Groups (Ed. Goody)1958            3
Fortes        Meyer         Rules and the Emergence of Society RAI Occasional Paper, no. 39                               1983            2
Fortes        Meyer         Ch 1: Morgan: The Founding Father       Kinship and the social Order, part 1                  1970            3
Fortes        (continued)                                           Kinship Radcliffe-Brown
                            Ch 2: The Line of Succession: From Morgan to and the social Order, part 1                     1970            3
Fortes        (continued)   Ch 3: Morgan and the Analytical ApproachKinship and the social Order, part 1                  1970            3
Fortes        Meyer                                                 Kinship Structural Analysis
                            Ch 4: Radcliffe-Brown and the Development of and the social Order, part 1                     1970            3
Fortes        (continued)   Ch 5: Toward the Jural Dimension        Kinship and the social Order, part 1                  1970            3
Fortes        Meyer         Ch 12: Kinship and the Axiom of AmityKinship and the social Order, part 3                     1970            3
Fortes        (continued)   Ch 13: Filiation Reconsidered           Kinship and the social Order, part 3                  1970            3
Fortes        Meyer         Ch 14: Descent and the Corporate Group  Kinship and the social Order, part 3                  1970            3
Fortes       Meyer         Totem and Taboo                          Presidential Address                                  1966           2
             Meyer/Evan
Fortes/Evans-Pritchard     Introduction                             African Political Systems                             1940           3
Fortes       Meyer         Miscellanous:                                                                                                 2
Forth        Gregory       The Rice Scattering Ritual in AustronesiaContributions to Southeast Asian Ethnography, vol. 101994            3
Foster       Robert J.                                              The Contemporary Pacific, vol. 11(1)
                           Melanesianist Anthropology in the Era of Globalization                                         1999           3
Foucault     Michel        Ch 1: Objective                          The History of Sexuality, vol. 1                      1978           2
Foucault     (continued)   Ch 2: Method                             The History of Sexuality, vol. 1                      1978           3
Foucault     Michel        Miscellanous:                                                                                                 2
Foucault     (continued)   Ch 2: The Prose of the World             The Order of Things                                   1970           2
Foucault     Michel        Complete and Austere Institutions        The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984           2
Foucault     (continued)   Illegalities and Deliquency              The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984           1
Foucault     (continued)   The Carceral                             The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984           1
Foucault     (continued)   Space, Knowledge, and Power              The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984           1
Foucault     Michel        The Birth of the Asylym                  The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984           2
Foucault     (continued)   The Body of the Condemned                The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984           3
Foucault     (continued)   Docile Bodies                            The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984           1
Foucault     Michel                                                 The
                           Preface to 'The History of Sexuality, vol. 2' Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                    1984           3
Foucault     Michel        Ch 3: Panopticism                        Discipline and Punish, part 3                         1979           3
Foucault     Michel        Ch 3: The Order of Discourse             Untying the Text - A Post-Structuralist Reader        1970           3
Foucault     Michel        Governmentality                          The Foucault Effect                                   1991           3
Foucault     Michel                                                 Technologies of the Self (Eds. Martin, Gutman & Hutton)
                           Ch 8: The Political Technology of Individuals                                                  1988           2
Foucault     Michel        Ch 3: Body/Power                                                                               1980
                                                                    Power/Knowledge - Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977   2
                                                                                                                                         (Ed.   Gordon)
Foucault     (continued)   Ch 5: Two Lectures                                                                             1980
                                                                    Power/Knowledge - Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977   3
                                                                                                                                         (Ed.   Gordon)
Foucault     Michel        Ch 8: The Eye of Power                                                                         1980
                                                                    Power/Knowledge - Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977   3
                                                                                                                                         (Ed.   Gordon)
Foucault     (continued)                                            Power/Knowledge - Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977
                           Ch 9: The Politics of Health in the Eighteenth Century                                         1980           3
                                                                                                                                         (Ed.   Gordon)
Foucault     (continued)   Ch 10: The History of Sexuality                                                                1980
                                                                    Power/Knowledge - Selected Interviews and Other Writings 1972-1977   3
                                                                                                                                         (Ed.   Gordon)
Foucault     Michel                                                 Beyond Structuralism
                           On the genealogy of ethics: an overview of work in progress and Hermenetics                    1984           2
Foucault     Michel        Sex, Power, and the Politics of IdentityEthics - Subjectivity and Truth (Ed. Rabinow)          1997           3
Foucault     Michel        Introduction                             The Archaeology of Knowledge                          1972           3
Foucault     (continued)   Conclusion                               The Archaeology of Knowledge                          1972           3
*Fox         Richard G.                                              or the Rise of the Hindian                           1990
                           Ch 4: Hindu Nationalism in the Making,Nationalist Ideologies and the Prodcution of National Cultures          1
Fox          Robin         Introduction                             Kinship and Marriage - An Anthropological Perspective 1984           3
Fox          (continued)                                            K
                           Ch 3: Local Groups and Descent Groups inship and Marriage - An Anthropological Perspective 1984               3
Fox          (continued)   Ch 4: Unilineal Descent Groups           Kinship and Marriage - An Anthropological Perspective 1984           3
Fox          (continued)   Ch 9: Kinship Terminology               Kinship and Marriage - An Anthropological Perspective 1984             3
Fox          Robin         Human Nature and Human Rights           Harpers Magazine                                       2001            3
Franklin     Sarah                                                 Enbodied                                               1997
                           Ch 4: "It just takes over:" IVF as a "way of life" Progress- A Cutlrual Account of Assisted Conception         3
Franklin     Sarah                                                 Reproducing Reprodcution: Kinship, Power, and Technological Innovation (Eds. Franklin &
                           Ch 4: Making Miracles: Scientific Progress and the Facts of Life                               1998            3
             Sarah/?
Franklin/Ragone            Introduction                                                                                   1998            3
                                                                   Reproducing Reprodcution: Kinship, Power, and Technological Innovation (Eds. Franklin &
*Fraser      Nancy                                                 Unruly Practices: Power, Discourse and                 1989            1
                           Ch 6: What's Critical about Critical Theory? The Case of Habermas and Gender Gender in Contemporary Social Theory
Fraser       Nancy                                                 Habermas and        Public Sphere (Ed. Existing C)     1992
                           Ch5 : Rethinking the Public Sphere: A contribution to the Ciritque of Actually Calhoun, Democracy              3
Frazer       James G.      Sympathetic Magic                                                                              1979
                                                                   Reader in Comparative Religion - An Anthropological Approach           2
Frazer       James G.      Preface                                 Argonauts of the Western Pacific (Malinowski)          1922            2
*Frazer      James G.      Ch LXVIII                               The Golden Bough                                       1922            1
Freedman     Maurice                                               The Study of Chinese Society
                           Ch 15: Rites and Duties, or Chinese Marriage                                                   1978            3
Freedman     Maurice       Ch 18: Geomancy                         The Study of Chinese Society                           1978            3
Freeman      Carla         Ch 1: Introduction                      High Tech and High heels in the Global Economy         2000            3
Freeman      (continued)                                           High Tech and High heels in the Global Economy
                           Ch 2: Pink-Collar Bajans: Working Class through Gender and Culture on the Global Assembly 2000 Line            3
Freeman      (continued)                                           High Tech and High heels "Open Office"
                           Ch 5: Inside multitext and Data Air: Discipline and Agency in the in the Global Economy        2000            3
Freeman      (continued)                                           High Tech and High heels in the Global Economy         2000            3
                           Ch 6: Fashioning Femininity and "Professional" Identities: Producing and Consuming Acorss Formal and Informal Sectors
Freeman      J.D.                                                  The
                           The Family System of the Iban of Borneo Developmental Cycle in Domestic Groups (Ed. Goody)     1958            3
Freeman      Luke          Ch 1: Introduction                                                                             2001            1
                                                                   Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
Freeman      (continued)   Ch 2: Reconstructing the Past                                                                  2001            1
                                                                   Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
Freeman      (continued)   Ch 3: Migration                                                                                2001            1
                                                                   Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
Freeman      (continued)                                                                                                  2001            1
                           Ch 4: Socio-economic Differentiation Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
Freeman      (continued)   Ch 5: Ritual Differentiation                                                                   2001            1
                                                                   Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
Freeman      (continued)                                           Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
                           Ch 6: The Moral Environment of the Land of the Ancestors                                       2001            1
Freeman      (continued)   Ch 7: The School and School Knowledge                                                          2001            1
                                                                   Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
Freeman      (continued)   Ch 8: Conclusion                                                                               2001            1
                                                                   Knowledge, Education and Social Differentiation amonst the Betsileo of Fisakana, Highlan
*Freitag     Sandria B.                                            Contesting the Nation (Ed. Ludden)
                           Ch 9: Contesting in Public: Colonial Legacies and Contemporary Communalism                     1996            1
French       Rebecca                                                                                                      1995
                           Ch 1: A Sketch of Tibet and Its People The Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhis Tibet, Part 1           1
French       (continued)   Introduction                                                                                   1995
                                                                   The Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhis Tibet, Part 2          3
French       (continued)   Ch 8: Language, Debate, and Magic                                                              1995
                                                                   The Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhis Tibet, part 2          2
French       (continued)   Ch 9: Power and Hierarchy                                                                      1995
                                                                   The Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhis Tibet, part 2          3
French       (continued)   Ch 13: Legal Space and Movement                                                                1995
                                                                   The Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhis Tibet, part 2          1
French       (continued)                                           The                                                    1995
                           Ch 14: Boundaries, Identities, and Levels Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhis Tibet, part 2            3
French       (continued)                                           The                                                    1995
                           Ch 15: Legal Symbols and Representations Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhis Tibet, part 2             3
French       (continued)                                                                                                  1995
                           Ch 22: The Municipal Office of Lhasa The Golden Yoke: The Legal Cosmology of Buddhist Tibet, part 4            3
Friedmann      F.G.          The Peasant: A Symposium Concerning the Peasant Way and View of Life                           1955            1
Froerer        Peggy         Ch 1: Introduction                      Religious Division and Social Conflict                 2007            2
Froerer        Peggy         Ch 2: Adivasi Hindus and the RSS        Religious Division and Social Conflict                 2007            2
Froerer        Peggy                                                 of Inclusion
                             Ch 5: Local Corruption and the Politics Religious Division and Social Conflict                 2007            2
Froerer        Peggy                                                 Religious of Local and Social
                             Ch 7: Liquor Disputes and the Communalisation Division Tensions Conflict                       2007            3
Froerer        Peggy         Ch 8: Conclusion                        Religious Division and Social Conflict                 2007            2
Fukui/Markakis               Introduction
               Katsuyoshi/John                                       Ethnicity and Conflict in the Horn of Africa           1994            3
Fuller         Chris J.                                              Curl Hierarchy
                             The Hindu Pantheon and the Legitimation ofPrize Essay                                          1987            3
Fuller         Chris J.                                              The
                             Ch 1: Popular Hinduism and Indian Society Camphor Flame: Popular Hinduism and Society in 1992  India           2
Fuller         (continued) Ch 7: Devotionalist Movements             The Camphor Flame: Popular Hinduism and Society in 1992India           2
Fuller         (continued) Ch 8: Devotionalism, Goddesses, and women The Camphor Flame: Popular Hinduism and Society in 1992India           1
Fuller                                                               The Camphor
               (continued) Afterword: Popular Hinduism and Hindu Nationalism Flame: Popular Hinduism and Society in 1992    India           2
Fuller         Chris J.      Ch 1: Introduction: Caste Today         Caste Today (Ed. Fuller)                               1996            3
Fuller         Chris J.                                              IFP/EFEO
                             Priestly Education and the Agamic Ritual Tradition in Contemporary Tamilnadu                   1999            3
Fuller         Chris J.                                              Institutions and Inequalities - Essays in Honour of Andre Beteille
                             The Brahmins and Brahminical Values in Modern Tamil Nadu                                       1999            3
Fuller         Chris J.                                              The Servants of the
                             Ch 3: The Relative Inferiority of the Brahman Temple PriestGoddess                             1984            3
Fuller         Chris J.                                               Ritual Action to Indian Sociology, vol. 31(1)
                             Religious Texts, Priestly Education and Contributions in South Indian Temple Hinduism          1997            3
                             Petulant Inconsistency'? The Intellectual Achievement of Edmund Leach
Fuller/Parry Chris J./Jonathan                                       Anthropology Today, vol. 5(3)                          1989            2
                                                                     The Everyday State and Society in Modern India (Eds. 2000 & Benei) 3
Fuller/Harriss Chris J./John For an Anthropology of the Modern Indian State                                                 Fuller
                                                                     Teaching of Swami Dayananda                    Not published.
Fuller/Harriss Chris J./John Globalising Hinduism: The 'Traditional' Preliminary draft (not to quote) and Modern Businessmen in Chennai     3
Fuller         Chris J.      Miscellanous:                                                                                                  3
Fuller                                                               Comparative Studies in Society & History, vol. 30(2) 1988
               (continued) Hinduism and Scriptural Authority in Modern Indian Law                                                           1
Fuller                                                               Economic Tamil Nadu
               (continued) The 'Vinayaka Chaturthi' Festival and Hindutva inand Political Weekly, vol. 36(19)               2001            3
Galanter       Marc                                                  L
                             Ch 1: The Uses of Law in Indian Studiesaw and Society in Modern India (Ed. Dhavan)             1989            3
Galanter       Marc                                                  Law
                             Ch 7: Changing Legal Conceptions of Caste and Society in Modern India (Ed. Dhavan)             1989            3
Galanter       Marc                                                  Law and Society in Modern India (Ed. Dhavan)           1989            2
                             Ch 8: Pursuing Equality in the Land of Hierarchy: An Assessment of India's Policies of Compensatory Discrimination for Historica
Galanter       Marc                                                   Modern India
                             The Displacement of Traditional Law in Journal of Social Issues, vol. 24(4)                    1968            3
Garber/Jenden  Bill/Penny                                            Practising Development - Social Science Perspectives 1993
                             Ch 3: Anthropologists or Anthropology? The Band Aid Perspective on Development Projects (Ed. Pottier)          2
Garcia         J.Neil C.     Introduction                            Philippine Gay Culture: The Last Thirty Years          1996            1
Garcia                                                                the Babaylan Culture: The Last Thirty Years
               (continued) Ch 3: Precolonial Gender-Crossing and Philippine Gay Chronicles                                  1996            3
               M
*Garcia/Lucero aria/Jose                                             The Struggle Politics in Peru                          2005            1
                             Ch 6: Un Pais Sin Indigenas? Rethinking Indigenous for Indigenous Rights in Latin America (Eds. Postero & Zomosc)
Gardner        Katy                                                  Discourses on the 'Plantation
                             Ch 6: Mixed Messages: Contested 'Development' and Development Rehabilitation Project' 1997                     3
Gardner        Katy                                                                                                         1995            3
                             Ch 1: Global Migrants: An IntroductionGlobal Migrants, Local Lives: Travel and Transformation in Rural Bangladesh
Gardner        (continued) Ch 3: Blood and Land                                                                             1995            3
                                                                     Global Migrants, Local Lives: Travel and Transformation in Rural Bangladesh
Gardner      (continued)     Ch 4: Households Apart                                                                        1995             1
                                                                     Global Migrants, Local Lives: Travel and Transformation in Rural Bangladesh
Gardner      (continued)                                               Women                                               1995             1
                             Ch 7: Shame, Status, and the Power ofGlobal Migrants, Local Lives: Travel and Transformation in Rural Bangladesh
Gardner/LewisKaty/D.         Ch 3: The Anthropology of Development                                                         1996
                                                                     Anthropology, Development and the Post-Modern Challenge                1
Gardner/Lewis(continued)                                             Anthropology, Development and the Post-Modern Challenge
                             Ch 5: New Directions - Practice and Change                                                    1996             1
             K
Gardner/Osella aty/Filippo                                           Migration, South Asia: An introduction                2004             3
                             Migration, modernity and social transformation in modernity and social transformation in South Asia (Ed. Osella,Osella, Gardner
Gatens       Moira                                                   Imaginary Bodies - Ethics, Power and Corporeality
                             Ch 1: A Critique of the Sex/Gender Distinction                                                1996             2
Gates        Hill            Ch 1: Introduction                      China's Motor                                         1996             2
Gates        (continued)                                             China's of Production
                             Ch 2: The Tributary and Petty-Capitalist ModesMotor                                           1996             3
Gates        (continued)     Ch 3: Motion in the System              China's Motor                                         1996             1
Gates        (continued)                                              the Household
                             Ch 5: Patricorporations: The State and China's Motor                                          1996             1
Gates        (continued)     Ch 6: Patricorporations: The Lineage China's Motor                                            1996             1
Gates        (continued)     Ch 7: Dowry and Brideprice              China's Motor                                         1996             3
Gates        (continued)                                             China's
                             Ch 8: Folk Ideologies: Rulers and Commoners Motor                                             1996             3
Gates        (continued)     Ch 9: Folk Ideologies: Women and Men    China's Motor                                         1996             3
Geary        Patrick                                                 The of Medieval Things
                             Ch 6: Sacred Commodities: The CirculationSocial Life ofRelics (Ed. Appadurai)                 1986             2
Geertz       Clifford                                                                                                      1983
                             Ch 3: 'From the Native's Point of View' Local Knowledge - Further Essays in Interpretive Anthropology          3
Geertz       Clifford                                                 and Knowledge Further Essays in Interpretive Anthropology
                             Ch 7: The Way We Think Now: Toward LocalEthnography- of Modern Thougth                        1983             2
Geertz       Clifford                                                Local Knowledge - Further                             1983
                             Ch 8: Local Knowledge: Fact and Law in Comparative Perspective Essays in Interpretive Anthropology             3
Geertz       Clifford        Ch 2: The World in a Text               Works and Lives - The Anthropologist as Author        1988             2
Geertz       (continued)                                             Works and Lives - The
                             Ch 3: Slide Show - Evans-Pritchard's African Transparencies Anthropologist as Author          1988             3
Geertz       Clifford                                                Available Light
                             Ch 11: The World in Pieces: Culture and Politics at the End of the Century                    2000             2
Geertz       Clifford                                                The Interpretation Culture
                             Ch 1: Thick Description: Toward an Interpretive Theory ofof Cultures - Selected Essays        1973             3
Geertz       Clifford                                                The on the Concept Cultures
                             Ch 2: The Impact of the Concept of CultureInterpretation of of Man - Selected Essays          1973             3
Geertz       Clifford                                                The Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays
                             Ch 3: The Growth of Culture and the Evolution of Mind                                         1973             3
Geertz       Clifford                                                The Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays
                             Ch 5: Ethos, World View, and the Analysis of Sacred Symbols                                   1973             3
Geertz       Clifford                                                The Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays
                             Ch 7: 'Internal Conversion' in Contemporary Bali                                              1973             3
Geertz       Clifford        Ch 8: Ideology As a Cultural System The Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays          1973             3
Geertz       Clifford                                                The
                             Ch 14: Person, Time, and Conduct in Bali Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays         1973             3
Geertz       Clifford                                                The Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays
                             Ch 15: Deep Play: Notes on the Balinese Cockfight                                             1973             3
Geertz       Clifford        Ch 31: The Uses of Diversity            Assessing Cultural Anthropology                       1994             2
Geertz       Clifford                                                Negara:
                             Ch 1: Political Definition: The Sources of Order The Theatre State in 19th Century Bali       1981             2
Geertz       (continued)                                             Negara: The Theatre State in 19th Century Bali
                             Ch 2: Political Anatomy: The Internal Organization of the Ruling Class                        1981             1
Geertz       Clifford        Miscellanous:                                                                                                  5
Geertz       (continued)     Ch 1: Two Countries, Two Cultures                                                             1968
                                                                     Islam Observed - Religious Development in Morocco and Indonesia        1
Geertz                                                           The Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays
             (continued) Ch 6: Ritual and Social Change: A Javanese Example                                               1973               1
Geertz                                                           The Interpretation of Cultures - Selected Essays
             (continued) Ch 13: The Cerebral Savage: On the Work of Claude Levi-Strauss                                   1973               1
Geertz                                                                                                                    1963
             (continued) Ch 4: The Colonial Period: FoundationsAgricultural Involution: Process of Ecological Change in Indonesia            1
Geertz       Clifford                                            Old Societies and New States: the New States.             in Asia and Africa
                         The Integrative Revolution; Primordial Sentiments and Civil Politics in the Quest for Modernity1963                 3
             V./T.
Geetha/Jayanthi                                                  Women and Nadu
                         Women, Hindutva and the Politics of Caste in Tamil Right Wing Movement (Eds. Sarkar & Butalia)   1995               3
             Dimitra
Gefou-Madianou                                                     Sweet Gender and Culture (Ed. Gefou-Madianou)
                         Ch 7: Exclusion and Unity, Retsina andAlcohol,Wine                                               1992               3
Gegeo        David W.                                            Culture - Kastom - Cultural - Developing Cultural Policy in Melanesia (Eds. Lindstrom &
                         Ch 3: Kastom Nao Stretem Iumi: Views from Kwara'ae on Tradition Policy in Melanesia              1994               3
Gell         Alfred                                              The Social Life of Things (Ed. Appadurai)
                         Ch 4: Newcomers to the World of Goods: Consumption among the Muria Gonds                         1986               3
Gell         Alfred      Ch 2: Magic, Perfume, Dream…                                                                     1977
                                                                 Symbols and Sentiments - Cross-Cultural Studies in Symbolism (Ed. Lewis)    3
Gell         Alfred                                              S
                         On Coote's 'Marvels of Everyday Vision' ocial Analysis, vol. 38                                  1995               3
Gell         Alfred                                              Barter, Exchange and Value (Eds. Humphrey &
                         Ch 6: Inter-Tribal Commodity Barter and Reproductive Gift-Exchange in Old Melanesia Hugh-Jones)  1992               3
Gell         Alfred      Ch 1: Theoretical Introduction          Wrapping in Images: Tattooing in Polynesia               1993               3
Gell         Alfred                                              The Art of Anthropology
                         Ch 1: Strathernograms, or, the Semiotics of Mixed Metaphors - Essays and Diagrams                1999               1
Gell                                                              and the Enchantment of Technology
             (continued) Ch 5: The Technology of Enchantment The Art of Anthropology - Essays and Diagrams                1999               3
Gell         (continued) Ch 6: Vogel's Net                       The Art of Anthropology - Essays and Diagrams            1999               3
Gell         Alfred                                              Cosmos and Society in Oceania (Eds. Coppet & Iteanu)
                         Ch 1: Closure and Multiplication: An Essay on Polynesian Cosmology and Ritual                    1995               3
Gell         Alfred                                              The Anthropology
                         Ch 14: Linguistic arguments for the anthropology of time of Time                                 2001               3
*Geller      M.J.                                                Evidence and Inference in History and Law (Eds. Twinning & Hampsher-Monk)
                         Ch 5: Wigmorean Analysis and the Survival of Cuneiform                                           2003               1
Gellner      Ernest      Ch 2: Concepts and Society                                                                       1987               3
                                                                 The Concept of Kinship: And Other Essays on Anthroppological Method and Explanation
Gellner      Ernest      A Pendulum Swing Theory of Islam        Philosophical Forum, vol. 2(2)                           1970               3
Gellner      Ernest                                              The Anthropology of Buddhism and Hinduism
                         Ch 2: What is the Anthropology of Buddhism About?                                                2001               3
Gellner      Ernest      Miscellanous:                                                                                                       2
Gellner                                                          Muslim Society
             (continued) Ch 1: Flux and Reflux in the Faith of Men                                                        1981               1
Gellner      (continued) The Mightier Pen? Edward Said and theTLS  Double Standards of Inside-out Colonialism             1993               1
Gentner      Dedre       Miscellanous:                                                                                                       2
             (continued) Ch
Gentner/Bowdle/Wolff/Boronat 6: Metaphor Is Like Analogy         The Analytical Mind: Perspectives from Cognitive Science 2001               1
             (continued) Ch 20: The Shift From Metaphor to Analogy in Western Science
Gentner/Jeziorski                                                Metaphor and Thought                                     1993               1
Geschiere    Peter                                               The Modernity                                            1997
                         Ch 1: Introduction: Witchcraft as Political Discourse of Witchcraft: Politics and the Occult in postcolonial Africa 3
Geschiere    Peter                                               Perspectives on Africa: A Reader in Culture, History and Representation 3
                         Ch 20: Kinship, Witchcraft and the Market: Hybrid Patterns in Cameroonian Societies              1997
Geschiere    Peter                                               Globalization and Identity: and Spirit Cults in Africa and (Eds. Meyer & 1
                                                                                                                          1999
                         Globalization and the Power of Indeterminate Meaning: Withccraft Dialectics of Flow and Closure East Asia           Geschiere)
Gevisser     Mark        A Different Fight For Freedom           Defiant Desire                                           1995               3
Gibson       Thomas      Ch 1: Introduction                      Sacrifice & Sharing in the Philippine Highlands          1986               2
Gibson       (continued) Ch 4: Idioms of Social Organization     Sacrifice & Sharing in the Philippine Highlands          1986               3
Gibson       (continued) Ch 6: Spirit Membership                 Sacrifice & Sharing in the Philippine Highlands          1986               2
Gibson       (continued) Ch 9: Summary and Conclusions             Sacrifice & Sharing in the Philippine Highlands      1986             1
Giddens      Anthony     Ch 1: Early Work: The Division of Labour  Durkheim                                             1997             3
Giddens      Anthony                                               The Constitution of Socitey
                         Ch 1: Elements of the Theory of Structuration                                                  1984             4
Giddens      Anthony                                               The Constitution of Critique
                         Ch 6: Structuration Theory, Empirical Research and Social Socitey                              1984             3
Giddens      Anthony     Introduction                              Modernity and Self-Identity                          1991             3
Giddens      Anthony     Ch 3: Romantic Love and Other Attachments                                                      1992             3
                                                                   The Transformation of Intimacy: Sexuality, Love and Eroticism in Modern Societies
*Giddens     Anthony                                               The Future of Anthropology (Eds. Ahmed & Shore)
                         Ch 12: Epilogue: Notes on the Future of Anthropology                                           1995             1
*Gill        Lesley      Ch 7: Power Lines                         Teetering on the Rim                                 2000             1
*Gill        Tom                                                   Lilies Japan                                         1999             1
                         Ch 6: Wage Hunting at the Margins of Urbanof the Field: Marginal People Who Live for the Moment (Eds. Day, Papataxiarchis &
Gill         Tom                                                   Globalisation Employment on the Fringes of the Japanese Economy
                                                                                                                        2000             2
                         Ch 8: Yoseba and Ninpudashi: Changing Patterns of and Social Change in Contemporary Japan (Eds. Eades, Gill & Befu)
Gillespie    Susan D.    Ch 2: Levi-Strauss - Maison and Societe a Maisons                                              2000
                                                                   Beyond Kinship: Social and Material Reproduction in House Societies   3
Gilsenan     Michael                                               History and Anthropology,
                         Law, Arbitrariness and the Power of the Lords of North Lebanon vol. 1                          1985             3
Gilsenan     Michael     Ch 4: The Operations of Grace             Recognising Islam                                    2000             1
Gilsenan                                                            and Sheikhs in North Lebanon
             (continued) Ch 5: Mircles and worldly power- LordsRecognising Islam                                        2000             1
Gilsenan     (continued) Ch 6: Sheikhs and the inner secrets       Recognising Islam                                    2000             2
Ginsburg     Faye                                                  The Anthropology of Media (Eds. Production of
                         Ch 13: Mediating Culture: Indigenous Media, Ethnographic Film, and theAskew, Wilk) Identity    2002             3
Ginzburg     Carlo       Clues: Roots of an Evidential ParadigmMyths, Emblems, Clues                                    1990             2
Gledhill     John                                                  Anthropology Disguises
                         Ch 1: Locating The Political: A Political Power and Its For Today                              1994             3
Gledhill                                                           Power and Study of Domination and Resistance
             (continued) Ch 4: The Political Anthropology of Colonialism: A Its Disguises                               1994             1
Gledhill                                                            History and Pressures of
             (continued) Ch 5: Post-Colonial States: Legacies of Power and Its Disguises Modernity                      1994             1
Gledhill                                                           Power and Its Disguises                              1994
             (continued) Ch 7: Political Process and 'Global Disorder': Perspectives on Contemporary Conflict and Violence               3
Gledhill     John                                                  EASA (Not Entanglements with Multicultural and Indigenous Rights Politics
                         Beyond Speaking Truth to Power: Anthropological to quote)                                      2004             3
Gluckman     Max                                                   Analysis of                                          1958             3
                         Ch 1: The Social Organisation of Modern Zululand a Social Situation in Modern Zululand, Rhoes-Livingstone Papers, no. 28
Gluckman     Max                                                   Social Change in Modern Africa
                         Ch 2: Speccial Studies: Anthropological Problems Arising from the African Industrial Revolution1961             3
Gluckman     Max         Ch 5: Dispute and Settlement              Politics, Law and Ritual in Tribal Society           1965             2
Gluckman                                                           Politics, Law
             (continued) Ch 6: Mystical Disturbance and Ritual Adjustment and Ritual in Tribal Society                  1965             1
Gluckman     Max                                                   Order and
                         Ch 3: Rituals and Rebellion in South-East Africa Rebellion in Tribal Africa                    1963             3
*Gluckman Max                                                      A
                         The Kingdom of the Zulu of South Africafrican Political Systems (Eds. Fortes & Evans-Pritchard)1940             1
Goddard      Victoria                                              of Women's Construction Group Identity in Naples
                         Ch 6: Honour and Shame: The Control The Cultural Sexuality andof Sexuality (Ed. Caplan)        1987             3
             Maurice/Thomas/Franklin
                         Ch Fat
*Godelier/Trautmann/Tjon Sie 1: Introduction                                                                            & Tjon
                                                                   Transformations of Kinship (Eds. Godelier, Trautmann 1998 Sie Fat) 1
Godelier     Maurice     Ch 1: Anthropology and Economics          Perspectives in Marxist Anthropology                 1977             3
Godelier     Maurice                                               Perspectives in Marxist Anthropology
                         Ch 2: The Concept of 'Social and Economic Formation': the Inca Example                         1977             2
Godelier     Maurice                                               Perspectives in among Anthropology
                         Ch 5: 'Salt Money' and the Circulation of Commodities Marxist the Baruya of New Guinea         1977             3
Godelier     Maurice                                               Marxist Analyses and
                         Modes of Production, Kinship, and Demographic Structures Social Anthropology (Ed. Bloch) 1975                   2
Godelier    Maurice                                              Relations of Marxist Models of Social Evolution        1978             3
                          The Concept of the 'Asiatic Mode of Production' andProduction: Marxist Approaches to Economic Anthropology (Ed. Seddon)
*Goffman    Erving        Alienation from Interaction            Interaction Ritual: Essays on face to Face Behaviour 1967               1
Goffman     Erving        Ch 6: Face Engagements                                                                        1963
                                                                 Behavious in Public Places - Notes on Social Organisation of Gatherings 3
Goldman     Irving                                               Example                                                1976             2
                          Time, Space, and Descent: The Cubeo Actes du XLIIe Congres International Des Americasnistes: Congres du Centenaire, vol. 2
Goldstein   Melvyn C.                                            A History of Modern Tibet, 1913-1951 - The Demise of1993
                          Introduction: Tibetan Society, 1913-1951                                                                       2
                                                                                                                         the Lamaist State
Goldstein   (continued)                                           State
                          Conclusion: The Demise of the LamaistA History of Modern Tibet, 1913-1951 - The Demise of1993                  1
                                                                                                                         the Lamaist State
Goldstein   Melvyn C.                                            Central
                          Taxation and the Structure of a Tibetan Village Asian Survey, vol. 15(1-2)                    1971             2
Goldstein   (continued)                                          Central Asiatic Journal, vol. 15                       1971
                          The Balance Between Centralization and Decentralization in the Traditional Tibetan Political System            2
Gombrich    Ernst Hans    Raphael's Madonna della Sedia          Gombrich on the Renaissance                            1985             1
Good        Byron J.                                             Medicine, Rationality and Experience
                          Ch 2: Illness Representations in Medical Anthropology: A Reading of the Field                 1985             1
Good        (continued)                                          Medicine, Rationality and Experience                   1994
                          Ch 5: The Body, Illness Experience, and the Lifeworld: A Phenomenological Account of Chronic Pain              2
Goodale     Jane C.                                              Siblinship Replacement of Kaulong Meaning              1979
                          Ch 9: Siblings as Spouses: The Reproduction andin Oceania: Studies in theSociety of Kin Relation (Ed. Marshall)2
Goody       Esther N.                                            Parenthood                                             1982              in
                          Ch 1: A Framework for the Analysis of Parent Rolesand Social Reproduction - Fostering and Occupational Roles 1 West Africa
Goody       (continued)   Ch 2: Kinship Fostering                                                                       1982              in
                                                                 Parenthood and Social Reproduction - Fostering and Occupational Roles 1 West Africa
Goody       (continued)                                          Parenthood and Social Reproduction - Fostering and Occupational Roles 1 West Africa
                          Ch 11: West African and West Indian Immigrant Families                                        1982              in
Goody       Jack          Introduction                                                                                  1996             3
                                                                 A History of the Modern Family (Eds. Burguiere, Klapisch-Zuber, Segalen & Zonabend)
Goody       Jack          Ch 1: Evolution and Communication The Domestication of the Savage Mind                        1977             2
Goody       Jack                                                 Bridewealth and Dowry (Eds. Goody & Tambiah)
                          Bridewealth and Dowry in Africa and Eurasia                                                   1973             3
Goody       Jack          Ch 1: Perspectives                     The Development of the Family and Marriage in Europe   1983             3
Goody       (continued)   Ch 2: Two Sides to the Mediterranean The Development of the Family and Marriage in Europe     1983             3
Goody       Jack                                                 The
                          Ch 3: The State, the Bureau and the File Logic of Writing and the Organisation of Society 1986                 2
Goody       (continued)   Ch 4: The Letter of the Law            The Logic of Writing and the Organisation of Society 1986               2
Goody       Jack          Ch 2: Slavery in Time and Space        Asian and African Systems of Slavery (Ed. Watson)      1980             3
Goody       Jack                                                 Comparative Studies in
                          Ch 3: The Mother's Brother and the Sister's Son in West Africa Kinship                        1969             3
Goody       Jack                                                 Production and Reproduction - A                          the
                          Ch 1: The Evolution o fthe Domestic Economy: The Hoe and the Plough Comparative Study of1976Domestic Domain    3
Goody       (continued)                                          Production and Reproduction - A Comparative Study of1976Domestic Domain
                          Ch 2: The Theory, the Variables and a Test                                                      the            3
Goody       (continued)   Ch 4: Farming, Labour and Sex                                                                   the
                                                                 Production and Reproduction - A Comparative Study of1976Domestic Domain 1
Goody       (continued)                                          Production and Reproduction - A Comparative Study of1976Domestic Domain
                          Ch 6: Adoption in Cross-Cultural Perspective                                                    the            3
Goody       (continued)   Ch 8: Class and Marriage                                                                        the
                                                                 Production and Reproduction - A Comparative Study of1976Domestic Domain 1
Goody       Jack          Ch 1: Feudalism in Africa?             Technology, Tradition and the State in Africa          1971             1
Goody       (continued)                                          Technology, Tradition and the State in Africa
                          Ch 2: Polity and the Means of Production                                                      1971             4
Goody       (continued)                                          Technology, Tradition and the State in Africa
                          Ch 3: Polity and the Means of Destruction                                                     1971             1
Goody       (continued)                                           of Horse and Earth
                          Ch 4: Polity and Ritual: The OppositionTechnology, Tradition and the State in Africa          1971             1
Goody       (continued)   Ch 5: Conclusion                       Technology, Tradition and the State in Africa          1971             1
Goody      Jack                                                   Property Relations - Renewing the Anthropological Tradition (Ed. Hann) 3
                         Ch 10: Dowry and the Rights of Women to Property                                                  1998
Goody      Jack                                                   Food      Love: A Cultural History Sets of Rules?
                         Ch 3: Comparing Family Systems in Europe and Asia: Are There Differentof East and West            1998              3
Gooptu     Nandini                                                Dalit Movements and the Meaning of Labour in India (Ed. Kobb)
                         Caste and Labour: Untouchable Social Movements in Uran UP in the Twentieth Century                1993              2
Gordon     Robert        Ch 22: Popular Justice                                                                            2004
                                                                  A Companion to the Anthropology of Politics (Eds. Nugent & Vincent)        2
*Gorringe  H.                                                     The Meaning of of Local:                                 2001              1
                         Establishing Territory - The Spatial Bases and Practicesthe the DPIRevisiting the Urban Neighbourhood in India (Eds. De Neve &
Gottlieb   Alma          Spiritual Beng Babies                    The Afterlife is Where we Come From                      2004              3
Gow        David D.                                               Human Organization vol. Anthropology
                         Doubly Damned: Dealing With Power and Praxis in Development52 (4)                                 1993              3
Gow        Peter                                                  The Anthropology of Mission in (Ed. Cannell)
                         Forgetting Conversion - The Summer Institute of LinguisticsChristianitythe Prio Lived World 2006                    2
Gow        Peter         Introduction                                                                                      1991
                                                                  Of Mixed Blood: Kinship and History in Peruvian Amazonia, Part 2           3
Gow        (continued)   Ch 4: Husband and Wife                   Of Mixed Blood: Kinship and History in Peruvian Amazonia 1991              3
Gow        (continued)   Ch 9: Mixed People                       Of Mixed Blood: Kinship and History in Peruvian Amazonia 1991              2
Gow        Peter                                                  Shamanism, History
                         River People: Shamanism and History in Western Amazonia & the State (Eds. Humphrey & Thomas)      1994              3
Graeber    David         Ch 11: Painful Memories                                                                           1999
                                                                  Ancestors, Power and History in Madagascar (Ed. Middleton)                 2
Graeber    David         Ch 1: Three Ways of Talking About Value  Toward an Anthropological Theory of Value                2001              3
Graeber    (continued)                                            Toward
                         Ch 2: Current Directions in Exchange Theory an Anthropological Theory of Value                    2001              3
Graeber    (continued)   Ch 6: Marcel Mauss Revisited             Toward an Anthropological Theory of Value                2001              2
Graham     Mark                                                   Ethnos vol. 63(1)
                         Follow the Yellow Brick Road: An Anthropological Outing in Queer Space                            1998              2
Grant      Bruce         Ch 1: Introduction                       In the Soviet House of Culture: A Century of Perestruikas1995              3
Grant      (continued)                                            In the Soviet House
                         Ch 7: Perestroika Revisited: On Dissolution and Disillusion of Culture: A Century of Perestruikas 1995              3
Grant      (continued)   Ch 8: Conclusion                         In the Soviet House of Culture: A Century of Perestruikas1995              3
Grayling   A.C.          Ch 3: The Later Philosophy               A Very Short Introduction                                2001              2
Green      Maia                                                   Conceiving                                               1999
                         Ch 3: Procreation Theories and Their Implications Persons - Ethnographies of Procreation, Fertility and Growth 3    (Eds. Loizos & H
*Green     R.C.                                                   Man 'Melanesia' in Culture History                       1991              1
                         Near and Remote Oceania - Disestablishing and a Half: Essays in Pacific Anthropology and Ethnobiology in Honour of Ralph Bulm
Greene     Shane         Incas, Indios and Indigenism in Peru Nacla Report on the Americas, vol. 38(4)                     2005              3
Greenhalgh Susan                                                  Situating Fertility Practice, Political Economic, and Feminist Perspectives3
                                                                                                                           1995
                         Ch 1: Anthropology Theorizes Reproduction: Integrating - Anthropology and Demoraphic Inquiry (Ed. Greenhalgh)
Gregory    C.A.          Introduction                             Gifts and Commodities                                    1982              2
Gregory    (continued)   Ch 1: The Competing Theories             Gifts and Commodities                                    1982              3
Griffiths  Thomas                                                 Beyond the Cosmology and Work in the Amerindianization   2001              2
                         Ch 13: Finding One's Body: Relationships Between Visible and the Material -North-West Amazonia of Society in the Work of Pet
Grillo     Ralph                                                   View from of Development - Anthropological Perspectives (Eds. Grillo & 3
                         Ch 1: Discourses of Development: The Discourses Anthropology                                      1997              Stirrat)
*Grillo    Ralph                                                  Social Anthropology and Development Policy
                         Ch 1: Applied Anthropology in the 1980s: Retrospect and Prospect                                  1985              1
Grimshaw   Anna                                                   Being Rizong Fieldwork in Anthropology
                         Ch 5: The End in the Beginning: New Year at There - (The Himalayas)                               1995              3
           Anna/Keith
Grimshaw/Hart                                                     Critique
                         Anthropology and the Crisis of the Intellectuals of Anthropology, vol. 14(3)                      1994              2
Grimshaw   Patricia                                               Family and Gender in the Cult of True Jolly & MacIntyre)
                         Ch 1: New England Missionary Wives, Hawaiian Women and 'ThePacafic (Eds. Womanhood' 1989                            3
Grimson    Alejandro                                              Nacla
                         Ethnic (In)Visibility in Neoliberal Argentina Report on the Americas, vol. 38(4)                  2005              3
Gudeman     S.          Ch 1: Community, Market, and CultureThe Anthropology of Economy                                   2001               2
Guha        RamachandraMiscellanous:                                                                                                         2
Guha        (continued) An Anthropologist among the Marxists Civil Lives 1                                                1994               1
Guha                                                              Social Ecology
            (continued) Colonialism and Conflict in the Himalayan Forest                                                  1998               1
Gulalp      Haldun      Islamism and Postmodernism                Contention, vol. 4(2)                                   1995               1
Gulbrandsen Ornulf      Ch 7: Living Their Lives in Courts                                                                1996
                                                                  Anthropological Studies of Authority and Ambiguity (Ed. Harris)            1
Gulliver    P.H.        Ch 10: Procedures and Settlements                                                                 1963
                                                                  Social control in an African Society - A Study of the Arusha: Agricultural 3Masai of Norther
Gulliver    P.H.                                                  Law in Culture and Society (Ed. Nader)
                        Dispute Settlement without Courts: The Ndendeuli of Southern Tanzania                             1969               3
Guo         Uyuhua                                                Feeding China's Little Table                            2000
                        Ch 4: Food and Family Relations: The Generation Gap at the Emperors: Food, Children and Social Change (Ed. 1         Jun)
Gupta       Akhil                                                 Child Develpoment Services Program in India             2001               1
                        Governing Population - The Integrated States of Imagination: Ethnographic Explorations of the Postcolonials State (Eds. Hansen
Gumperz     J.          Ch 10: The Speech Community               Language and Social Context (Ed. Giglioli)              1972               2
Gutting     Gary                                                  Michel Foucaults Archaology
                        Ch 4: The Order of Things I: From Resemblance to Representation of Scientific Reason              1989               1
Gutting                                                           and Fall of Man
            (continued) Ch 5: The Order of Things II: The Rise Michel Foucaults Archaology of Scientific Reason           1989               1
Hacking     Ian         Ch 8: The End of Captain Cook             The Social Construction of What?                        1999               3
Hale        Charles R.                                            Nacla Report on the Americas, vol. 38(2)
                        Rethinking Indigenous Politics in the Era of the 'Indio Permitido'                                2004               3
Hale        Charles R.                                            Critique of Anthropology, vol 14(1)                     1994
                        Between Che Guevara and the Pachamama: Mestizos, Indians and Identity Politics in the Anti-quincentenary Campaign    3
Hammersley/Atkinson     Ch 3: Access                              Ethnography: Principles in Practice                     1983               2
Hammersley/Atkinson     Ch 4: Field Relations                     Ethnography: Principles in Practice                     1983               2
Handler     Richard                                               Commemorations - The Politics of Identity (Ed. Gillis) 1994
                        Ch 1: Is 'Identity' a Useful Cross-Cultural Concept?                                                                 3
Handler     Richard                                               Modernist Anthropology - From Fieldwork to Text (ed. 1990
                        Ruth Benedict and the Modernist Sensibility                                                       Manganaro0         2
Hann        Chris                                                 Anthropology                                            1996
                        Introduction: Political Society and Civil Civil Society: Challenging Western Models (Eds. Hann & Dunn)               3
Hann                                                              Civil Society: Challenging Western Models (Eds. Hann & Dunn)
            (continued) Ch 7: Philosophers' Models on the Carpathian Lowlands                                             1996               3
Hann        C.M.                                                  Contesting Markets (Ed. Dilley)
                        Ch 13: Market Principle, Market-place and the Transistion of Europe                               1992               3
Hann        C.M.                                                  Property                                                1998
                        Ch 1: Introduction: Embeddedness of Property Relations: Renewing the Anthropological Tradition (Ed. Hann) 3
Hann        C.M.        Ch 1: Introduction                                                                                2002
                                                                  Postsocialism: Ideals, Ideologies and Practices in Eurasia (Ed. Hann)      3
Hannerz     Ulf                                                   Ethnos, vol. 58
                        When Culture is Everywhere, Reflections on a Favourite Concept                                    1993               3
Hannerz     Ulf         Ch 3: The Search for the City             Exploring the City                                      1980               3
Hannerz     Ulf         Ch 4: The View from the Copperbelt Exploring the City                                             1980               1
Hannerz     Ulf         Miscellanous:                                                                                                        2
Hannerz                                                           Race, vol. 9(4)
            (continued) The Rhetoric of Soul: Identification in Negro Society                                             1968               1
Hannerz                                                           Urban
            (continued) Ethnicity and Opportunity in Urban America Ethnicity (Ed. Cohen)                                  1974               1
Hannigan    J.                                                    Fantasy City
                        Ch 4: "Santinized Razzmatazz" Technology, simulated experience and the culture of consumption     1998               2
Hannigan                                                          Edutainment
            (continued) Ch 5: Shopertainment, Eatertainment, Fantasy City                                                 1998               2
Hannigan    (continued) Ch 9: Land of the Rising Fun              Fantasy City                                            1998               2
Hansen                                                            Wages
             Thomas Blom Ch 2: Bombay and the Politics of Urban Desireof Violence                                        2000               1
Hansen                                                            Wages of Violence
             (continued) Ch 4: Thane City: The Making of Political Dadaism                                               2000               1
Hansen                                                            Wages of
             (continued) Ch 5: Riots, Policing and Truth Telling in BombayViolence                                       2000               1
Hansen       (continued) Ch 6: In the Muslim Mohalla              Wages of Violence                                      2000               1
Hansen                                                            Critique of Anthropology, vol. 16(2)
             Thomas Blom Recuperating Masculinity: Hindu Nationalism, Violance and the Exorcism of the Muslim 'Other'    1996               3
Hansen                                                            The                                                     Fuller
             Thomas Blom Governance and Myths of State in Mumbai Everyday State and Society in Modern India (Eds. 2000 & Benei) 3
             Thomas Blom/Finn
Hansen/Stepputat         Introduction: States of Imagination                                                             2001               3
                                                                  States of Imagination: Ethnographic Explorations of the Postcolonials State
Haraway      Donna                                                Simians, Cyborgs and Women: The Reinvention of Nature
                         A Cyborg Manifesto: Science, Technology, and Socialist-Femininsm in the Late Twentieth Century  1991               3
Haraway      Donna       Ch 1: When Species Meet: Introductions   When Species Meet                                      2008               2
             Susan/Kathleen
Harding/Stewart                                                   Transparency and Conspiracy: Ethnographies of          2003               3
                         Anxieties of Influence: Conspiracy Theory and Therapeutic Culture in Millenial America Suspicion in the New World order.
Harding      Susan                                                Accounting for Fundamentalisms (Eds. Marty and Appleby)
                         Ch 3: Imagining the Last Days: The Politics of Apocalptic Language                              1994               2
Hardwig      John        Is There a Duty to Die?                                                                         2000                &
                                                                  Life Choices: A Hastings Center Introduction to Bioethics (Eds. J. Howell 3 W. Sale)
Harner       Michael J.                                           Peoples and Cultures of Native South America - An Anthropological Reader
                         Ch 19: The Supernatural World of the Jivaro Shaman                                              1973               2
Harootunian Harry                                                  Morality: Yasukuni (Eds. and the Reunion of State 1999
                         Ch 8: Memory, Mourning, and NationalNation and Religion ShrineVan der Veer & Lehmann) and Religion in Postwar Japan3
Harragin     Simon                                                Culture and Public of southern Sudan' Draft
                         Relief and an Understanding of Local Knowledge: the caseAction (Eds. Rao & Walton)              2002               2
Harrell      Stevan                                               Cultural Encounters
                         Introduction: Civilizing Projects and the Reaction to Them on China's Ethnic Frontiers          1996               3
Harrell-Bond Barbara                                              Refugees: Perspectives on the experience of Forced Migration (Ed. Ager)
                         Ch 6: The Experience of Refugees as Recipients of Aid                                           1999               3
Harries      Patrick                                                                                                     1994               3
                         Ch 7: Colonialism and Migrant Labour Work, Culture and Identity: Migrant Labourers in Mozambique and South Africa, c. 1860-
Harris       Marvin                                                                                                      1973
                         Ch 22: Race, Culture and Manpower Peoples and Cultures of Native South America - An Anthropological Reader         1
Harris       (continued) Ch 23: The Highland Heritage                                                                    1973
                                                                  Peoples and Cultures of Native South America - An Anthropological Reader  1
Harris       Olivia      Ch 1: The Eternal Return of Conversion   The Anthropology of Christianity (Ed. Cannell)         2006               3
Harris       Olivia      Ch 5: Knowing the Past                                                                          1995
                                                                  Counterworks- Managing the Diversity of Knowledge (Ed. Fardon)            2
Harris       Olivia                                               Sex and of Women and Men
                         Complementarity and Conflict: An Andean View Age as Principles of Social Differentiation (Ed.1978La Fontaine)      3
Harris       Olivia                                               Death and the Regeneration of Life (Eds. Bloch & Parry)
                         Ch 2: The Dead and the Devils among the Bolivian Laymi                                          1982               3
Harris       Olivia                                               Bulletin of Latin American Research, vol. 14(1)
                         The Coming of the White People - Reflections on the Mythologisation of History in Latin America 1995               2
Harris       Olivia                                               Ethnicity, Markets, and Paradigm in an Ayllu of Northern Potosi
                                                                                                                         1995               1
                         Ch 10: The Sources of Meanings of Money: Beyond the MarketMigration in the Andes: the Crossroads of History and Anthropolo
Harris                                                            Ethnicity, Markets, and Migration Andes                1995               3
             (continued) Ch 12: Ethnic Identity and Market Relations: Indians and Mestizos in thein the Andes: the Crossroads of History and Anthropolo
Harris       Olivia                                               Nature, the Wild in Gender (Eds. MacCormack & Strathern)
                         Ch 4: The Power of Signs: Gender, Culture andCulture and the Bolivian Andes                     1980               3
Harris       Olivia                                               Money        the Morality of Exchange (Eds. Potosi, Parry)
                         Ch 10: The Earth and the State: The Sources and Meanings of Money in Northern Bloch & Bolivia   1989               2
Harris       Olivia      Ch 6: What Makes People Work?            Questions of Anthropology (Eds. Astuti & Stafford)     2007               3
*Harris      Olivia                                               Economy, Northern Potosi, Bolivia
                         Ch 3: Labour and Produce in an Ethnic Ecology and Exchange in the Andes (Ed. Lehmann)           1982               1
Harris       Paul        Ch 6: On Not Falling Down to Earth                                                              2000
                                                                  Imaging the Impossible (Eds. Rosengren, Harris & Johnsen)                 3
Harris       Paul                                                 Is Cultural Context                                    1990               3
                         Ch 10: The Child's Theory of Mind and Causes of Development - Interdisciplinary Perspectives (Eds. Butterworth & Bryant)
*Harris      Paul                                                 The Work of the Imagination
                         Ch 5: Reasoning, Make-believe and Dialogue                                                      2000               1
             R./T.
*Harris/Taylor           Ch 13: Muller on Linguistic Evolution Landmarks in Linguistic Thought                         1989              1
Harriss      John                                               Rethinking Social Development: Theory, Research and1994 Practice (Ed. Booth)
                         Ch 7: Between Economism and Post-Modernism: Reflections on Research on 'Agrarian Change' in India               3
*Harrison    Henrietta                                          China
                         Ch 4: The Creation of Modern Nationalism                                                      2001              1
*Harrison    Simon       Ch 1: Introduction + Ch 8: Conclusion The Mask of War                                         1993              1
Hart         Gillian                                            of 'the Household' in Economic Theory
                         Ch 6: Imagined Unities: Constructions Understanding Economic Processes (Eds. Ortiz & Lees)1992                  6
*Hart        Gillian                                            Disabling Globalization: Places of Power in Post-Apartheid South Africa 1
                         Ch 5: Taiwanese Networks in Newcastle - The Production of Knitwear and of Difference          2002
Hart         H.L.A.                                              Secondary Rules
                         Ch 5: Law as the Union of Primary and The Concept of Law                                      1961              2
Hart                                                            The
             (continued) Ch 6: The Foundations of a Legal System Concept of Law                                        1961              2
Hart         Keith       Ch 2: On Commoditization                                                                      1982              2
                                                                From Craft to Industry: The Ethnography of Proto-Industrial Cloth Production (Ed. E. N. G
Hart         Keith       Ch 1: Money in the Making of Humanity  The Memory Bank - Money in an Unequal World            2000              3
Hart                                                            The Memory Bank - Money in an Unequal World
             (continued) Ch 3: Capitalism: Making Money with Money                                                     2000              3
Hart                                                            The View
             (continued) Ch 5: The Market From a Humanist Point ofMemory Bank - Money in an Unequal World              2000              3
Hart                                                            T
             (continued) Ch 6: The Changing Character of Moneyhe Memory Bank - Money in an Unequal World               2000              2
Hart         Keith                                              Contesting Markets (Ed. Dilley)
                         Ch 2: Market and State after the Cold War                                                     1992              2
Hartsock     Nancy                                              Feminism/Postmodernism (Ed. Nicholson)
                         Ch 7: Foucalt on Power: A Theory for Women?                                                   1990              3
Harvey       Neil                                               Nacla Dissent
                         Inclusion Through Autonomy: Zapatistas andReport on the Americas, vol. 39(2)                  2005              3
Hasan-RokemGalit                                                Reader in the                                   2008(2002)
                         Martyr vs. Martyr: The Sacred Language of Violence Anthropology of Religion (Ed. Lambek)                        3
Hastings     Adrian      Ch 1: The Nation and Nationalism                                                              1997
                                                                The Construction of Nationhood - Ethnicity, Religion and Nationalism     3
Hastings     (continued) Ch 6: Some African Case Studies                                                               1997
                                                                The Construction of Nationhood - Ethnicity, Religion and Nationalism     2
Hastings     (continued) Ch 8: Religion Further Considered                                                             1997
                                                                The Construction of Nationhood - Ethnicity, Religion and Nationalism     2
*Hastrup     Kirsten                                            Legal Cultures Rights: An Rights (Ed.
                         Ch 1: Accommodating Diversity in a Global Culture of and HumanIntroduction Hastrup)           2001              1
             Giyoo/KayokoDomain-Specific Constraints of Conceptual Development
Hatano/Inagaki                                                                                                         2000
                                                                International Journal of Behavioral Develompent, vol. 24(3)              3
Hau'ofa      Epeli       Epilogue: Pasts to Remember                                                                   2000              3
                                                                Remembrance of the Pacific Past: An Invitation to Remake History (Ed. Borofsky)
Hay          Jonathan                                           Res: Anthropology and Aesthetics, vol. 35
                         Culture, Ethnicity, and Empire in the Work of two Eighteenth-century 'Eccentric' Artists      1999              3
Headland/Reid            Ch 15: A.                              Between Bands and of the Myth f Isolated Independent Hunter-Gatherers
             Thomas N./Lawrence Holocene Foragers and Interethnic Trade: A CritiqueStates (Ed. Gregg)                  1991              3
Heald        Suzette                                            Groups in Tanzania
                         Domesticating Leviathan: Sungusungu DESTING Crisis States Programme (LSE)                     2002              2
Healy        Kevin                                              Nacla Report
                         Towards an Andean Rural Development Paradigm? on the Americas, vol. 38(3)                     2004              3
Hechter      Michael     Miscellanous:                                                                                                   2
Hechter                                                          Immigrants to the United States in the Cultural       1979              1
             (continued) Ch 5: The Position of Eastern EuropeanThe World-System of Capitalism (Ed. Goldfrank) Division of Labour: Some Trends and Pr
Hechter                                                         American Journal of Sociology
             (continued) Group Formation and the Cultural Division of Labor                                            1978              1
*Hedman/Sidel                                                    Fragments of a Century
                         Ch 6: Malling Manila: Images of a City,Philippine Politics                                    2000              1
Heelas       Paul        Introduction                           The New Age Movement                                   1996              3
Heelas       (continued) Ch 3: The New                          The New Age Movement                                   1996              3
Heelas       (continued) Ch 7: Self-Understanding               The New Age Movement                                   1996              3
Heelas        (continued) Ch 8: The Future                         The New Age Movement                                     1996              3
Heesterman J.C.            Veda and Dharma                         The Concept of Duty in South Asia                        1978              3
Heesterman J.C.            Miscellanous:                                                                                                      2
Heesterman (continued) Priesthood and the Brahmin                  Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 5                1971              1
Heesterman (continued) The King's Order                            Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 20(1)            1986              1
Hefner        Robert W.                                            Democratic of a Democratic Ideal                         1998              2
                           Ch 1: On the History and Cross-Cultural Possibility Civility: The History and Cross-Cultural Possibility of a Modern Political Ideal
Hefner        Robert W.                                            Islam and the Political Economy                          1987              3
                           Ch 3: The Political Economy of Islamic Conversion in Modern East Java of Meaning: Comparative Studies of Muslim Discourse (
Hefner        Robert W.    Ch 2: Civil Precedence                  Civil Islam and Democratization in Indonesia             2000              2
Hefner        Robert W.                                             the Rationality of Conversion                           1993              2
                           Ch 1: Introduction: World Building and Conversion to Christinaity - Historical and Anthropological Perspectives on a Great Transf
Helliwell     Christine    Space and Sociality in a Darak Longhouse                                                         1996              2
                                                                   Things as They Are: New Directions in Phenomenological Anthropology (Ed. Jackson)
Helliwell     Christine                                            I
                           Ch 3: Good Walls make Bad Neighboursnside Austronesian Houses (Ed. Fox)                          1993              3
Helmreich     Stefan                                               Reproducing Reproduction: Life in the Age and Technological Reproduction
                                                                                                                            1998              3
                           Ch 9: Replicating Reproduction in Artificial Life: Or, the Essence of Kinship, Power,of Virtual ElectronicInnovation (Eds. Franklin &
Hendricks     Janet                                                Nation-States and Shuar                                  1991
                           Ch 2: Symbolic Counterhegemony among the Ecuadorian Indians in Latin America (Eds. Urban & Sherzer)                2
Herder                     Part 1:                                 Reflections on the Philosophy of the History of Mankind
              Johann Gottfried von National Genius and the Environment                                                      1968              3
Herdt         Gilbert H.                                           Ritualized Homosexuality in Melanesia (Ed. Herdt)
                           Ch 1: Ritualized Homosexual Behaviour in the Male Cults of Melanesia, 1862-1983: An Introduction 1984              2
Herdt         Gilbert H.                                           Sambia Sexual Culture: Essays from the Field
                           Ch 9: Representations of 'Homosexuality': Cultural Ontology and Hisotrical Comparison            1999              2
Herdt         Gilbert H.                                           Third                                                    1994
                           Introduction: Third Sexes and Third GendersSex, Third Gender: Beyond Sexual Dimorphism in Culture and History      3
                           Moondi's Eroticism
Herdt/Stoller Gilbert/Robert                                       Intimate Communications                                  1990              4
Herskovits    M.J.         Economizing and Rational Behavior                                                                1968              2
                                                                   Ecomonic Anthropology: Readings in Theory and Analysis (Eds. Leclair & Schneider)
d'Hertefelt   Marcel       The Rwanda of Rwanda                    Peoples of Africa (Ed. Gibbs)                            1965              2
Hertz         R.                                                   Death and the Right of Death
                           A Contribution to the Study of the Collective RepresentationHand                                 1960              3
Hertz         R.           The Pre-Eminence of the Right Hand Death and the Right Hand                                      1960              3
Herzfeld      Michael      Miscellanous:                                                                                                      2
Herzfeld                                                           Contested Identities: Gender and Kinship in Modern Greece (Eds. Loizos1 Papataxiarchis
              (continued) Ch 3: Silence, Submission, and Subversion: Toward a Poetics of Womanhood                          1991               &
Herzfeld      M.           Ch 1: The Poetics of Manhood                                                                     1985
                                                                   The Poetics of Manhood: Contest and Identity and a Cretan Mountain Village 1
Heusch        Luc De                                               Why Marry
                           Ch 4: Structure and History: View on the Kachin Her? Society and Symbolic Structures             1981              1
Huesch        (continued) Ch 5: Possession and Shamanism           Why Marry Her? Society and Symbolic Structures           1981              3
Hewlett       Barry S.                                             Father-Child Relations: Cultural and Biosocial Contexts1992 Hewlett)
                           Ch 7: Husband-Wife Reciprocity and the Father-Infant Relationship Among Aka Pygmies               (Ed.             3
Hewlett       Barry S.                                              Pygmies
                           Ch 9: Cultural Diversity Among African Cultural Diversity Among Twentieth Century Foragers 1996                    2
Hill/Wright                CH                                      Rethinking History and Myth Indigenous South             1998              1
              Jonathan/Robin 4: Time, Narrative, and Ritual: Historical Interpretations from an- Amazonian SocietyAmerican Perspectives on the Past (Ed.
Hill/Wright   Janet        Ch 7: Read my article                   Regimes of language (Ed. Currey)                         2000              2
Hirschkind    Charles                                               and the Pious Ear
                           Ch 7: Hearing Modernity: Egypt, Islam Hearing Cultures: Sound, Listening and Modenrity           2004              4
              Lawrence/Susan
Hirschfeld/Gelman                                                  Mapping the Mind (Eds. Hirschfeld &
                           Toward a topography of the mind: An introduction to domain and specificityGelman)                1994              3
Hoben         Allan                                                The lie of the Land
                           Ch 11: The Cultural Construction of Environmental Policy (Eds. Leach & Mearns)                   1996              2
Hobsbawm     Eric                                                   T
                           Ch 1: Introduction: Inventing Traditions he Invention of Tradition (Eds. Hobsbawm & Ranger) 1983                3
Hochschild   A.R.          Introduction: Two Sides of an Idea       The Commersialisation of Intimate Life                  2003           3
Hockey       Jenny                                                  Contemporary Issues Non-western Death Ritual            and            3
                           Ch 1: The View from the West: Reading the Anthropology of in the Sociology of Death, Dying 1996Disposal (Eds. Howarth & Jup
Holbraad     Martin        Ch 9: The power of powder                                                                        2007           3
                                                                    Thinking through things- Theorising artefacts ethnographically (Eds. Henare, Holbraad, W
Holmstrom    M             Ch 7: A dual economy and society?        Industry and Inequality                                 1984           3
*Hollis      Martin        The Social Destruction of Reality        Rationality and Relativism (Eds. Hollis & Lukes)        1982           1
*Hollup      Oddvar                                                 The Round Table, Sri 323
                           Ethnic Identity, Violence and the Estate Tamil Minority in vol. Lanka                            1992           1
Holy         Ladislav      Nuer Politics                            Segmentary Lineage Systems Reconsidered                 1979           3
Holy         (continued)                                             its Existential Status
                           The Segmentary Lineage Structure andSegmentary Lineage Systems Reconsidered                      1979           1
Holy         Ladislav                                               Strategies and Norms in a changing Matrilineal
                           Ch 2: Technological Development and the restructuring of the relations of production Society1986                3
Hoodfar      Homa                                                    Citizenship Citizenship in Code
                           Iranian Women and the Intersection of Women and and the Familythe Middle East (Ed. Josef) 1999                  3
Hoodfar      Homa                                                   A Home Divided - Women and Income in the Third          1988
                           Household Budgeting and Financial Management in a Lower-Income Cairo Neighborhood World (Eds. Dwyer & 3          Bruce)
Horton       Robin                                                  Modes of Though (Eds. Horton & Finnegan)
                           Levy-Bruhl, Durkheim and the Scientific Revolution                                               1973           3
Hoskins      Janet         Ch 5: Why Do Ladies Sing the Blues? Cloth and Human Experience (Eds. Weiner & Schneider)         1989           3
Hoskins      Janet                                                  Bidragen, vol. 142
                           So My Name Shall Live: Stone-Dragging and Grave-Building in Kodi, West Sumba                     1986           3
Hoskins      Janet                                                   the Buffalo's Daughter in a Kodi Folktale              Asia
                           Sacrifice and Sexuality: the Triumph ofHeadhunting and the Social Imagination in South East 1996 (Ed. Hoskins)  3
*Hoskins     Janet                                                  Dealing with Inequality - Analysing Kodi Mortuary Ceremonies
                                                                                                                            1987           1
                           Ch 7: Complementarity in this World and the Next: Gender and Agency in Gender Relations in Melanesia and Beyond (Ed. Strat
Houseman     Michael                                                Cognitive Aspects of Religious Symbolism (Ed. Boyer) 1993
                           Ch 10: The Interactive Basis of Ritual Effectiveness in a Male Initiation Rite                                  3
Howe         Leo           Ch 7: Tourism, Culture and Identity                                                              2005
                                                                    The Changing World of Bali: Religion, Society and Tourism              3
*Howell      Jude                                                   Governance in China
                           Ch 12: Getting to the Roots: Governance Pathologies and Future Prospects                         2004           1
Howell       Signe                                                  Societies at Fearful Is - Chewong Concepts of Human 1989Howell
                           Ch 2: To Be Angry Is Not To Be Human, But To Be Peace: Anthropological Perspectives (Eds.Nature & Willis) 3
Howell       Signe                                                  For The Substances in Nothern Lio Moral Eastern Indonesia
                           A Life for 'Life': Blood and Other Life-promotingSake of Our Future: Sacrificing in Discourse 1996              3
*Howes       David                                                  Cross Cultural Consumption (Ed. Howes)
                           Introduction: Commodities and Cultural Borders                                                   1996           1
Hugh-Jones   Christine     Miscellanous:                                                                                                   2
Hugh-Jones   (continued)   Preface and Introduction                                                                         1979           1
                                                                    From the Milk River: Spatial and Temporal Processes in Northwest Amazonia
Hugh-Jones   (continued)                                            Sex and Age as Principles of Social Differentiation (Ed.1978
                           Food for Thought: Patterns of Production and Consumption in Pira-Parana Society                   La Fontaine)  1
Hugh-Jones   Stephen       Shamans, Prophets, Priests, and Pastors  Shamanism, History & the State (Eds. Thomas & Humphrey) 1996           3
Hugh-Jones   Stephen                                                L'Homme, vol. 33 (126-128)
                           Clear Descent or Ambiguous Houses - A Reexamination of Tukanoan Social Organisation              1993           2
Hugh-Jones   Stephen                                                History and in Northwest Tonkin)
                           Ch 4: Waribi and the White Men: History and Myth Ethnicity (Ed. Amazonia                         1989           2
Hugh-Jones   Stephen                                                Barter, Exchange and Value (Eds. in Northwest Humphrey)
                           Ch 3: Yesterday's Luxuries, Tomorrow's Necessities: Business and Barter Hugh-Jones &Amazonia     1992           3
Hugh-Jones   Stephen                                                About the House House in Northwest Amazonia
                           Ch 11: Inside-Out and Back-to-Front: The Androgynous (Eds. Carsten & Hugh-Jones)                 1995           3
Humphrey     Caroline      Introduction                             Marx Went Away- But Karl stayed Behind                  1999           3
Humphrey     Caroline      Conclusion                               Marx Went Away- But Karl stayed Behind                  1999           1
Humphrey     Caroline                                               The Mongolia
                           Ch 6: Chiefly and Shamanist Landscapes inAnthropology of Landscape (Eds. Hirsch & O'Hanlon)      1995           2
Humphrey     Caroline                                              The Unmaking of Soviet Life
                           Ch 1: Icebergs, Barter, and the Mafia in Provincial Russia                                       2002               3
Humphrey     Caroline                                              The Unmaking of Soviet Life
                           Ch 6: Rethiking bribery in Contemporary Russia                                                   2002               2
Humphrey     Caroline                                              Defining Females                                         1993
                           Ch 4: Women, Taboo and the Suppression of Attention - The Nature of Women in Society (Ed. Ardener)                  3
Humphrey     Caroline      Introduction                                                                                     1996               2
                                                                   Shamans and Elders - Experience,m Knowledge, and Power among the Daur Mongols
Humphrey     Caroline                                              Uncertain in Provincial Russia                           1998
                           Ch 1: Traders, Disorder, and Citizenship RegimesTransition: Ethnographies of Change in the Postsocialist World3(Eds. Burawoy &
Humphrey     Caroline                                              Shamanism, History & the State (Eds. Humphrey
                           Shamanic Practices and the State in Northern Asia: Views from the Center and Periphery& Thomas)  1994               3
Humphrey     Caroline                                              Barter, Exchange and Value (Eds. Hugh-Jones & Humphrey)
                           Ch 1: Introduction: Barter, Exchange and Value                                                   1992               2
Humphrey     Nicholas                                                                                                       1984
                           Ch 2: The Social Function of Intellect Consciousness Regained: Chapters in the Development of Mind                  3
*Humphreys S.C.            Death and Time                                                                                   1981               1
                                                                   Mortality and Immortality: the Anthropology and Archaeology of Death (Eds. Humphreay
Hutchins     Edwin         Ch 9: Cultural Cognition                Cognition in the Wild                                    1995               2
             Edwin/Tove Ch 2: Distributed Cognition in an Airline Cockpit and Communication at War (Eds. Engestrom1996
Hutchins/Klausen                                                   Cognition                                                 & Middleton)      2
                                                                   Cultures of Relatedness (Ed. Among
Hutchinson Sharon-ElaineCh 3: Identity and Substance: The Broadening Bases of RelatednessCarsten) the Nuer of Southern Sudan2002               3
*Hutchinson Sharon-ElaineCh 1: Orientations                        Nuer Dilemmas                                            1996               1
             J./A.
*Hutchinson/Smith          Section I: The Question of Definition Nationalism (Eds. Hutchinson/Smith)                        1994               1
Huyse        Luc                                                    successor Elites Make vol. 20(1)
                           Justice After Transition: On the choicesLaw and Social Inquiry,in Dealing with the Past          1995               3
Hymes        Dell                                                  Language and of Communicative Events
                           Toward Ethnographies of Communiction: The analysissocial context                                 1972               2
Hymes                                                              Directions in Sociolinguistics (Eds. Gumperz & Hymes)1972
             (continued) Ch 1: Models of the Interaction of Language and Social Life                                                           3
Hymes        Dell                                                  Social Anthropology and Languages (Ed. Ardener)
                           Sociolinguistics and the Ethnography of Speaking                                                 1971               1
Hymes        Dell          The Ethnography of Speaking             Readings in the Sociology of Language (Ed. Fishman) 1972                    3
Hymes        Dell          Discourse: Scope Without Depth          International Journal of Sociology of Language, vol. 571986                 3
                           Introduction
Inda/Rosaldo Jonathan Xavier/Renato - A World in Motion            The Anthropology of Globalisation                        2002               3
Ingold       Tim           Anthropology Is NOT Ethnography         Radcliffe-Brown Lecture                                  2007               3
*Ingold      Tim                                                   The Debated Mind: Evolutionary Psychology Verrsus Ethnography (Ed. Whitehouse)
                           Ch 4: From the Transmission of Representations to the Education of Attention                     2001               1
Ingold       Tim                                                   The Perception of human-animal relations                 2000
                           Ch 4: From trust to domination- An alternative history of the Environment; essays in livelihood, dwelling and skill 3
Ingold                                                             The Perception of the Environment; essays in in the world2000
             (continued) Ch 10: Building, dwelling, living: How animals and people make themselves at home livelihood, dwelling and skill      1
Inhorn       M.            Ch 1: Infertility and Patriarchy                                                                 1996               in
                                                                   Infertility and Patriarchy: The Cultural Politics of Gender and Family Life 3 Egypt
*Ireland     P.W.                                                  International Journal of the Sociology of Law, vol. 12 1984
                           The Rise of the Limited Liability Company                                                                           1
                           Ch                                       differentiation
Irvine & Gal Judith T./ Susan 2: Language ideology and LinguisticRegimes of language                                        2000               3
Isaac        Barry L.                                              Research in Economic Anthropology, vol. 14
                           Retrospective on the Formalist-Substantivist Debate                                              1993               2
Ishay        M.            Ch 4: The World Wars                    The History of Human Rights                              2004               2
*Jackson     Jean                                                   the Vaupes                                              1991
                           Ch 5: being and Becoming an Indian inNation-States and Indians in Latin America (Eds. Urban & Sherzer)              1
*Jackson     Michael                                               Things as They Anthropological Critique                  1996               1
                           Introduction: Phenomenology, Radical Empiricism and Are: New Directions in Phenomenological Anthropology (Ed. Jackson)
Jackson      Peter                                                 Sites of Desire, Economies of Pleasure: Sexualities in Asia and the Pacific (Eds. Manderso
                           Kathoey><Gay><Man: The Historical Emergence of Gay Male Identity in Thailand                     1999               3
Jacobson     Doranne       Ch 1: Introduction                      Reading Ethnography                                      1991               3
Jacobson    Doranne     Ch 6: Conclusions                       Reading Ethnography                                   1991             3
*Jaffrelot  Christophe                                          Patterns of Middle the Functioning of in World's Largest Democracy
                                                                                                                      2008             1
                        Ch 2: Why Should We Vote? The Indian Middle Class and Class Consumptionthe India and China (Eds. Jaffrelot & Van der Veer)
Jain                                                            Tradition, pluralism and identity                     1999
            Ravindra K. Indian diaspora, globalisation and multiculturalism: A cultural analysis (Eds. Das, Gupta, Uberoi)             3
            Roman/Krystyrn 13: Similarity and Contiguity in Language and Literature, in the Cinema, and in Aphasia 1988
Jakobson/Pomorska       Ch                                      Dialogues                                                              3
Jakobson    Roman                                               Style
                        Closing Statement: Lingusitics and Poetics in Language (Ed. Sebeok)                           1960             3
Jakobson    Roman                                               On of Language
                        Ch 4: The Speech Event and the FunctionsLanguage (Eds. Waugh & Monville-Burston)              1995             3
Jakobson    Roman                                               On Language (Eds. Disturbances
                        Ch 7: Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Waugh & Monville-Burston)              1995             3
James       Allison                                             Biosocial Perspectives on Children Childhood
                        Ch 3: From the Child's Point of View: Issues in the Social Construction of (Ed. Panter-Brick) 1998             2
*James      Allison                                             Cross Cultural Contemporary British Food
                        Ch 4: Cooking the Books: Global or Local Identities inConsumption (Ed. Howes) Cultures? 1996                   1
James       Deborah                                             The Journal Land Claims in the New
                        After Years in the Wilderness': The Discourse of theof Peasent Studies 27(3) South Africa     2000             3
James       Deborah                                             Unpublished but presented at                        May-04             2
                        Property and Citizenship in South Africa's Land Reform Programme conference: 'State, Borders and Nations; Negotiating Citize
Jameson     Fredric     Postmodernism and Consumer Society Postmodern Culture (Ed. Foster)                            1985             3
Jankowiak   William                                             Romantic Passion: A Universal Experience? (Ed. Jankowiak)
                        Romatic Passion in the People's Republic of China                                             1995             3
Janzen      John M.                                                                                                   1992
                        Ch 3: Core Features in Ngoma TherapyNgoma - Discourses of Healing in Central and Southern Africa               3
Janzen                                                          Ngoma - Discourses of Healing in Central and Southern Africa
            (continued) Ch 5: How Ngoma Works: Of Codes and Consciousness                                             1992             3
Jarvie      I.C.        A. Structure and Function               Theory in Anthropology (Eds. Manners & Kaplan)        1968             3
Jarvis      Simon                                               Between the Psyche                                    2001             2
                        Ch 1: Old Idolatry: Rethinking Ideology and Materialism. and the Polis: Refiguring History in Literature and Theory (Rossignto
*Jeffrey    Robin       Legacies of Matriliny in Kerala         Paper for the Conference of the AAS                   2003             1
Jenner      W.J.F.      Ch 1: Tyrannies of History              The Tyranny of History, The Roots of China's Crisis   1992             3
Jenner      (continued) Ch 2: Histories of Tyranny              The Tyranny of History, The Roots of China's Crisis   1992             3
Jewsiewicki Bogumil                                             Readings in African Popular Culture (Ed. Barber)
                        Painting in Zaire: From the Invention of the West to the Representation of Social Self        1997             3
Johnson     Chalmirs    Ch 3: The Communist Army                Peasent Nationalism and Communist Power               1962             3
Johnson     Helen                                               The Composistions of Gendered Subjectivity in New Caledonai
                        The Right Kind of Women Things: ChangingAustralian Journal of Anthropology, vol. 8(2)         1997             3
Johnson     Mark                                                Beauty and Power - Transgendering and Cultural Transformations in the2
                        Ch 1: Beauty and Power: Introduction and Summary                                              1997              Southern Philipp
Johnson                                                         Beauty and Power - Transgendering and Cultural Transformations in the3
            (continued) Ch 3: On the Engendermeant of Gay/Bantut Sexuality                                            1997              Southern Philipp
Johnson                                                         Beauty and Power - Transgendering and Cultural Transformations in the3
            (continued) Ch 4: Growing Up Gay: Narrative Themes in Gay Life-Histories                                  1997              Southern Philipp
*Johnson    Ragnar                                              Visual Anthropology, vol. 9
                        The Extent of Representation, the Relationships of Artifacts and the Anthropology of Art      1997             1
*Jones      Alisa                                               History History Education in Mainland China           2005             1
                        Ch 2: Changing the Past to Serve the Present: Education and National Identity in East Asia (Eds. Vichers & Jones)
*Josephides Lisette                                             After Writing Culture (Eds. James, Hockey & Dawson) 1997
                        Ch 2: Representing the Anthropologist's Predicament                                                            1
Jun         Jing                                                The Temple of Memories: History, Power, And Morality1996 Chinese Village
                        Ch 1: Introduction: A Study of Social Memory                                                   in a            3
Jun                                                                                                                    in a            3
            (continued) Ch 2: Memory of Historical PossibilitiesThe Temple of Memories: History, Power, And Morality1996 Chinese Village
Jun                                                                                                                    in a
            (continued) Ch 3: Memory of Revolutionary Terror The Temple of Memories: History, Power, And Morality1996 Chinese Village  3
Jun                                                                                                                    in a
            (continued) Ch 4: Memory of Communal Trauma The Temple of Memories: History, Power, And Morality1996 Chinese Village       1
Jun         (continued) Ch 5: Dams and dreams                                                                          in a            1
                                                                The Temple of Memories: History, Power, And Morality1996 Chinese Village
Jun           Jing                                                    Feeding China's Little Emperors:                        2000
                           Introduction: Food, Children, and Social Change in Contemporary China Food, Children and Social Change (Ed. 1        Jun)
Jun                                                                   Feeding a Gansu Village                                 2000
              (continued) Ch 6: Food, Nutrition, and Cultural Authority in China's Little Emperors: Food, Children and Social Change (Ed. 1     Jun)
Just          Roger        Ch 5: Triumph of Ethnos                    History and Ethnicity (Ed. Tonkin)                      1989              3
*Kalberg      Stephen      Introduction to The Protestant Ethic                                                               2002
                                                                      Max Weber - The Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism             1
                           Ch                                         The Anthropology
Kahn/Llobera Joel S./Josep R. 10: Towards a New Marxism or a New Anthropology? of Pre-Capitalist Societies                    1981              2
Kahn                                                                  Reproducing on Sperm and Paternal Relatedness           2000
              Susan MarthaCh 3: Jewish and Gentle Sperm: Rabbinic Discourse Jews: a Cultural Account of Assisted Conception in Israel 3
Kakar         Sudhir       The Warriors                               The Colours of Violence                                 1996              3
Kalam         M.A.                                                    ?
                           Ethnicity and Urduization amongst Pakistanis in Bradford                                    ?                        1
              Valli
Kanapathipillai                                                       Mirrors
                           Ch 13: July 1983: The Survivor's Experience of Violence: Communities, Riots and Survivors 1990                       3
                                                                                                                               in South Asia (Ed. Das)
Kapadia       Karin        Miscellanous:                                                                                                        3
Kapadia                                                               The Journal of Industry in Rural South India
              (continued) The Profitability of Bounded Labour: The Gem-CuttingPeasant Studies, vol. 22(3)                     1995              1
Kapadia                                                               The Journal of Peasant Studies,
              (continued) Where Angels Fear to Tread?: Third World Women and Development vol. 22(2)                           1995              1
Kapadia                                                               The Indian Journal of Labour Economics, in 35(3)
              (continued) Every Blade of Green: Landless Women Labourers, Production and Reproductionvol.South India          1992              1
Kapadia       Karin                                                   The Worlds of Industrial Classes in South India Today 1999
                           Ch 11: Gender Ideologies and the Formation of Rural Indian Industrial Labour (Eds. Parry, Breman & Kapadia) 3
*Kapferer     Bruce                                                    Cosmology and the Passions                             1988              1
                           Ch 1: Cultures of Nationalism: Political Legends of People, Myths of State: Violence, Intolerance and Political Culture in Sri Lank
*Kapferer                                                             Legends of the Passions                                 1988              1
              (continued) Ch 4: Ideological Practice, Ethnic Nationalism, and People, Myths of State: Violence, Intolerance and Political Culture in Sri Lank
Kapferer      Bruce                                                   Critique of Anthropology, vol. 8(2)
                           The Anthropologist as Hero: Three Exponents of Post-Modernist Anthropology                         1988              2
Kaplan                     Ch                                         Marriage Practices in Lowland Exxchange and Reciprocity among the Piaroa of Venezuela
              Joanna Overing 6: Dualisms as an Expression of Difference and Danger: Marriage South America (Ed. Kensinger)    1984              2
Kaplan        Martha                                                  Neither Cargo nor Cults. Ritual Politics and the Colonial Imagination in Fiji
                           Ch 9: Conclusion: Do Cults Exist? Do States Exist?                                                 1995              3
Kaplan        Martha                                                  Nation Making: Emergent Identities in Postcolonial      1995
                           Blood on the Grass and Dogs Will Speak: Ritual Plitics and the Nation in Independent Fiji Melanesia (Ed. Foster)     3
Kapur/Cossman                                                         Women and
              Ratna/BrendaCommunalising Gender Engendering Community Right Wing Movement (Eds. Sarkar & Butalia)              1995              3
Karim                                                                 Male and Southeast Asia
              Wazir Jahan Ch 1: Introduction: Genderising Anthropology in Female in Developing Southeast Asia (Ed. Karim)     1995              3
Karim                                                                 Ma' its Relationship to Tulah Beliefs (only extract)
              (continued) Ch 5: The Economy of the Ma' Betisek and Betisek Concepts of Living Things                          1981              2
Karim         (continued) Ch 7: Summary and Conclusion                Ma' Betisek Concepts of Living Things                   1981              1
              Annette
Karmiloff-Smith                                                       Alas, Poor Darwin: Arguments Against Evolutionary Psychology (Eds. Rose & Rose)
                           Ch 8: Why Babies' Brains Are Not Swiss Army Knives                                                 2000              3
              Annette
Karmiloff-Smith            Ch 4: The Child as a Mathematician         Beyond Modularity                                       1999              2
*Kaur         Raminder                                                                                                        2003
                           Ch 5: Mandal, Media, and the Market Performative Politics and The Culture of Hinduism: Public Use of Religion1in Western India
*Kaviraj      Sudipta                                                 Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 18(2)
                           On the Crisis of Political Institutions in India                                                   1984              1
Keane         Webb         Ch 7: Modern Sincerity                                                                             2007
                                                                      Christian Modernity: Freedom and Fetish in the Missian Encounter.         3
Keane         Webb                                                    Indonesia, vol. 68
                           The Materiality and Locality of Everyday Lives                                                     1999              3
Keane         Webb                                                    Conversion to in Colonial Indonesia                     1996
                           Ch 6: Materialism, Missionaries and Modern Subjects Modernities: The Globalization of Christianity (Ed. Van der Veer)2
Kearney       M.           Introduction                               Reconceptualizing the Peasantry                         1996              3
Kearney       (continued) Ch 1: San Jeronimo: A Peasant Community     Reconceptualizing the Peasantry                         1996              3
Kearney       M.                                                      Reconceptualizing the Peasantry
                           Ch 7: From Modes of Production to Consumption of Modes: Class, Value, Power, and Resistance        1996              1
Kearney                                                            Reconceptualizing the Peasantry
             (continued) Ch 8: Peasant and the New Politics of Representation                                              1996             3
*Keeler      W.J.F.         Ch 1: Language, poewr, and Asceticism  Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves                  1987             1
Keesing      Roger          Ch 2: Encountering Ancestors           Kwaio Religion                                          1982             3
Keesing      Roger          Miscellanous:                                                                                                   4
Keesing      Roger                                                  In Contemporary Pacific 1(1,2)
                            Creating the Past: Custom and IdentityThethe Contemporary Pacific.                             1989             2
Keesing      (continued) Ch 7: Kin Groups and Kinship TerminologiesKin Groups and Social Structure                         1975             1
Keesing      (continued) Ch 1: The Anthropological Approach Cultural Anthropology: A Contemporary Perspective 1998                          1
Keesing      (continued) Introduction                                                                                      1982
                                                                   Rituals of Manhood - Male Initiation in Papua New Guinea (Ed. Herdt) 1
Keil         F.                                                    Concepts, Kinds
                            Ch 1: The Representation and Acquisition of Concepts and Cognitive Develoment                  1992             1
Keil                                                               Concepts,
             (continued) Ch 3: Natural Kinds, Nominal Kinds, and Artifacts Kinds and Cognitive Develoment                  1992             1
*Keiser      R.L.           Ch 7: Fieldwork Among the Vice Lords The Vice Lords - Warriors of the Streets                  1979             1
Keller       Eva            Ch 5: Bible Study                      The Road to Clarity: Seventh-Day Adventism in Madagascar2005             3
Keller                                                             The Inquiry
             (continued) Ch 6: Knowledge of the Bible and Scientific Road to Clarity: Seventh-Day Adventism in Madagascar  2005             3
Keller       Eva                                                   The Anthropology of Christianity (Ed. East Coast of Madagascar
                            Study, Discovery and Clarity of Mind: Seventh-Day Adventist Practice on the Cannell)           2006             2
Kempf        Wolfgang                                              Syncretism/Anti-Syncretism: The Politics of Religious Synthesis (Eds. Stewart & Shaw)
                            Ch 5: Ritual, Power and Colonial Domination                                                    1994             3
*Kempt       Wolfgang                                              Local in Initiation Sleep Experiences and Culture in New Guinea
                                                                                                                           2003             1
                            Ch 4: Dreamscapes: Transcending the Dream Travelers: Rites among the Ngaing of Papua the Western Pacific (Ed. Lohmann)
Kendall      Laurel                                                Getting Married in Korea
                            Ch 3: A Rite of Modernization and its Postmodern Discontents                                   1996             3
*Kendall     Laurel                                                The Performance of Healing
                            Ch 1: Initiating Performance: The Story of Chini, a Korean Shaman (Eds. Laderman & Roseman)    1996             1
Kennedy      Robinette                                             Gender & Power in Rural Greece (Ed. Dubisch)
                            Ch 6: Women's Friendships on Crete: A Psychological Perspective                                1986             3
Kerblay      Basil                                                 Peasants and Peasant Societies
                            Ch 25: Chayanov and the Thoery of Peasan Economies                                             1987             3
*Khan                       Ch                                     Race in Britain (Ed. Husband)
             Verity-Saifullah 13: The Role of the Culture of Dominance in Structuring the Experience of Ethnic Minorities  1982             1
                                                                   The Modern Anthropology of South-East Asia: An Introduction
King/Wilder Victor/WilliamCh 1: South East Asia - A Field of Anthropological Enquiry?                                      2003             3
Kipnis       Andrew B.      Introduction                                                                                    North
                                                                   Producing Quanxi: Sentiment, Self and Subculture in a1997 China Village  1
Kipnis                                                             Producing Quanxi: Sentiment, Self and Subculture in a1997 China Village
             (continued) Ch 6: Feeling, Speech, and Nonrepresentational Ethics                                              North           1
Klass        Morton                                                Research in the Sociology of Work, vol. 1
                            Caste, Village, Factory, and Worker in West Bengal, India                                      1981             3
Kleinman     Arthur         The Violences of Everyday Life                                                                 2000
                                                                   Violence and Subjectivity (Eds. Das, Kleinman, Ramphele & Reynolds) 2
Knipe        David M.                                              India and                                               1997             3
                            Ch 16: Becoming a Veda in the Godavari Delta Beyond: Aspects of Literature, Meaning, Ritual and Thought (Ed. Meij)
Knorringa    Peter                                                 The Industry: Continued Informality and Changing Threats1999
                            Ch 10: Artisan Labour in the Agra FootwearWorlds of Indian Industrial Labour (Eds. Parry, Breman & Kapadia) 3
Kolenda      Pauline                                               Mother Worship: Theme and Variations (Ed. Preston) 1983
                            Pox and the Terror of Childlessness: Images and Ideas of the Smallpox Goddess in a North Indian Village         2
*Kolenda     Pauline                                               Concepts                                                1982             1
                            Ch 7: Widowhood among 'Untouchable' Chuhras of Person: Kinship, Castge and Marriage in India (Eds. Ostor, Fruzzetti & Barne
Kopytoff     Igor                                                  The Social Life of Things (Ed.
                            Ch 2: The Cultural Biography of Things: Commoditization as Process Appadurai)                  1986             3
Kopytoff     Igor           Ch 24: Ancestors as Elders in Africa   Perspectives on Africa (Ed. Grinker & Steiner)          1997             3
             Igor/Suzanne Ch 1: African 'Slavery as an Institution Slavery in Africa: Historical and Anthropological Perspectives (Eds. Kopytoff & Miers)
Kopytoff/Miers                                                      of Marginality                                         1977             2
Kotilainen   Eija-Maija     Ch 4: Family Valuables                                                                         1992             1
                                                                   When the Bones Are Left: A Studdy of the Material Culture of Central Sulawesi
Kotilainen    (continued) Ch 5: Textiles as Heirlooms                                                                      1992           3
                                                                   When the Bones Are Left: A Studdy of the Material Culture of Central Sulawesi
Kotkin        Stephen                                              Magnetic Mountain: Stalinism as a civilisation
                           Introduction: Understanding the Russian Revolution                                              1995           3
Kotkin        Stephen      Afterword: Stalinism as a civilisation Magnetic Mountain: Stalinism as a civilisation           1995           3
Kotkin        Stephen                                              Making Workers Soviet: Power                            1994           3
                           Ch 3: Coercion and Identity: Workers' lives in Stalin's Showcase city , class and Identity (Eds. Siegelbaun & Sony)
Kritz         Neil J.      The Dilemmas of Transitional Justice Transitional Justice, vol. 1 (Ed. Kritz)                   1995           3
*Krygier      Martin       Ch 2: Anthropological Approaches        Law and Social Control (Eds. Kamenka & Tay)             1980           1
Kulick        Don          Ch 2: Becoming a 'Travesti'                                                                     1998           2
                                                                   Travesti: Sex, Gender and Culture among Brazilian Transgendered Prostitutes
                           Cch                                     Cross-Cultural Approches Village
Kulick/Stroud Don/Christopher 1: Conceptions and Uses of Literacy in a Papua New Guineanto Literacy (Ed. Street)           1993           3
Kumar         N            Ch 1: Physical and Cultural Shocks                                                              1992
                                                                   Friends, brothers, informants: Fieldwork memoirs of Banaras            2
Kumar         (continued) Ch 16: Questions of Gender                                                                       1992
                                                                   Friends, brothers, informants: Fieldwork memoirs of Banaras            3
Kuper         Adam         Preface                                 Culture: The Anthropologist's Account                   1999           3
Kuper         (continued) Introduction                             Culture: The Anthropologist's Account                   1999           2
Kuper         Adam                                                 Culture: The Anthropologist's Account
                           Ch 3: Clifford Geertz: Culture as Religion and as Grand Opera                                   1999           3
Kuper         Adam                                                 Culture: The Anthropologist's Account
                           Ch 4: David Schneider: Biology as Culture                                                       1999           1
Kuper         Adam         Ch 6: Brave New World                   Culture: The Anthropologist's Account                   1999           3
Kuper         Adam         Ch 1: Introduction                      Wives for Cattle                                        1982           2
Kuper         (continued) Ch 2: Catte beget Children               Wives for Cattle                                        1982           2
Kuper         (continued) Ch 3: The Bridewealth Account            Wives for Cattle                                        1982           2
Kuper         Adam         Ch 1: The Idea of Primitive Society                                                              an Illusion
                                                                   The Invention of Primitive Society: Transformations of 1988            3
Kuper         Adam         Ch 2: Patriarchal Theory                                                                         an Illusion
                                                                   The Invention of Primitive Society: Transformations of 1988            2
Kuper         Adam                                                  Society
                           Ch 3: Lewis Henry Morgan and AncientThe Invention of Primitive Society: Transformations of 1988  an Illusion   3
Kuper         Adam                                                 The
                           Ch 11: A Short History of Alliance Thoery Invention of Primitive Society: Transformations of 1988an Illusion   3
Kuper         Adam         Introduction                            South Africa and the Anthropologist                     1987           2
Kuper                                                              South Africa and the Anthropologist
              (continued) Ch 10: The Transformation of African marriage in Southern Africa                                 1987           3
Kuper         Adam                                                 Darwinizing Culture (Ed. Aunger)
                           Ch 9: If Memes Are the Answer, What Is The Question?                                            2000           3
Kuper         Adam         Ch 1: Malinowski                        Anthropology and Anthropologists                        1983           1
Kuper         (continued) Ch 2: Radcliffe-Brown                    Anthropology and Anthropologists                        1983           2
Kuper                                                              Anthropology and
              (continued) Ch 3: The 1930s and 1940s- from function to structure Anthropologists                            1983           1
              M
Kwa'ioloa/Burt ichael/Ben Ch 4: The Power off Ghosts and God Living Tradition - A Changing Life in Solomon Islands 1997                   3
Kymlicka      Will         Ch 1: Introduction                                                                              1996
                                                                   Multicultural Citizenship: A Liberal Theory Of Minority Rights         2
Kymlicka                                                                                                                   1996
              (continued) Ch 2: The Politics of Multiculturalism Multicultural Citizenship: A Liberal Theory Of Minority Rights           3
Kymlicka                                                           Multicultural Citizenship: A Liberal Theory Of Minority Rights
              (continued) Ch 3: Individual Rights and Collective Rights                                                    1996           3
La Fontaine Jean                                                   Initiation, to the Study and Secret                     1985
                           Ch 1: Theories of Religion and Their Contribution Ritual Drama of Initiation Knowledge Across the World        1
La Fontaine (continued) Ch 5: Problems of Interpretation                                                                   1985
                                                                   Initiation, Ritual Drama and Secret Knowledge Across the World         1
                                                                    Initiation, Ritual Drama and Secret Knowledge Across the World
La Fontaine (continued) Ch 8: Marriage, Maternity and the Initiation of Girls                                            1985              2
*La Fontaine Jean                                                   The
                          Descent in New Guinea: AN Africanist View Character of Kinship (Ed. Jack Goody)                1973              1
LaClau       Ernesto                                                Politics and
                          Ch 1: Feudalism and Capitalism in Latin America Ideology in Marxist Theory                     1977              3
Lahiri       Smita                                                   Community,
                          Materialising the Spiritual: Christianity,Dissertation and History in a Philippine Landscape   2002              2
*Laidlaw     James                                                  South on Research, vol. 16(1)
                          The Uses and Abuses of Theology: CommentsAsia Jonathan Parry's Death in Banaras                1996              1
*Lakoff      George       Ch 18: Whorf and Relativism               Women, Fire and dangerous Things                     1990              1
Lambek       Michael                                                American Ethnologist, Vol. 15 (4)                     in Mayotte
                          Spirit possession/spirit succession: aspects of social continuity among the Malagasy speakers 1988               2
Lambek       Michael                                                American Through Spirit Possession in Madagascar
                          The Sakalava Poise of History: Realizing the Past Ethnologist, vol. 25(2)                      1998              3
Lambek                                                              Man, vol. 27
             (continued) Taboo as Cultural Practice among Malagasy Speakers                                              1992              3
Lambek       Michael                                                Bodies and Persons (Eds. Lambek & Strathern)          a Long
                          Ch 5: Body and Mind in Mind, Body and Mind in Body: Some Anthropological Interventions in 1998 Conversation      3
Lambek       Michael                                                Society for
                          Ecstasy and Agony in Sri Lanka. A Review Article Comparative Study of Society and History 1985                   3
Lambek       Michael      Introduction                                                                                   1981
                                                                    Human Spirits: A Cultural Account of Trance in Mayotte                 2
Lambek       (continued) Ch 1: An Overview of Mayotte Society Human Spirits: A Cultural Account of Trance in Mayotte     1981              1
Lambek                                                              Human Islam
             (continued) Ch 2: Who The Spirits Are Not: Possession andSpirits: A Cultural Account of Trance in Mayotte   1981              1
Lambek                                                              Human Spirits: A Cultural Account of Trance in Mayotte
             (continued) Ch 3: The Nature of Spirits: First Approximations                                               1981              1
Lambek       (continued) Conclusion                                                                                      1981
                                                                    Human Spirits: A Cultural Account of Trance in Mayotte                 1
Lambek       Michael                                                JRAI, vol. 13(1)
                          Sacrifice and the Problem of Beginning: Meditations from Sakalave Mythopraxis                  2007              3
Lambek       Michael                                                Journal of Women
                          Virgin Marriage and the Autonomy of Women in Mayotte in Culture and Society, vol. 9(2)         1983              3
Lambek       Michael                                                Illness and Irony:                                   2003              2
                          Introduction: Irony and Illness - Recognition and Refusal ON the Ambiguity of Suffering in Culture (Eds. Lambek & Antze)
Lambek       Michael                                                Society for Comparative Study in Mahajanga, Madagascar
                          The Value of Coins in a Sakalava Polity: Money, Death, and Historicity of Society and History 2001               3
Lambek       Michael                                                Culture, vol. 8(1)
                          Graceful Exist: Spirit Possession as Personal Performance in Mayotte                           1988              3
Lambek       Michael                                                Anthropology and Humanism, vol. Fieldwork
                          Pinching the Crocodile's Tongue: Affinity and the Anxieties of Influence in 22(1)              1997              3
Lambek       Michael      Ch 1: Nuriaty, the Saint and the SultanPostcolonial Subjectivities in Africa (Ed. Werbner)     2002              3
Lambek       Michael                                                American Ethnologist, vol. 7(2)                      1980
                          Spirits and Spouses: Possession as a System of Communication among the Malagasy Speakers of Mayotte              3
Lambek       Michael                                                Beyond Rationalism: Witch and the Spirit-Medium       Sorcety (Ed. Kapferer)
                          Ch 8: Fantasy in Practice: Projection and Introjection, or theRethinking Magic, Witchcraft and 2002              2
Lambek       Michael      Miscellanous:                                                                                                    3
Lambek       (continued) Ch 1: Knowledge and Hubris                 Knowledge and Practice                               1993              1
Lambek                                                              Omaly Sy Anio, vol. 25/26
             (continued) The Ludic Side of Islam and Its Possible Fate in Mayotte                                        1987              1
Lambek       (continued) Ch 8: How do Women Give Birth?             Questions of Anthropology (Eds. Astuti & Stafford)   2007              1
Lambek/Walsh              Ch                                        Antankarana: Identity, History, Madagascar Northern 1999
             Michael/Andrew 5: The Imagined Community of the Ancestors, Power and History in and Ritual in (Ed. Middleton)Madagascar       3
Lambert      Helen                                                  Cultures Forms of Relatedness
                          Ch 4: Sentiment and Substance in North Indian of Relatedness (Ed. Carsten)                     2000              3
Lan          David        Ch 7: The Coming of the Guerrillas                                                             1985              2
                                                                    Guns and Rain: Guerillas and Spirit Mediums in the Zimbabwe War of Independence
Lan          (continued) Ch 8: The Legitimacy of Resistance                                                              1985              1
                                                                    Guns and Rain: Guerillas and Spirit Mediums in the Zimbabwe War of Independence
Lan          (continued) Ch 9: From Chiefs to Guerrillas                                                                 1985              1
                                                                    Guns and Rain: Guerillas and Spirit Mediums in the Zimbabwe War of Independence
Lan        (continued)   Ch 10: The Politics of Tradition                                                                  1985             1
                                                                Guns and Rain: Guerillas and Spirit Mediums in the Zimbabwe War of Independence
Lan        (continued)   Ch 11: The Ancestors and the Party                                                                1985             1
                                                                Guns and Rain: Guerillas and Spirit Mediums in the Zimbabwe War of Independence
Lan        (continued)   Ch 12: The Ancestors and the State                                                                1985             1
                                                                Guns and Rain: Guerillas and Spirit Mediums in the Zimbabwe War of Independence
Lanclos    Donna M.                                             At Play in Belfast - Children's Folklore and Identities in 2003
                         Ch 2: Rudeness and Defining the Line Between Child and Adult                                      Northern Ireland 3
Laqueur    Thomas        Ch 3: New Science, One Flesh           Making Sex - Body and Gender from the Greeks to Freud      1990             1
Laqueur    (continued)   Ch 4: Representing Sex                 Making Sex - Body and Gender from the Greeks to Freud      1990             1
Larkin     Brian                                                The Anthropology of Globalisation (Ed. Inda & Rosaldo) 002
                         Ch 15: Indian Films and Nigerian Lovers: Media and the Creation of Parallel Modernities           2                1
Larkin     Brian                                                Media Northern Nigeria
                         Ch 16: The Materiality of Cinema Theatres in Worlds (Eds. Ginsburg, Abu-Lughod, Larkin)           2002             3
Larson     Brooke                                               Ethnicity, Markets, and Migration in Contours of a Crossroads of History and Anthropolo
                         Ch 1: Andean Communitties, Political Cultures, and Markets: The Changingthe Andes: the Field      1995             2
*Laslett   Peter                                                Family Life and Illicit time
                         Ch 1: Characteristics of the Western Family Considered overLove in Earlier Generations            1977             1
Latour     Bruno                                                Technological choices: Transformation in material cultures since the neolithic (Ed. Lemm
                         Ch 12: Ethnography of a "high-tech" case- About Aramis                                            1992             1
Latour     Bruno         Ch 1: Crisis                           We Have Never Been Modern                                  1993             2
Latour     Bruno         Ch 2: Constitution                     We Have Never Been Modern                                  1993             3
Latour     Bruno         Ch 4: Relativism                       We Have Never Been Modern                                  1993             2
Lauren     Paul Gordon                                          The Evolution of Birth of Human Rights
                         Ch 1: My Brother's and Sister's Keeper: Visions and the International Human Rights                1998             2
Lauren     (continued)   Ch 7: Proclaiming a Vision             The Evolution of International Human Rights                1998             3
Lauren     (continued)                                          The Evolution of International Human Rights
                         Ch 8: Transforming Visions into Reality: Fifty Years of the Universal Declaration                 1998             2
Lawrence   Peter                                                 the Garia
                         Cargo Cult and religious Beliefs among International Archives of Ethnography, 47                  1954             3
Lawrence   Peter         The Mandang Distric Cargo Cult         South Pacific, 8(1)                                        1955           10
*Layton    Robert                                               The Anthorpology of Landscape (Eds. Hirsch & O'Hamlon)
                         Ch 9: Relating to the Country in ther Western Desert                                              1995             1
Lea        Vanessa                                              (Kayapo) House (Eds. Carsten & Hugh-Jones)                 1995
                         Ch 10: The Houses of the Mebengokre About the of Central Brazil - A New Door to Their Social Organization          2
Leach      Edmund        Ch 1: Introduction                     The Political Systems of Highland Burma                    1954             2
Leach      (continued)                                          The Society
                         Ch 2: The Ecological Background of Kachin Political Systems of Highland Burma                     1954             2
Leach      (continued)   Ch 7: Gumsa and Shan                   The Political Systems of Highland Burma                    1954             2
Leach      Edmund        Ch 10: Conclusion                      The Political Systems of Highland Burma                    1954             2
Leach      Edmund        Virgin Birth                           JRAI Henry Myers Lecture                                   1966             2
Leach      Edmund        Ch 1: Rethinking Anthropology          Rethinking Anthropology                                    1966             3
Leach      Edmund                                               Rethinking Anthropology
                         Ch 3: The Structural Implications of Matrilateral Cross-Cousing Marriage                          1966             3
Leach      Edmund                                               Rethinking Anthropology
                         Ch 6: Two Essays Concerning the Symbolic Representation o fTime                                   1966             3
Leach      Edmund                                               Cambridge Anthropology, vol. 13(3)
                         Masquerade: The Presentation of the Self in Holi-Day Life                               1989-1990                  3
Leach      Edmund        Miscellanous:                                                                                                      2
Leach      (continued)                                          New Directions in and Verbal Abuse
                         Anthropological Aspects of Language: Animal Categories the Study of Language (Ed. Lenneberg)      1964             1
Leach      (continued)                                          The Character of Kinship (Ed. Goody)
                         Complementary Filiation and Bilateral Kinship                                                     1973             1
Leach      Melissa       Ch 5: Women's Crops in Women's Spaces                                                             1992
                                                                Bush, Base, Forest, Farm: Culture, Environment and Development (Eds.1Croll & Parkin)
Leacock        Eleanor BurkeIntroduction                                                                                     (Engels)
                                                                     The Origin of the Family, Privat Property and the State1972            3
Lee            Richard B.                                             Input-Output Analysis
                            Ch 3: !Kung Bushman Subsistence: AnEnvironment and Cultural Behaviour (Ed. Vayda)               1969            3
Ledeneva       Alena V.     Introduction                                                                                    2006            3
                                                                     How Russia Really Works? The informal practices that shaped Post-Soviet Politics and Bu
Ledeneva                                                             How Russia Really                                      2006            3
               (continued) Ch 1: Why are informal practices still Prevalent in Russia?Works? The informal practices that shaped Post-Soviet Politics and Bu
Ledeneva                                                             How Russia Really in Informal informal                 2006            3
               (continued) Ch 3: Kompromat: The Use of Compromising Information Works? The Politics practices that shaped Post-Soviet Politics and Bu
Lee            Weng Choy McNationalism in Singapore                                                                         2001            3
                                                                     House of Glass: Culture Modernity & the State in Southeast Asia (Ed. Yao Souchou)
Leenhardt      Maurice                                               Do Kamo: Person and
                            Ch 11: The Structure of the Person in the Melanesian World Myth in the Melanesian World 1979                    1
Lelyveld       David                                                 Orientalism and the Postcolonial Predicament (Eds.     1993            1
                            Ch 6: The Fate of Hindustani: Colonial Knowledge and the Project of a National Language Breckenridge & van der Veer)
Lemarchand     Rene         Hate Crimes                              Transition, vol. 81/82                                 2000            3
Levi-Strauss   Claude                                                and in Anthropology
                            Ch 2: Structural Analysis in Linguistics Structural Anthropology, vol. 1                        1968            3
Levi-Strauss   Claude                                                Structural
                            Ch 3: Language and the Analysis of Social Laws Anthropology, vol. 1                             1968            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 4: Linguistics and Anthropology        Structural Anthropology, vol. 1                        1968            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 5: Postscript to Chapters III and IV Structural Anthropology, vol. 1                          1968            2
Levi-Strauss   Claude       Ch 9: The Sorcerer and His Magic         Structural Anthropology, vol. 1                        1968            1
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 11: The Structural Study of Myth Structural Anthropology, vol. 1                              1968            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 15: Social Structure                   Structural Anthropology, vol. 1                        1968            3
Levi-Strauss   Claude       Ch 9: The Story of Asdiwal               Structural Anthropology, vol. 2                        1977            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 10: Four Winnebago Myths               Structural Anthropology, vol. 2                        1977            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 18: Race and History                   Structural Anthropology, vol. 2                        1977            3
Levi-Strauss   Claude       Ch 1: Nature and Culture                 The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 2: The Problem of Incest               The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   Claude       Ch 3: The Universe of Rules              The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 4: Endogamy and Exogamy                The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 5: The Principle of Reciprocity        The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            2
Levi-Strauss   Claude       Ch 6: Dual Organization                  The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 7: The Archaic Illusion                The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 8: Alliance and Descent                The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 9: The Marriage of Cousins             The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 10: Matrimonial Exchange               The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 29: The Pinciples of Kinship           The Elementary Structures of Kinship                   1969            3
Levi-Strauss   Claude       Preface                                  The Savage Mind                                        1966            2
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 1: The Science of the Concrete         The Savage Mind                                        1966            3
Levi-Strauss   Claude                                                The
                            Ch 2: The Logic of Totemic Classifications Savage Mind                                          1966            3
Levi-Strauss   (continued) Ch 8: Time Regained                       The Savage Mind                                        1966            3
Levi-Strauss Claude                                              Anthropology and Myth: Lectures 1951-1982
                          Ch 1: The Concept of the 'House', 1976-1977                                                     1987           3
Levi-Strauss (continued) Ch 2: On Indonesia                      Anthropology and Myth: Lectures 1951-1982                1987           3
Levi-Strauss Claude       Translater's note and chapter 1        Introduction to the Work of Marcel Mauss                 1987           1
Levi-Strauss (continued) Chapter 2                               Introduction to the Work of Marcel Mauss                 1987           1
Levi-Strauss (continued) Chapter 3                               Introduction to the Work of Marcel Mauss                 1987           1
Levi-Strauss Claude                                              The Way
                          Ch 13: The Social Organization of the Kwakiutl of the Masks                                     1983           3
Levi-Strauss Claude       Ch 2: One Myth Only                    The Naked Man                                            1981           3
*Levi-StraussClaude       Ch 3: The Family                       The View from Afar                                       1985           1
Levinson     Stephen C. Ch 1: On the Human 'Interaction Engine'  Roots of Human Sociality (Eds. Meskell & Pels)           2005           3
Levy         Robert I.    Ch 12: Person-Centered Anthropology Assessing Cultural Anthropology (Ed. Borofsky)              1994           3
Lewin        Ellen        Ch 4: Ties That Endure                 Lesbian Mothers: Accounts of Gender in American Culture  1993           3
Lewis        Gilbert      Ch 1: A Question of Interpretation     Day of Shining Red: An Essay on Understanding Ritual1980                2
Lewis        I.M.                                                Ecstatic Religion:                                       1989
                          Ch 5: Possession and Public Morality - I: Ancestor Cults A Study of Shamanism and Spirit Possession            2
Lewis                                                            Ecstatic Cosmological Systems                            1989
             (continued) Ch 6: Possession and Public Morality - II: OtherReligion: A Study of Shamanism and Spirit Possession            1
Lewis        R.                                                  Science,
                          New Views Emerge on Hunters and Gatherers vol. 240                                              1988           3
Li                                                               SOJOURN vol.
             Tania Murray Household Formation, Private Property, and the State11 (2)                                      1996           3
*Lienhardt   G.           Ch 4: Divinity and Experience          The Religion of the Dinka                                1986           1
Lima                      Ch 9: On Indigenism and Nationality inNation-States and Indians in Latin America (Eds. Urban & Sherzer)
             Antonio Carlos de Souza Lima                         Brazil                                                  1991           2
Lindholm     Charles                                             Embodying Middle East and South Asia                     1998           2
                          Ch 10: Prophets and Pirs: Charismatic Islam in theCharisma: Modernity, Locality and the Performance of Emotion in Sufi Cults (
*Lindholm    Charles      Love as an Experience of Transcendence Romantic Passion: A Universal Experience? (Ed. Jankowiak)1995           1
Lindstrom    Lamont       Cargo Cult Horror                      Oceania, 70                                              2000           3
Linhart      Robert       Ch 9: The Assembly Line                The Experience of Work (Ed. Littler)                     1985           2
LiPuma       Edward                                              Bodies and Persons (Eds. Lambek & Strathern)
                          Ch 3: Modernity and Forms of Personhood in Melanesia                                            1998           3
                          Ch 3: What It Means to Be Restructured: Nontraditional Commodities and Structural Adjustment in Sub-Saharan Africa
Little/Dolan Peter D./Catherine S.                                                                                        2000           3
                                                                 Commodities and Glboalisation: Anthropologcial Perspectives (Eds. Haguerud, Stone & Li
Littlewood   Jane                                                The Contemporary Societies
                          The Denial of Death and Rites of Passage inSociology of Death (Ed. Clark)                       1993           2
             Melissa
Llewelyn-Davies           Ch 9: Women, Warriors, and PatriarchsSexual Meanings (Eds. Ortner & Whitehead)                  1981           3
             Karl/A.
Llewelyn/Hoebel           Ch 1: Five Histories                   The Cheyenne Way: Conflict and Case Law in Primitive1973  Jurisprudence 3
             (continued) Ch 2: A Theory of Investigation
Llewelyn/Hoebel                                                  The Cheyenne Way: Conflict and Case Law in Primitive1973  Jurisprudence 3
             (continued) Ch 3: Primitive Law, and Modern
Llewelyn/Hoebel                                                  The Cheyenne Way: Conflict and Case Law in Primitive1973  Jurisprudence 3
             (continued) Ch 11: The Law-Jobs
Llewelyn/Hoebel                                                  The Cheyenne Way: Conflict and Case Law in Primitive1973  Jurisprudence 3
Lloyd        G.E.R                                               C                                                        2007           2
                          Ch 7: Nature versus Culture Reassessedognitive Variations- Reflections on the Unity and Diversity of the Human Mind
Loizos       Peter                                                                                                        2000
                          Ch 7: Are Refugees Social Capitalists? Social Capital: Critical Perspectives (Eds. Baron, Field & Schuller)    3
Loizos       Peter        Confessions of a Vampire AnthropologistAnthroppology Journal of European Cultures, vol. 3(2) 1994              2
Loizos       Peter                                               Choice and Change: Essays in Honour of Lucy Mair (Ed. Davis)
                          Ch 7: The Progress of Greek Nationalism in Cyprus, 1878-1970                                    1974           3
Loizos       Peter                                               Dislocating Masculinity (Eds.
                          Ch 3: A Broken Mirror - Masculine Sexuality in Greek Ethnography Cornwall & Lindisfarne) 1994                  3
Long          Norman                                               Development Sociology -
                            Ch 1: The Case for an Actor-Oriented Sociology of Development Actor Perspectives               2001            3
              N             The Intervweaving of Knowledge and Power in Development Rural People's Knowledge, Agricultural Reseach and Extension Prac
Long/Villarreal orman/Magdalena                                    Beyond Farmer First: Interfaces (part of a chapter)     1994            3
              Norman/Magdalena Product, Big Issues: Value Contestations and Cultural Identities in Cross-Border Commodity Networks 1
*Long/Villarreal            Small                                  Globalisation and Identity (Eds. Meyer & Geschiere) 1999
Loraine       Claire                                               Beyond the Visible and the Material - the on the Analysis of Gender
                                                                                                                           2001            2
                            Ch 14: The Hierarchy Bias and the Equality Bias: Epistemological Considerations Amerindianization of Society in the Work of Pet
Low           Setha M.      Introduction: Theorising the city      Theorising the city- the New Anthropology Reader        1999            3
Luck          Maura                                                Working of Dual International Perspectives on Labour1991 Gender Ideology (Eds. Redcli
                            Ch 2: Gender and Library Work: The LimitationsWomen: Labour Market Theory                       and            3
Ludden        David                                                Orientalism and the Postcolonial Predicament (Eds. Breckenridge & van der Veer)
                            Ch 8: Orientalist Empiricism: Transformations of Colonial Knowledge                            1993            3
Luhrmann      T.M.                                                                                                         1989
                            Ch 1: What Makes Magic Reasonable? Persuasions of the Witch's Craft - Ritual Magic in Contemporary England2
Luhrmann                                                           to the Field                                            1989
              (continued) Ch 2: Initiation Ritual: My Introduction Persuasions of the Witch's Craft - Ritual Magic in Contemporary England1
Luhrmann                                                           Persuasions of Magical Groups                           1989
              (continued) Ch 3: Journey to Aquarius: the Sociological Contextof the Witch's Craft - Ritual Magic in Contemporary England1
Luhrmann                                                           Persuasions of the                                      1989
              (continued) Ch 21: Interpretive Drift: The Slow Shift Towards Belief Witch's Craft - Ritual Magic in Contemporary England1
Luhrmann                                                           Persuasions of the Witch's Craft - Ritual Magic in Contemporary England1
              (continued) Ch 22: Serious Play: The Fantasty of Truth                                                       1989
Luhrmann      (continued) Ch 23: Final Thoughts                                                                            1989
                                                                   Persuasions of the Witch's Craft - Ritual Magic in Contemporary England3
Lukes         Steven        Ch 9: Suicide                          Emile Durkheim: His life and work                       1985            3
Lukes         Steven        Five Fables About Human Rights                                                                 1993
                                                                   On Human Rights - The Oxford Amnesty Lectures (Eds. Shute & Hurley)3
Lukes         Steven        Relativism in its Place                Rationality and Relativism (Eds. Hollis & Lukes)        1982            3
Lumbera       Bienvenido Popular Culture as Politics               Revaluation 1997                                        1997            3
Lumbera       (continued) The Withering Away of Captain America    Revaluation 1997                                        1997            3
Lumbera       (continued) Movies as Consumer Items                 Revaluation 1997                                        1997            3
Lumbera                                                            Revaluation 1997
              (continued) Flashback on Film and Theater as Interlocked Forms                                               1997            3
Lumbera       (continued) Problems in Philippine Film History      Revaluation 1997                                        1997            3
Lumbera       (continued) The Tagalog Film and the Logic of Irony  Revaluation 1997                                        1997            3
Lumbera       (continued) An Approach to the Filipino Film         Revaluation 1997                                        1997            3
*Lutgendorf Philip                                                 Media in Cultural Context
                            Ch 9: All in the (Raghu) Family: A Video Epic and the Transformation of Religion in South Asia 1995            1
*Lyon         Michael H.                                            of Some Recent vol. 2
                            Ethnic Minority Problems: An OverviewNew Community,Research                                    1973            1
MacCormack Carol P.                                                Nature,
                            Ch 1: Nature, Culture and Gender: A Critique Culture and Gender (Eds. MacCormack & Strathern)  1980            3
              Carol P./Alizon 5: Social and Cognitive Aspects of Female Sexuality in Jamaica Sexuality (Ed. Caplan)
MacCormack/Draper           Ch                                     The Cultural Construction of                            1987            3
MacIntyre     Alasdair                                             T
                            Ch 1: Adam Gifford's Project in Context he Rival Versions of Moral Inquiry                     1990            3
MacIntyre     Alasdair      Ch 14: The Nature of the Virtues       After Virtue                                            1984            3
*Macintyre Martha           Violent Bodies and Vicious Exchanges Social Analysis, vol. 37                                  1995            1
MacKean       L.                                                   Divine Enterprise
                            Ch 6: The Bharat Mata Temple: Satyamitranand's Candid Appraisal                                1996            3
*MacDougall D.                                                     Transcultural
                            Ch 2: Visual Anthropology and the Ways of Knowing Cinema                                       1998            1
Madan         T.N.          Secularism In Its Place                Religion in India (Ed. Madan)                           1992            3
Madan         T.N.          Miscellanous:                                                                                                  3
Madan                                                              Contributions
             (continued) Auspiciousness and Purity: Some Reconsiderations to Indian Sociology, vol. 25(2)                 1991             1
Madan        (continued) Ch 5: Living and Dying                    Non-Renunciation                                       1987             1
Madan        (continued) Ch 8: Partition of the Household          Family and Kinship                                     1966             1
Madan        T.N.                                                  Purity and Auspicisiousness in Indian Society (Eds. Carman & Marglin) 3
                          Concerning the Categories Subha and Suddha in Hindu Culture - An Exploratory Essay              1985
Mahmood      S.                                                    P                                                      2004
                          Ch 5: Agency, Gender and Embodiment olitics of Piety: The Islamic Revival and the Feminist Subject               2
Malinowski   Bronislaw    Foreword                                 Argonauts of the Western Pacific                       1922             1
Malinowski                                                          Scope of of the Western Pacific
             (continued) Introduction: The Subject, Method and ArgonautsThis Inquiry                                      1922             2
Malinowski   (continued) Ch 2: The Natives of the Trobriand IslandsArgonauts of the Western Pacific                       1922             3
Malinowski   (continued) Ch 3: The Essentials of the Kula          Argonauts of the Western Pacific                       1922             3
Malinowski   Bronislaw    Introduction                             Crime and Custom in Savage Society                     1926             3
Malinowski   (continued) Part 1: Primitive Law and Order           Crime and Custom in Savage Society                     1926             3
Malinowski   Bronislaw    The Functional Theory                    A Scientific Theory of Culture and Other Essays        1944             3
Malinowski   Bronislaw                                             The Sexual Life of Savages
                          Ch 7: Procreation and Pregnancy in Native Belief and Custom                                     1929             3
Mamdani      Mahmood                                               Citizenship                                            2002             1
                          Ch 1: Defining the Crisi of Postcolonial When Victims Become Killers: Colonialism, Nativism, and the Genocide in Rwanda
Mamdani                                                                                                                   2002             2
             (continued) Ch 7: The Civil War and the Genocide When Victims Become Killers: Colonialism, Nativism, and the Genocide in Rwanda
Mamdani                                                            When                                                   2002             1
             (continued) Conclusion: Political Reform after Genocide Victims Become Killers: Colonialism, Nativism, and the Genocide in Rwanda
Mamdani      Mahmood                                                Impasse                                               1996             2
                          Introduction: Thinking Through Africa'sCitizen and Subject: Contemporary Africa and the Legacy of Late Colonialism
Mamdani                                                            Citizen and Subject: Contemporary Africa and the Legacy of Late Colonialism
             (continued) Ch 4: Customary Law: The Theory of Decentralized Despotism                                       1996             3
*Mamdani     Mahmood      Introduction                                                                                    2000              of
                                                                   Beond Rights Talk and Culture Talk - Comparative essays on the politics1 rights and cul
*Manalansan M.J.          Introduction: Points of Departure        Global Divas: Filippino men in the Diaspora            2003             1
Mann         Michael                                               The Sources Agrarian Societies
                          Ch 16: Patterns of World-Historical Development in of Social Power                              1986             3
Mann         Michael      Ch 1: The Argument                       The Dark Side of Democracy: Explaining Ethnic Cleansing2005             3
*Manuel      Peter                                                 Contesting the Nation (Ed. Ludden)
                          Ch 5: Music, the Media, and Communal Relations in North India, past and Present                 1996             1
             George E./Michael M.J.
Marcus/Fischer            Preface                                                                                         1999             3
                                                                   Anthropology as Cultural Critique: An Experimental Moment in the Human Sciences
             (continued) Introduction to the Second Edition
Marcus/Fischer                                                                                                            1999             3
                                                                   Anthropology as Cultural Critique: An Experimental Moment in the Human Sciences
             (continued) Introduction
Marcus/Fischer                                                                                                            1999             3
                                                                   Anthropology as Cultural Critique: An Experimental Moment in the Human Sciences
             (continued) Ch 1: A Crisis of Representation in the Anthropology as Cultural Critique: An Experimental Moment in the Human Sciences
Marcus/Fischer                                                     Human Sciences                                         1999             3
             (continued) Ch 2: Ethnography and Interpretive Anthropology
Marcus/Fischer                                                                                                            1999             3
                                                                   Anthropology as Cultural Critique: An Experimental Moment in the Human Sciences
             (continued) Ch 3: Conveying Other Cultural Experience: The Perrson, Self, and Emotions Experimental Moment in the Human Sciences
Marcus/Fischer                                                     Anthropology as Cultural Critique: An                  1999             3
             (continued) A Concluding Note
Marcus/Fischer                                                                                                            1999             3
                                                                   Anthropology as Cultural Critique: An Experimental Moment in the Human Sciences
             Joyce/Kent V.Ch 16: Evolution Without Stages
Marcus/Flannery                                                                                                           1996             3
                                                                   Zapotec Civilization: How Urban Society Evolved in Mexico's Oaxaca Valley
Marsden      Magnus                                                Living Islam: Muslim Religious experience in Pakistan's2005
                          Ch 6: Scholars and Scoundrels: Rowshan's amulet-making ulama                                                     3
                                                                                                                            North-West Frontier
Martin       Diana        Chinese Ghost Marriage                   An Old State in New Settings (Eds. Baker & Feuchtwang) 1991             3
Martin       Emily        Working across the Human-Other Divide                                                           1995             2
                                                                   Reinventing Biology: Respect for life and the creation of knowledge (Eds. Birke, Hubbard
Martin        Emily                                               Death Ritual in of Life and Death                       1988
                          Gender and Ideological Differences in Representations Late Imperial and Modern China (Eds. Watson & Rawski)3
Martin        Emily                                                Bodies: Biology and                                    1989
                          The Cultural Construction of Gendered Ethnos, vol. 54(3-4) Metaphors of Production and Destruction              2
Marx          Karl        Ch 1: Commodities                                                                               1976
                                                                  Capital: A Critique of Political Economy, Book 1: Capitalist Production 3
Marx          Karl        Wage Labour and Capital                 Selected Works of Karl Marx and Frederick Engels        1968            3
Marx          Karl                                                Karl Marx - Selected Writings (Ed. McLellan)
                          Ch 25: The Eighteenth Brumaire of Louis Bonaparte                                               2000            3
Marx          Karl        Pre-Capitalist Economic Formations      Pre-Capitalist Economic Formations (Ed. Hobsbawn) 1965                  3
Marx          Karl                                                                                                        1975            3
                          Ch 5: Social Classes and Class Conflict Karl Marx: Selected Writings in Sociology and Social Philosophy (Eds. Bottomore & Rubel
Marx          Karl        Miscellanous:                                                                                                   2
Marx          (continued) Ch 2: Alienation                        Karl Marx: A Reader (Ed. Elster)                        1986            1
Marx                                                              Karl
              (continued) 5th, 6th and 7th Observation and On StrikeMarx: selected Writings (Ed. McLellan)                2002            1
Marx/Engels Karl/FrederickManifesto of the Communist Party        The Marx and Engels Reader (Ed. Tucker)                 1978            3
Masquelier    Adeline                                             Civil Society the Realization of an Alternative Moral Order in Niger
                                                                                                                          1999            3
                          Debating Muslims, Disputed Practices: Struggles for& the Political Imagination in Africa (Eds. Comaroff & Comaroff)
Massey et al. D.          Ch 1: The Issues                                                                                 and
                                                                  High Tech Fantasies: Science Parks in Society, Science1992 Space        2
                                                                   of Work?                                                and
Massey et al. (continued) Ch 4: On The Park - A Vision of Future High Tech Fantasies: Science Parks in Society, Science1992 Space         3
Massey et al. (continued) Ch 5: Science Parks and Social Structure                                                         and
                                                                  High Tech Fantasies: Science Parks in Society, Science1992 Space        2
                                                                  High                                                     and
Massey et al. (continued) Ch 6: Science Parks and Local Economies Tech Fantasies: Science Parks in Society, Science1992 Space             2
Masters       Judith C.                                           Reinventing Biology:                                    1995            2
                          Ch 10: rEvolutionary Theory- Reinventing our origin myths Respect for life and the creation of knowledge (Eds. Birke, Hubbard
Mathur        Chandana                                            Critique of Anthropology, vol. 18(3)
                          Transformation as Usual? The Meanings of a Changing Labour Process for Indiana Aluminium 1998   Workers         3
Mauss         Marcel                                              Sociology and Psychology of Self
                          A Category of the Human Mind: The Notion of Person, The NotionEssays (Transl. Brewster) 1979                    3
Mauss         (continued) Body Techniques                         Sociology and Psychology Essays (Transl. Brewster) 1979                 3
              D
Maybury-Lewis avid                                                Nation States & Indians in Latin America (Eds. Urban and Sherzer)
                          Ch 8: Becoming Indian in Lowland South America                                                  1991            3
Mayer         Adrian                                              Caste Continuity 1954-1992
                          Ch 2: Caste in an Indian Village: Change andToday (Ed. Fuller)                                  1996            3
*Mazzarella W.                                                    Shoveling Smoke:                                        2003
                          Ch 7: Indian Fun: Constructing 'The Indian Consumer' I Advertising and Globalisation in Contemporary India 1
McCallum      Cecilia                                             Pacificando o Branco: Cosmologia, Historia e Poliitca Do Contato No Norte Da Amazonia (
                          Our Own Incas: Production, Transformation and Transcendence in Cashinahua History               1992            3
McCallum      Cecilia                                             Paper presented to in XIX Meeting of Associacao Brasileira de Antropologia, Rio de Jane
                                                                                                                          1994
                          Gender, Sexuality and the Construction of Social IdentitiestheInter-Ethnic Relations in Contemporary Amazonia3
McCallum      Cecilia                                             Revised Version of Death
                          Consuming Pity: The Production of Death among the Cashinahuaand Dying, published in Mana        1996            2
McCallum      Cecilia                                             Paper presented The Cashinahua Case                     1994            2
                          The Acquisition of Gender and the Skills of Production - at Associacao Brasileira de Antropologos, Rio de Janeiro
McCallum      Cecilia                                             Violence and                                            1991
                          Ritual and the Origin of Sexuality in the Alto Xingu the Cultural Construction of Sexuality (Eds. Harvey & Gow) 1
*McCallum     Cecilia     Ch 1: Kinship and the Child                                                                     2001
                                                                  Gender and Sociality in Amazonia: How Real People Are Made              1
McCarthy      Thomas                                              Habermas and the Public
                          Ch 2: Practical Discourse: On the Relation of Morality to Politics Sphere (Ed. Calhoun, C)      1992            2
McDermott Rachel Fell                                             Encountering Internet                                   West            3
                          Ch 12: Kali's New Frontiers. A Hindu Goddess on the Kali in the margins, at the centre, in the 2003 (Eds. McDermott, Kripal)
McDowell      Nancy D.                                            Pacific Studies, vol. 11(2)
                          A Note on Cargo Cults and Cultural Constructions of Change                                      1988            3
McHoul/GraceAlec/Wendy Preface                                    A Foucault Primer: Discourse, Power and the Subject 1993                3
                                                                  A
McHoul/GraceAlec/Wendy Ch 1: Foucault's Counter-History of ideasFoucault Primer: Discourse, Power and the Subject 1993                    3
McGilvray     D.B.                                                Ethnography of Fertility and Moors
                          Ch 2: Sexual Power and Fertility in Sri Lanka: Batticaloa Tamilsand Birth (Ed. MacCormack) 1994                 2
McLean/NgcoboHugh/Linda                                             Defiant Desire (Eds. I'm Tasty)
                           Abangibhamayo Bathi Ngimnandi (Those Who Fuck Me Say Gevisser & Cameron)                        1995              3
McLuhan      Marshall      Ch 1: The Medium is the Message          The Anthropology of Media (Eds. Askew, Wilk)           2002              3
Medin        Douglas L.    Concepts and Conceptual Structure        Ameican Psychologist, vol. 44(12)                      1989              3
Meigs        Anna                                                   Beyond                                                 1990              3
                           Ch 4: Multiple Gender Ideologies and Statuses the Second Sex: New Directions in the Anthropology of Gender (Eds. Sanday & G
Meillassoux Claude                                                  French Perspectives in African Studies
                           On the mode of production of the Hunting Band                                                   1973              2
*Meillassoux Claude                                                 Economy and Society, vol. 1(1)
                           From Reproduction to Production - A Marxist Approach to Economic Anthropology                   1972              1
*Merlan      Francesca     Ch 8: Conclusion                                                                                 a North Australian Town
                                                                    Caging the Rainbow: Places, Politics, and Aborigines in1998              1
Merry        Sally Engle   Ch 4: A Neighorhood of Starngers         Urban Danger, Life in a Neighborhood of Strangers      1981              3
Merry        Sally Engle   Ch 2: Changing Rights, Changing Culture                                                         2001              3
                                                                    Culture and Rights - Anthropological Perspectives (Eds. Cowan, Dembour & Wilson)
Merry        Sally Engle                                            Human Rights, Culture and Context - Anthropological Perspectives (Ed. Wilson)
                           Ch 2: Legal Pluralism and Transnational Culture                                                 1996              3
Michelutti   Lucia                                                   North India
                           Ch 1: The rise of popular Democracy inThe Vernacularisation of Democracy                        2007              3
Michelutti   (continued)                                            The Vernacularisation
                           Ch 6: From the Mouth of Krishna: A socialist Martial Rhetoric of Democracy                      2007              2
Michelutti   (continued)                                            folk Vernacularisation of Democracy
                           Ch 7: 'We are a caste of politicians': A The understanding of Democracy                         2007              3
Middleton    John          Ch 5: Lugbara Death                      Death and the Regeneration of Life (Eds. Bloch & Parry)1982              3
Middleton    Karen         Ch 6: How Karembola Men Become Mothers   Cultures of Relatedness (Ed. Carsten)                  2000              3
Miller       Daniel        Introduction                             Material Culture and Mass Consumption                  1987              3
Miller       Daniel                                                 Beyond                                                 2001              2
                           Ch 7: The Fame of Trinis: Websites as Traps Aesthetics: Art and the Technologies of Enchantment (Eds. Pinney & Thomas)
Miller       Daniel                                                 Capitalism: An Ethnographic Approach
                           Ch 4: An Ethnography of Brands: The Trinidadian Sweet Drink Industry                            1997              3
Miller       Daniel                                                 Worlds Apart: Modernity                                1995
                           Ch 1: Introduction: Anthropology, Modernity and Consumption Through the Prism of the Local (Ed. Miller)           1
Mills        Mary Beth     Ch 6: Bangkok Wage Workers               Thai Women in the Global Labour Force                  1999              3
Mills        (continued)                                            Thai Women
                           Ch 7: Consumption, Desire, and Thansamay Selves in the Global Labour Force                      1999              3
Mills        (continued)                                             Global Encounters
                           Ch 9: Gender and Modernity, Local andThai Women in the Global Labour Force                      1999              3
Mines        M.                                                     Public Faces, Private - George Town Today
                           Ch 3: Institutions and Big-Men of a Madras City Community Voices                                2006              1
Mines        (continued)                                            Public Faces, Private
                           Ch 6: The Decline of Community and the Roles of Big-Men Voices                                  2006              1
Mintz        Sydney        Ch 3: Consumption                                                                               1986
                                                                    Sweetness and Power - The Place of Sugar in Modern History               2
Mir-Hosseini Ziba          Miscellanous:                                                                                                     2
Mir-Hosseini (continued)                                            Women and Politics in the and World (Ed. Afshar)
                           Ch 9: Women and Politics in Post-Khomeini Iran: Divorce, Veiling ThirdEmerging Feminist Voices  1996              1
Mir-Hosseini (continued)                                            Marriage on Trial - A                                   and
                           Ch 4: Social Anatomy of Divorce: the Law and the Practice Study of Islamic Family Law, Iran1993 Morocco Compared  1
Mitchell     Clyde         Miscellanous:                                                                                                     2
Mitchell     (continued)   The Kalela Dance                                                                                1956              1
                                                                    The Kalela Dance - Aspects of Social Relationships Among Urban Africans in Northern Rh
Mitchell     (continued)                                            The Social
                           Theoretical Orientations in African Urban Studies Anthropology of Complex Societies (Ed. Benton)1966              1
Mitchell     Jon                                                    Powers of in the Material
                           Ch 6: Good, Evil and Godhood: Morman Morality Good and Evil World                               2001              2
Mitchell     Timothy       Ch 1: Egypt at the Exhibition            Colonising Egypt                                       1988              3
Mitchell     (continued)   Ch 2: Enframing                          Colonising Egypt                                       1988              3
Mithen      Steven                                                 The Prehistory of the Mind
                         Ch 6: The Mind of the First Stone Toolmaker                                                       1996             3
Mithen                                                             The Prehistory of
            (continued) Ch 7: The Multiple Intelligences of the Early Human Mindthe Mind                                   1996             3
Mithen                                                              The Origins of Art and Religion
            (continued) Ch 9: The Big Bang of Human Culture: The Prehistory of the Mind                                    1996             3
Modell      J.           Ch 1: American Adoption                                                                           Kinship in American Cultures
                                                                   Kinship with Strangers, Adoption and Interpretation of 1994              3
Modell      (continued) Ch 7: Just My Truth                                                                                Kinship in American Cultures
                                                                   Kinship with Strangers, Adoption and Interpretation of 1994              3
Modell      (continued) Ch 8: Lost to Adoption                                                                             Kinship in American Cultures
                                                                   Kinship with Strangers, Adoption and Interpretation of 1994              3
Modell      (continued) Ch 9: A Child of One's Own                                                                         Kinship in American Cultures
                                                                   Kinship with Strangers, Adoption and Interpretation of 1994              3
Modell      (continued) Ch 10: A New Kind of Kinship                                                                       Kinship in American Cultures
                                                                   Kinship with Strangers, Adoption and Interpretation of 1994              2
*Modell     Judith                                                 Reproducing Reproduction Kinship,                       2000             1
                         Ch 7: Rights to the Children: Foster Care and Social Reproduction: in HawaiiPower, and Technological Innovation (Eds. Franklin &
Molesky-Poz J                                                      Spirituality: lost
                         Ch 7: The Ancient Things from our parents are not The Ancient ways are not lost                   2006             2
*Moodie     Dunbar                                                 Town and Countryside in the
                         Mine Culture and Miners' Identity on the South African Gold Mines Transval (Ed. Bozzoli)          1983             1
Moore       Barrington   Marxist Ideology and Soviet Reality                                                               1961
                                                                   Soviet Society: A book of readings (Eds. Inkeles, Geiger)                3
Moore       Henrietta                                              Gendered Between
                         Ch 7: The Differences Within and the Differences Anthropoloogy (Ed. Del Valle)                    1993             3
Moore       Henrietta                                              Understanding Economic Processes (Eds. Ortiz & Lees)1992
                         Ch 7: Households and Gender Relations: The Modelling of the Economy                                                3
Moore                                                              Feminism of Women
            (continued) Ch 2: Gender and Status: Explaining the Position and Anthropology                                  1988             2
Moore                                                              Feminism and Women's Work
            (continued) Ch 3: Kinship, Labour and Household: Understanding Anthropology                                    1988             1
Moore       Henrietta                                              Anthropological Theory Today (Ed. Moore)
                         Ch 1: Anthropological Theory at the Turn of the Century                                           1999             3
Moore                                                              Anthropological Theory Today (Ed. Moore)
            (continued) Ch 6: Whatever Happened to Women and Men? Gender and Other Crises in Anthropoology 1999                             3
Moore       Henrietta    Miscellanous:
Moore                                                              Anthropology and Psychoanalysis (Eds.
            (continued) Ch 8: Gendered Persons: Dialogue Between Anthropology and Psychoanalysis Deluze & Heald)           1994             1
Moore                                                               of a Brilliant Career?
            (continued) Ch 1: The Future of Gender or the End Feminist Anthropology: Past, Present and Future (Eds. 2006   Geller/Stockett) 1
            Henrietta/Megan 1: The Colonial Construction of Knowledge: Down Trees Anthropology
Moore/Vaughan            Ch                                        Cutting History and                                     1993             3
            (continued) Ch 2: The Colonial Construction of Knowledge: Down Trees Agriculture
Moore/Vaughan                                                      Cutting Ecology and                                     1993             3
            (continued) Ch 5: Developing Men: The Creation ofCutting Down Trees
Moore/Vaughan                                                       the Progressive Farmer                                 1993             3
Moore       Sally Falk   Ch 6: Law and Anthropology                Biennial Review of Anthropology (Ed. Siegel)            1969             2
Moore       Sally Falk   Introduction                              Law as a Process                                        1983             3
Moore                                                              Law an Process
            (continued) Ch 2: The Semi-autonomous Social Field asas aAppropriate Field of Study                            1983             3
*Moore      Sally Falk   The Later Colonial Period to 1960                                                                 1994
                                                                   Anthropology and Africa: Changing Perspectives on a Changing Scene 1
Moris       Jon                                                    Development Policy
                         Irrigation as a Privileged Solution in African Development Review, Vol. 5                         1987             2
*Morphy     Howard                                                  of the Ancestral Past                                  1997
                         Ch 8: Landscape and the Reproduction Politics, Gender and Time in Melanesia and Aboriginal Australia               1
Morris      Brian        Ch 1: Religion as Ideology                Anthropological Studies of Religion                     1987             3
Morris      Brian        Ch 3: The Anthropological Tradition       Anthropological Studies of Religion                     1987             3
Morris      Brian        Miscellanous:                                                                                                      2
Morris                                                             International Review of Ethnology and Linguistics, vol. 1977
            (continued) Tappers, Trappers and the Hill Pandaram (South India)                                              72               1
Morris                                                          Goldsmiths University of London Inaugural Lecture
            (continued) Being Human Does Not Make You a Person: Animals, Humans and Personhood in Malawi series        1999               1
Mosse       David                                               The Rule of Water Statecraft, Ecology, and Collective2003 in South India
                         Ch 9: From State Bureaucracy to People's Participation: A-New Moral Economy of Water           Action            3
Mosse       David                                               Discourses of Development Irrigation Development in 1997
                                                                                                                       Colonial and Contemporary Tamil
                         Ch 11: The Ideology and Politics of Community Participation: Tank - Anthropological Perspectives (Eds. Grillo & 3Stirrat)
Mosse       David                                               Contribution to Indian Sociology 28(1)                 1994
                         Idioms of Subordination and styles of protest among Christian and Hindu Harijan Castes in Tamil Nadu             3
                                                                Development Brokers and Translators:                   2006               1
Mosse/Lewis David/David Ch 1: Theoretical Approaches to Brokerage and Translation in Development The Ethnography of Aid and Agencies (Eds. Mosse
Morton      Helen                                               Becoming Tongan
                         Ch 5: Children's Everyday Lives: Socialization in Context - An Ethnography of Childhood       1996               3
Mottahedeh Roy P.                                               Contention, vol. 4(3)
                         The Islamic Movement: The Case for Democratic Inclusion                                       1995               1
Mueggler    Erik         Ch 6: A Spectral State                                                                        2001
                                                                The Age of Wild Ghosts: Memory, Violence, and Place in Southwest China    1
Mueggler    (continued) Ch 9: a Shattered Ground                                                                       2001
                                                                The Age of Wild Ghosts: Memory, Violence, and Place in Southwest China    3
Mundy       Martha       Introduction                           Law and Anthropology (Ed. Mundy)                       2002               9
Mundy       Martha       Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
Mundy       (continued) Ch 1: Introduction                      Domestic Government: Kinship, Community and Polity1995  in North Yemen 1
Mundy                                                            Islamic hanafite jurisprudence over the nature of the making 'fief', from the Mamluks P
                                                                                                                       2204               1
            (continued) Ch 5: Ownership or office? A debate in Law, anthropology and the constitution of the social - military persons and things (Eds.to
                         Introduction
Mundy/Smith Martha/Richard                                      Governing Property, Making the Modern State            2007               1
                                                                Governing Property, Making the Modern State
Mundy/Smith (continued) Ch 10: Registration and Political Economy in Two Hill Villages                                 2007               3
                         Ch                                       Family in History Facing Palestine, 1880-1940        2003               3
Mundy/Smith Martha/Richard 6: "Al- Mahr Zaituna": Property andFamily andthe Hills in the Middle East- Household, Property and Gender (Ed. Doumani)
*Muratorio  Blanca                                              The Journal of Peasant Studes, vol. 8(1)
                         Prostantism and Capitalism Revisited, in the Rural Highlands of Ecuador                       1980               1
Murra       John V.                                             Ethnicity, Markets, and Migration in                   1995               2
                         Did Tribute and Markets Prevail in the Anes before the European Invasion? the Andes: the Crossroads of History and Anthropolo
Murra       John V.                                                                                                    1973               2
                         Ch 21: Rite and Crop in the Inca State Peoples and Cultures of Native South America - An Anthropological Reader (Ed. Gross)
Murray      Colin        Ch 5: Changing Family Structure                                                               1981
                                                                Families Divided: The Impact of Migrant Labour in Lesotho                 3
Murray                                                          Families Divided:
            (continued) Ch 6: Marital Strategy: An Essay In Custom and Conflict The Impact of Migrant Labour in Lesotho1981               1
Murray                                                          Boy-Wives                                              1997               2
            Stephen O. Sexual Politics in Contemporary Southern Africa and Female Husbands - Studies of African Homosexualities (Eds. Murray & Ro
Murphy/Medin             The Role                               Psychological Review, vol 92(3)
            Gregory L./Douglas L. of Theories in Conceptual Coherence                                                  1985               3
Myerhoff    Barbara                                             Number Our Days
                         Ch 7: 'Jewish Comes Up In You From The Roots'                                                 1978               2
Myers       (continued) Ch 3: Individuals and Bands             Pintupi Country, Pintupi Self                          1986               3
Myers       Fred R.                                             Pintupi Cultural Pintupi
                         Ch 4: Being a Countryman: Emotions and the Country,Subject Self                               1986               3
Myers                                                           Pintupi Country, Pintupi Self
            (continued) Ch 5: The Cultural Basis of Landownership and Its Social Implications                          1986               3
Myers       (continued) Ch 6: Relatedness and Differentiation Pintupi Country, Pintupi Self                            1986               3
Nader       Laura                                               Harmony Ideology
                         Ch 14: Harmony in Comparative Perspective                                                     1990               3
Nader       Laura        Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
                                                                 Anthropological Perspective
Nader/Nader (continued) Ch 5: A Wide Angle on Regulation - An Regulatory Policy and the Social Sciences                1985               1
Nader       (continued) Introduction                                                                                   1965               1
                                                                The Ethnography of Law (Ed. Nader) in American Anthropologist, Special Publication, vol
Najmabadi   Afsaneh                                             Women, Islam and the State (Ed. Kandiyoti)
                         Ch 3: Hazards of Modernity and Morality: Women, State and Ideology in Contemporary Iran 1991                     3
Nanda       Serena                                              Third Role in India                                    1994               3
                         Ch 8: Hijras: An Alternative Sex and Gender Sex, Third Gender: Beyond Sexual Dimorphism in Culture and History (Ed. Herdt)
Nandy         Ashis                                                  Mirrors of Violence: Communities,                      in South Asia (Ed. Das)
                            Ch 3: The Politics of Secularism and the Recovery of Religious Tolerance Riots and Survivors 1990                3
*Nandy        Ashis                                                  Sati: The Blessing Debate on Roop Kanwar's Death 1994
                            Ch 5: Sati as Profit Versus Sati as a Spectacle: The Publicand the Curse (Ed. Hawley)                            1
Nash/Ogan Jill/Eugene                                                Perceptions of vol. 13(2)
                            The Red and the Black: Bougainvillean Pacific Studies,Other Paua New Guineans                   1990             3
*Nash         June                                                   Social              against Globalization
                            Ch 9: Defying Deterritorialization: Autonomy Movements - An Anthropological Reader (Ed. Nash)   2005             1
*Navaro-YashinYael          Ch 4: Legal/Illegal Counterpoints                                                               2003             1
                                                                     Human Rights, Culture and Context - Anthropological Perspectives (Ed. Wilson)
Nazpary       Joma          Intro                                                                                           2002
                                                                     Post-Soviet Chaos: Violence and Oppression in Kazakhstan                3
Nazpary       Joma          Ch 3: Bardak: Elements of Chaos                                                                 2002
                                                                     Post-Soviet Chaos: Violence and Oppression in Kazakhstan                3
Ncube         Welshman                                               The Historical Guardians of Civilisation, and Human Rights in Zimbabwe (Eds. of Repres
                                                                                                                            and              3
                            Ch 6: The Courts of Law in Rhodesia and Zimbabwe: Dimensions of DemocracyHuman Rights 2001Justice or PurveyorsBhebe & R
Nelken        David                                                  Social and Legal Studies, vol. 4
                            Disclosing/Invoking Legal Culture: An Introduction                                              1995             2
Nelson        D.M.                                                   A Finger in Discourses
                            Ch 6: Bodies That Splatter: Gender, Race, and thethe Wound of Mestizaje                         1999             3
Nelson        Nici                                                    of Cultural and Sex for Sale in Mathare Valley Kenya
                            Ch 8: Selling her Kiosk: Kikuyu notionsTheSexualityConsstruction of Sexuality (Ed. Caplan) 1987                  3
Neocleous     Mark          Ch 3: Foucault and End of Politics                                                               Power
                                                                     Administering Civil Society: Towards a Theory of State1996              2
Ness          S.A.          Ch 3: Views from the Swimming Pool Body, Movement and Culture                                   1992             2
Neve          Geert De                                               The Everyday Politics of Labour. Working Lives in India's informal economy
                            Ch 2: The Industries. Class, caste and mobility                                                 2005             3
Neve          Geert De                                               The Worlds of the Interplay of Labour and Parry, Breman & Kapadia) 3
                                                                                                                            1999
                            Ch 13: Asking For and Giving Baki: Neo-Bondage, or Indian IndustrialBondage(Eds. Resistance in the Tamilnadu Power-Loom Ind
*Nguyen       Vinh-Kim                                               Global Therapeutic Technology, Governmentality, Ethics (Eds. Ong & Collier)
                            Ch 8: Antiretroviral Globalism, Biopolitics, andAssemblages:Citizenship                         2005             1
*Nigam        Aditya        Dislocating Delhi - A City in the 1990s Sarai Readere 2001: The Public Domain                   2001             1
                                                                     Sri Lanka: History and the Roots of Conflict (Ed. Spencer)
Nissan/StirratElizabeth/R.L.Ch 2: The Generation of Communal Identites                                                      1990             3
Norton                      The                                      New Media in the state
              Augustus Richard New Media, civic pluralism, and the slowly retreatingMuslim World.                           2003             3
Noszlopy      Laura                                                   Transformation                                        2004             3
                            Ch 10: Ogoh-Ogoh: A New Tradition in Performing Objects: Museums, Material Culture and Performance in Southeast Asia (Ed.
*NuAP                                                                NuAP Working Papers 1
                            An Anthropology of Politics: Rituals, Representations and Violence                              1998             1
Nugent        David         Before History and Prior to Politics     States of Imagination (Eds. Hansen & Stepputat)        2001             3
Nugent        David                                                  of Tradition
                            The Morality of Modernity and Travails Critique of Anthropology, vol. 18(1)                     1998             3
Nussbaum      Martha C.     A Plea For Difficulty                                                                           1999
                                                                     Is Multiculturalism Bad for Women? (Eds. Cohen, Howard & Nussbaum) 2
Obeyesekere Gananath                                                 Fundamentalism Comprehended
                            Buddhism, Nationhood, and Cultural Identity: A Question of Fundamentals                         1995             3
Obeyesekere Gananath                                                 Collective Identities Nationalisms change              1979
                            Ch 7: The Vicissitudes of the Sinhala-Buddhist Identity through time andand protest in Sri Lanka (Ed. Roberts) 3
Obeyesekere Gananath                                                 The Apotheosis of Captain Cook
                            Ch 1: Captain Cook and the European Imagination                                                 1992             3
*O'Brien      Kevin J.                                               State and Society in 21st Contention in (Eds.          2004
                            Ch 5: Neither Transgressive Nor Contained: Coundary-Spanning Century China China Hays, Gries & Rosen)            1
              Elinor/Bambi B. 11: Language Acquisition and Socialization:Theory Developmental Stories and Their Implications
Ochs/Schieffelin            Ch                                       Culture Three (Eds. Shweder & Levine)                  1984             3
Okin          Susan Moller Part 1: Is Multiculturalism Bad for Women?                                                       1999
                                                                     Is Multiculturalism Bad for Women? (Eds. Cohen, Howard & Nussbaum) 2
                                                                      Responses
*Oldenburg Veena Talwar Ch 4: The Roop Kanwar Case: FeministSati: The Blessing and the Curse (Ed. Hawley)                   1994             1
*Olds/Thrift Kris/Nigel                                              Global Assemblages: Technology, Governmentality, Ethics (Eds. Ong & Collier)
                            Ch 15: Cultures on the Brink: Reengineering th eSould of Capitalism - ON a global scale         2005             1
Olender       Maurice       Ch 1: Archives of Paradise               The Languages of Paradise                              1992             3
Olivier       Gerrit                                                 Defiant Desire (Eds. Gevisser & Cameron)
                            From Ada to Zelda: Noteson Gays and Language in South Africa                                    1995             3
Ong           Aihwa         Ch 4: Citizenship                                                                                2004
                                                                     A Companion to the Anthropology of Politics (Eds. Nugent & Vincent)       3
Ong           Aihwa                                                  Spirits of Resistance and Capitalist Discipline
                            Ch 1: Spirits and Discipline in Capitalist Transformation                                        1987              3
Ong           (continued)                                            Spirits of Resistance and Capitalist Discipline
                            Ch 8: Neophyte Factory Women and the Negative Image                                              1987              3
Ong           (continued)   Ch 9: Spirits of Resistance              Spirits of Resistance and Capitalist Discipline         1987              3
Ong           Aihwa                                                  Power sexual methaphors in in Southeast
                            Japanese Factories, Malay Workers: Class andand Difference: GenderWest MalaysiaAsia (Eds. 1990                     3
                                                                                                                             Atkinson & Errington)
Ong           Aihwa                                                  Bewitching Women, and Men: Gender and Malaysia 1995                       3
                            Ch 5: State Versus Islam: Malay Families, Women's Bodies,Pious the Body Politic in Body Politics in Southeast Asia (Eds. Ong & P
Ong           Aihwa                                                  Flexiable Citizenship: The                              1999
                            Ch 4: The Pacific Shuttle: Family, Citizenship and capital circuits Cultural Logics of Transnationality            3
Ortiz         Sutti                                                  A Handbook of Economic
                            Ch 4: Decisions and Choices: The Rationality of Economic ActorsAnthropology (Ed. Carrier) 2005                     3
Ortner        Sherry B.                                              Sexual Meanings - The Cultural Construction of Gender and Seuality (Eds.
                                                                                                                             1981              3
                            Ch 10: Gender and Sexuality in Hierarchical Societies: The Case of Polynesia and Some Comparative ImplicationsOrtner & Whit
Ortner        Sherry B.                                              Women, Culture and Society (Eds. Rosaldo & Lamphere)
                            Is Female to Male as Nature is to Culture?                                                       1974              3
Ortner        Sherry B.                                              Making Gender - The Politics and Erotics of Culture
                            Ch 7: So, Is Female to Male as Nature is to Culture                                              1996              3
Ortner        Sherry B.     Ch 1: Making Gender                      Making Gender - The Politics and Erotics of Culture     1996              1
Ortner        (continued)   Ch 8: Borderland Politics and Erotics Making Gender - The Politics and Erotics of Culture        1996              1
Ortner        Sherry B.                                              Culture the Foundings Anthropological Approaches (Ed. Ohnuk-Tierney)3
                            Ch 3: Patterns of History: Cultural Schemas in Through Time: of Sherpa Religious Institusions 1990
Ortner        Sherry B.     Ch 1: Introduction                       Sherpas through their Rituals                           1978              2
Ortner        (continued)                                            Sherpas through Social Cooperation
                            Ch 6: Offering Rituals: Problems of Religion, Anger, and their Rituals                           1978              2
*Ortner       Sherry B.                                              Naturalising of '58 (Eds. Yanagisako & Delaney)
                            Ch 10: Ethnography Among the Newark: The Class Power of Weequahic High School                    1995              1
*Osella/OsellaF./C.         Ch 1: Introduction                                                                               2000
                                                                     Social Mobility in Kerala: Modernity and Identity in Conflict             1
Overing/PassesJoanna/Alan                                            The Anthropology of Anthropology                        2000              2
                            Introduction: Conviviality and the Opening Up of AmazonianLove and Anger: The Aesthetics of Conviviality in Native Amazonia (
Overing       Joanna                                                 Monsters, Tricksters and Sacred Cows (Ed. Arnold)       1995
                            Who is the mightiest of them all? Jaguar and Conquistador in Pairoa Images of Alterity and Identity                2
Overing       Joanna                                                 Reason and Morality (ed. Overing)
                            Ch 8: Today I shall Call Him Mummy: Multiple Words and Classificatory Confusion                  1985              3
Overing       Joanna                                                 ASA Conference, Socialism
                            The anarchy and collectivism of the "primitive other": Marx and Sahlins in the Amazon            1991              2
Overing       Joanna                                                 L'Homme
                            Death and the Loss of Civilized Predation among Piaror of the Orinoco Basin                      1992              2
Overing       Joanna                                                 Anthropologica, no. 59-62                       1983-1984                 2
                            Elementary Structures of Reciprocity: A comparative note on Guianese, Central Brazilian, and North-West Amazon Socio-politica
Overing       Joanna                                                   the Analysis of Gender
                            Men Control Women? The 'Catch 22' InInternational Journal of Moral and Social Studies, vol. 1(2) 1986              3
Overing       Joanna                                                 Contesting Markets
                            Wandering in the Market and the Forest: An Amazonian Theory of Production and Exchange 1992                        2
Overing       Joanna                                                 Work-rewrite
                            The Productive side of Power: Work, Fertility, and the Life of Thoughts                          1993              2
Overing       Joanna                                                 Power of the Name                                       1983              2
                            Translation as a Creative Process: The SSRC Symposium, Uni of St. Andrews: Comparative Method in Social Anthropology: Com
Oxfeld        Ellen                                                  Blood, Entrepreneurial Ethic
                            Ch 4: Profit, Loss and Fate: Gambling and theSweat & Mahjong                                     1993              1
Oxfeld        (continued)                                            Blood Sweat and Mahjong
                            Ch 5: No Instant Success: The First Generation                                                   1993              3
Oxfeld        (continued)                                            Blood, Sweat & Mahjong
                            Ch 7: Branches of a Tree: Family and Firm in the Second and Third Generations                    1993              2
Oxfeld        Ellen                                                  Blood
                            Epilogue: Immigrants and Visitors in Toronto Sweat and Mahjong                                   1993              3
Pai           Sudha                                                  Dalit Assertion and Meerut District
                            New forms of Dalit assertion at the Grassroots: the BSP in the Unfinished Democratic revolution  2002              3
Pandian       Anand                                                  Tamil Cinema: remaking of rural life                    2006              3
                            Cinema in the countryside, Popular Tamil film and the cultural politics of India's other film industry (Ed. Velayutham)
Parekh     Bhikhu        A Varied Moral World                                                                               1999
                                                                  Is Multiculturalism Bad for Women? (Eds. Cohen, Howard & Nussbaum) 2
*Parkin    Robert        Ch 1: Introductory and Ch 2: Descent Kinship - An Introduction to Basic Concepts                   1997          1
Parrenas   Rhacel        The care and crisis in the Phillipines: Children and Transnational Families in the New             2002          2
Parry      Jonathan      Ch 9: Industrial Work                    A Handbook of Economic Anthropology (Ed. Carrier) 2005                  3
Parry      Jonathan                                                 Room': Long-Distance Labour Migrants to a Central Indian Steel Town. 3
                         Nehru's Dream and the Village 'WaitingContributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 37(1-2)              2003
Parry      Jonathan                                               Death Ascetic
                         Ch 3: Sacrificial Death and the Necrophagous and the Regeneration of Life (Eds. Bloch & Parry)     1982          3
Parry      Jonathan      Ch 1: Through Divine Eyes                Death in Banaras                                          1994          1
Parry      (continued)   Ch 2: A Profane Perspective              Death in Banaras                                          1994          1
Parry      (continued)   Ch 3: Shares and Chicanery               Death in Banaras                                          1994          3
Parry      Jonathan      Ch 5: The Last Sacrifice                 Death in Banaras                                          1994          1
Parry      (continued)   Ch 6: Ghosts into Ancestors              Death in Banaras                                          1994          3
Parry      (continued)                                            D
                         Ch 7: Spirit Possession as 'Superstition' eath in Banaras                                          1994          2
Parry      Jonathan      The Koli Dilemma                         Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 4                 1970          3
Parry      Jonathan                                               Man, vol. 21(3)
                         The Gift, The Indian Gift, and the 'Indian Gift'                                                   1986          3
Parry      Jonathan                                               Man, vol. 15(1)
                         Ghosts, Greed and Sin: The Occupational Identity o fthe Benares Funeral Priests                    1980          3
Parry      Jonathan                                                in Bhilai
                         Lords of Labour: Working and Shirking Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 33(2-1)              1999          3
Parry      Jonathan                                               Educational Regimes in Contemporary India (Eds. Chopra & Jeffery)
                         Ch 13: Changing Childhoods in Industrial Chhattisgarh                                              2005          2
Parry      Jonathan                                               Modern Asian Studies, vol. Chhattisgarh
                         Ankalu's Errant Wife: Sex, Marriage and Industry in Contemporary35(4)                              2001          2
Parry      Jonathan      Death and Cosmogony in Kashi             Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 15(1-2)           1981          3
Parry      Jonathan      The End of the Body                      Fragments For a History of the Human Body (Ed. Feher)     1989          3
Parry      Jonathan                                               Morals     Legitimacy (Ed. Eye View
                         Ch 2: The 'Crisis of Corruption' and 'The Idea of India': A Worm'sPardo)                           2000          3
Parry      Jonathan                                               Marcel Mauss: A Centenary Tribute (Eds. Wendy & Allen)
                         Ch 10: Mauss, Dumont, and the Distinction Between Status and Power                                 1998          3
Parry      Jonathan                                               Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 25(2)
                         The Hindu Lexicographer? A Note on Auspiciousness and Purity                                       1991          3
Parry      Jonathan                                               Institutions Steel Plant                                  2000          3
                         Two Cheers for Reservation: The Satnamis and theand Inequalities - Essays in Honour of Andre Beteille (Eds. Parry & Guha)
Parry      Jonathan                                               Reason and Morality (ed. Overing)
                         Ch 10: The Brahmanical Tradition and the Technology of the Intellect                               1985          3
Parry      Jonathan      Ch 3: The Economy                        Caste and Kinship in Kangra                               1979          1
Parry      (continued)   Ch 4: The Hierarchical Aspects of Caste  Caste and Kinship in Kangra                               1979          1
Parry      (continued)   Ch 6: Households and Their Partition Caste and Kinship in Kangra                                   1979          2
Parry      (continued)   Ch 9: Marriage Strategies                Caste and Kinship in Kangra                               1979          1
Parry      (continued)   Ch 10: Affines and Consanguines          Caste and Kinship in Kangra                               1979          1
Parry      Jonathan      Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
Parry      (continued)                                            Telling Lives in India - South Asian Life Histories (Eds. 2004 & Blackburn)
                         Ch 11: The Marital History of 'A Thumb-Impression Man'                                             Arnold        1
Parry      (continued)   Ch 3: On the Moral Perils of Exchange Money and the Morality of Exchange (Eds. Bloch & Parry)      1989          1
Parry      (continued)                                             Soviet-built Steel Religion (Eds. Pine &
                         Ch 13: The Sacrifices of Modernity in a ON the Margins of Town in Central India Pina-Cabral) 2008                1
Passaro       Joanne                                              Anthropological Locations (Eds. Gupta/ Ferguson)
                           "You Can't Take the Subway to the Field!": "Village" Epistemologies in the Global Village       1997         3
Patel         Vibhuti                                              Work of Women in Colonial Gujarat (1881-1931)
                           Social Construction of Paid and Unpaid History and Gender: Some Explorations (ed. Shah)         2005         1
Patnaik       Utsa                                                Agrarian Studies (Eds. Swarninathan, Madhura & Ramchandran)
                           Deflation and déjà vu: Indian Qagriculture in the World Economy                                 2002         1
Pawley        Andrew                                              Studies in Pacific Languages and Cultures in Honour of1981 Briggs (Eds. Hollyman & Pa
                           Melanesian Diversity and Polynesian Homogeneity                                                  Bruce       1
Peacock       James L.                                            Reversible Worlds - Symbolic Inversion                   1978
                           Ch 7: Symbolic Reversal and Social History: Transvestites and Clowns of Java in Art and Society (Ed. Babcock)3
                                                                  Post-Fordism: A Reader (Ed. and the
Peck/Tickell Jamie/Adam Ch 9: Searchiing for a New Institutional Fix: The After-Fordist Crisis Amin) Global-Local Disorder 1994         3
Peirce                     Ch
              Charles Sanders 2: What is a sign?                  The Essential Pierce                                     1998         2
Pelkmans      Mathijs      Miscellanous:                                                                                                7
Pelkmans      (continued) The Social Life of Empty Buildings      Focaal, vol. 41                                          2003         1
Pelkmans                                                          Focaal, vol. 46
              (continued) On Transition and Revolution in Kyrgyzstan                                                       2005         1
              (continued) Turning Marx on his Head
Pelkmans/McBrien                                                  Critique of Anthropology, vol. 28(1)                     2008         1
Pelkmans      (continued) Culture' as a tool and an obstacle      JRAI, vol. 13                                            2007         1
Pelkmans      (continued) Religion and Kultur in Zentralasien     Tatigkeitsbericht                                        2006         1
Pelkmans      (continued) Rural Credit Institutions in Kyrgystan Transition, Institutions and the Rural Sector             2003         1
Pelkmans                                                          The in Kyrgyzstan
              (continued) Ch 2: Asymmetries on the Religious MarketPostsocialist Religious Question                        2006         1
Pemberton     J.                                                  On the the Present
                           Ch 4: Origins Revisited: A Circuitous Return toSubject of Java                                  1994         2
*Peneff       Jean Muteba Ch 2: Myths in Life Stories             The Myths We Live By (Eds. Samuel & Thompson)            1990         1
*Perkins      D.N.                                                Psychology of Human Thought (Eds. Sternberg & Smith)
                           Ch 11: Creativity and the Quest for Mechanism                                                   1980         1
Perry         Michael J.                                          The Idea Religious?
                           Ch 1: Is the Idea of Human Rights Ineliminiably of Human Rights - Four Inquiries                1998         3
Pesmen        Dale                                                Russia and Soul: AN Explanation
                           Ch 6: Do Not Have a Hundred Rubles, Have Instaed a Hundred Friends                              2000         3
*Peters       Emrys L.     Ch 4: Aspects of the Feud                                                                       1990
                                                                  The Bedouin of Cyrenaica: Studies in Personal and Corporate Power     1
Peters        Emrys L.                                            Women in the Muslim World (Eds. Beck & Keddie)
                           Ch 16: The Status of Women in Four Middle East Communities                                      1978         3
Peters        Pauline                                             Negotiating Property Formation in Juul & Land            2002
                           Ch 3: The Limits of Negotiability: Security, Equity and Class in Africa (Eds.Africa's Lund)Systems           3
*Phelan       Jake                                                Goldsmiths Perceptions Research
                           Seascapes: Tides of Thought and Being in WesternAnthropologyof the Sea Papers                   2007         1
              Jean-Marc/Christine Cherisable Goods: Modes of Consumption in the Pacific Islands
*Philibert/Jourdan         Ch 3:                                  Cross Cultural Consumption (Ed. Howes)                   1996         1
Phillips      Oliver                                              Social And Legal Studies,
                           Zimbabwean Law and the Production of a White Man's Disease vol. 6(4)                            1997         3
Pina-Cabral J.             Ch 1: Introduction                     Sons of Adam, Daughters of Eve                           1986         3
Pinch         William R.   Ch 6: Soldier Monks and Militant SadhusContesting the Nation (Ed. Ludden)                       1996         2
Pinker        Steven       Ch 3: Mentalese                        The Language Instinct                                    1994         3
Pinker        (continued) Ch 5: Words, Words, Words               The Language Instinct                                    1994         3
Pinker        (continued) Ch 13: Mind Design                      The Language Instinct                                    1994         1
Pinney                                                              from Nagda, Indian Pradesh                             1999
              Christopher Ch 3: On Living in the Kal(i)yug: NotesThe Worlds of MadhyaIndustrial Labour (Eds. Parry, Breman & Kapadia) 2
Pinney                                                            Media Worlds (Eds. Ginsburg,
              Christopher Ch 18: The Indian work of art in the age of Mechanical reproduction Abu-Lughod, Larkin)          2002         3
*Pinney                                                           Camera Indica: Social Life of Indian Photographs
              Christopher Ch 1: 'Stern Fidelity' and 'Penetrating Certainty'                                               1997         1
Piot          Charles      Ch 3: Exchange                         Remotely Global: Village Modernity in West Africa     1999              3
*Pitt-Rivers Julian        The Kith and the Kin                   Character of Kinship (Ed. Goody)                      1973              1
Polanyi       Karl         Ch 8: The Economy as Instituted Process                                                      1957              3
                                                                  Trade and Market in the Early Empires: Economies in History and Theory (Eds. Polanyi, A
Polanyi       Karl         Ch 3: Habitation Versus Improvement The Great Transformation                                 1944              3
Polanyi       (continued) Ch 4: Societies and Economic SystemsThe Great Transformation                                  1944              1
Polanyi       (continued) Ch 5: Evolution of the Market Pattern The Great Transformation                                1944              1
Polanyi                                                           The Great Transformation
              (continued) Ch 6: The Self-Regulating Market and the Fictitious Commodities: Labour, Land, and Money 1944                   2
Polanyi       (continued) Ch 7: Speenhamland, 1795                The Great Transformation                              1944              2
Polanyi       Karl         Ch 5: Aristotle Discovers Economy                                                            1957              3
                                                                  Trade and Market in the Early Empires: Economies in History and Theory (Eds. Polanyi, A
Popper        Karl                                                The Logic
                           Ch 1: A Survey of Some Fundamental Problems of Scientific Discovery                          1959              2
Pospisil      Leopold      The Attributes of Law                  Law and Warfare (Ed. Bohannan)                        1967              3
*Pospisil     Leopold      Ch 2: Form of Law                      Anthropology of Law - A Comparative Theory            1974              1
Poster        Mark         Ch 11: Baudrillard and TV Ads          The Polity Reader in Cultural Theory                  1994              3
                           Ch 1: M.                               China's Peasants
Potter/Potter Sulamith Heins/JackThe Old 'Feudal' Order: Zengbu Before Liberation - The Anthropology of a Revolution 1990                 2
Potter/Potter (continued) Ch 2: Establishing the New Order        China's Peasants - The Anthropology of a Revolution 1990                2
Potter/Potter (continued) Ch 3: The Ordeal of Collectivization    China's Peasants - The Anthropology of a Revolution 1990                2
Pottier       Johan                                               Discourses of Development - Anthropological Perspectives (Eds. Grillo & 2
                           Ch 9: Towards an Ethnography of Participatory Appraisal and Research                         1997              Stirrat)
*Pouillon     Jean         Ch 1: Remarks on the Verb 'To Believe' Between Belief and Transgression (Eds. Izzard & Smith)1982              1
Povinelli     Elizabeth    Ch 2: The Vulva Thieves (Atna Nylkna): Modal Ethics and the Colonial Archive                 2002              2
Povinelli     Elizabeth                                           The Cunning of Recognition: Indigenous                the Making of Australian Multicultu
                           Ch 5: The Poetics of Ghosts: Social Reprodcution in the Archive of the Nation Alterities and 2002              2
*Prakash      Gyan         The Urban Turn                         Sarai Reader 2002: The Cities of Everyday Life        2002              1
Pratt         Jeff         Anthropology and Political Movements Journal of mediterranean Studies 13 (1)                 2003              3
Pratt         Jeff                                                Journal of mediterranean Studies 13 (1)
                           Discussion Section: Anthropology and Political Movements                                     2003              3
              Nancy/Carole Ch Master
                            H./Diem/Christine/Barbara             Reproducing Reproduction: Kinship, Power, and Technological Context of Prenatal Testin
                                                                                                                        1998              3
Press/Browner/Tran/Morton/Le2: Provisional Normalcy and 'Perfect Babies': Pregnant Women's Attitudes Toward Disability in theInnovation (Eds. Franklin &
*Pugh         Judy F.                                             Action in North Indian Sociology, vol. 17(1)
                           Into the Almanac: Time, Meaning, and Contributions toIndian Society                          1983              1
*Quigley      Declan       Is a Theory of Caste still Possible?   Sociological Review                                   1994              1
Rabinow       Paul                                                Knowledge and Society:                                1992              3
                           Severing the Ties: Fragmentation and Dignity in Late Modernity The Anthropology of Science and Technology (Eds. Hess & Layn
Rabinow       Paul                                                Essays on
                           Ch 1: Science as a Practice: Ethos, Logos, Pathos the Anthropology of Reason                 1996              3
Rabinow       Paul                                                Essays on the Anthropology of in Anthropology
                           Ch 2: Representations Are Social Facts: Modernity and Post-ModernityReason                   1996              3
Rabinow       Paul         Introduction                           The Foucault Reader (Ed. Rabinow)                     1984              2
Rabinow       Paul         Introduction                           Making PCR - A Story of Biotechnology                 1996              3
Rabinow       (continued) Ch 1: Toward Biotechnology              Making PCR - A Story of Biotechnology                 1996              3
              Paul/William M.
*Rabinow/Sullivan                                                 Interpretive Social Science
                           Introduction: The Interpretive Turn: Emergence of an Approach (Eds. Rabinow & Sullivan) 1988                   1
Rabo          Annika                                              Civil Society: Challenging Western Models (Eds. Hann & Dunn)
                           Ch 8: Gender, State and Civil Society in Jordan and Syria                                    1996              3
              A.R.
Radcliffe-Brown            Introduction                           Structure and Function in Primitive Society             1952             3
              (continued) Ch 1: The Mother's Brother in South Africa
Radcliffe-Brown                                                   Structure and Function in Primitive Society             1952             1
              A.R.
Radcliffe-Brown            Ch 3: The Study of Kinship Systems Structure and Function in Primitive Society                 1952             2
              (continued) Ch 7: Taboo
Radcliffe-Brown                                                   Structure and Function in Primitive Society             1952             1
              (continued) Ch 8: Religion and Society
Radcliffe-Brown                                                   Structure and Function in Primitive Society             1952             3
              A.R.
Radcliffe-Brown                                                   Structure and
                           Ch 9: On the Concept of Function in Social Science Function in Primitive Society               1952             3
              (continued) Ch 10: On Social Structure
Radcliffe-Brown                                                   Structure and Function in Primitive Society             1952             3
              (continued) Ch 11: Social Sanctions
Radcliffe-Brown                                                   Structure and Function in Primitive Society             1952             1
              A.R.
Radcliffe-Brown            Preface                                                                                        1940
                                                                  African Political Systems (Eds. Fortes & Evans-Pritchard)                3
Rafael        Vincente                                            Contracting Colonialism: Translation and Christian Conversion in Tagalog Society Under E
                           Ch 4: Untranslatability and the Terms of Reciprocity                                           1993             3
Rafael                                                            Contracting                                             1993             1
              (continued) Ch 3: Conversion and the demands of confession Colonialism: Translation and Christian Conversion in Tagalog Society Under E
Rafael                                                            Contracting Colonialism: Translation and Christian Conversion in Tagalog Society Under E
              (continued) Ch 2: Thomas Pinpin and the shock of Castilian                                                  1993             1
Rafael        (continued) Ch 1: The politics of translation                                                               1993             1
                                                                  Contracting Colonialism: Translation and Christian Conversion in Tagalog Society Under E
Rafael        (continued) Introduction: Fishing out the past                                                              1993             3
                                                                  Contracting Colonialism: Translation and Christian Conversion in Tagalog Society Under E
*Rafael       Vincente                                            White Love
                           Ch 6: Taglish, or the Phantom Power of the Lingua Franca                                       2000             1
Ragone        Helena       Ch 2: Of Likeness and Difference       Ideologies and Technologies of Motherhood.              2000             3
Rahier                                                            Millennia Ecuador - Critical Essays an Cultural Transformations and Social Dynamics (Ed.
              Jean Muteba Ch 11: Racist Stereotyps and the Embodiment of Blackness                                        2003             2
Raison-JourdeFrancoise                                            Ancestors, Power and History Imerina: The Case Middleton)
                                                                                                                          1999
                           Ch 10: Social Comptetition and the Control of Sacred Places in Rural in Madagascar (Ed. of Ankadivoribe         3
Rajagopal     Arvind                                              Politics                                                2001             2
                           Ch 3: The Communicating Thing and its Public After Television: Hindu Nationalism and the Reshaping of the Public in India
Rajagopal     (continued) Ch 6: Hindutva Goes Global                                                                      2001             2
                                                                  Politics After Television: Hindu Nationalism and the Reshaping of the Public in India
Rajagopal     Arvind                                              Signposts: Gender Issues in Post-Independence India (Ed. Rajan)
                           Thinking About the New Indian Middle Class                                                     1998             2
Ramaswamy Sumathi                                                 Signposts: Nationalism in Colonial an dPost-Colonial (Ed.
                                                                                                                          1999
                           Virgin Mother, Beloved Other: The Erotics of TamilGender Issues in Post-Independence IndiaIndia Rajan)          2
Ramos         Alcida                                              Rethinking Myth and                                      in the
                           Ch 10: Indian Voices: Contact Experienced And Expressed History: Indigenous Perspectives 1988 Past (Ed. Hill)   3
*Rangan       Haripriya                                           Liberation Ecologies                                    1996
                           Ch 14: From Chipko to Uttaranchal - The Environment of Protest and Development in the Indian Himalaya           1
Ranger        Terence                                             The Africa
                           Ch 6: The Invention of Tradition in Colonial Invention of Tradition (Eds. Hobsbawm & Ranger) 1983               3
Ranger        Terence                                             The Historical Dimensions of Democracy                  2001             3
                           Ch 3: Democracy and Traditional Political Structures in Zimbabwe, 1890-1999 and Human Rights in Zimbabwe (Eds. Bhebe & R
Ranger        Terence                                             The Creation of Tribalism in Southern Africa (Ed.
                           Ch 4: Missionaries. Migrants and the Manyika: The Invention of Ethnicity in Zimbabwe Vail) 1989                 3
Rankin        Katharine N. Ch 5: Caste and Gender Economics                                                               2004             2
                                                                  The Cultural Politics of Markets - Economic Liberalization and Social Change in Nepal
Rankin                                                            The Cultural Politics                                   2004             1
              (continued) Ch 6: Global-Local Articulations in an Age of Neoliberalism of Markets - Economic Liberalization and Social Change in Nepal
Rao/Pierce                 Discipline and the Other Body: Correction, Corporeality, and Colonial Rule
              Anupama/Steven                                      Interventions, vol. 3(2)                                2001             1
*Rao          M.S.R.       Traditional Urbanism and Urbanisation A Reader in Urban Sociology (Eds. Rao, Bhat & Kadekar)   1991             1
Rapley        John V.      Ch 2: State-Led Development in Practice                                                        1996
                                                                  Understanding Development - Theory and Practice in the Third World       1
Rapley        (continued) Ch 3: The Neoclassical Answer to Failure                                                        1996
                                                                  Understanding Development - Theory and Practice in the Third World       1
Rapley                                                            Understanding Development - Theory and Practice in the Third World
              (continued) Ch 6: The Political Economy of Development                                                      1996             3
Rapley      (continued)   Ch 7: Conclusion                                                                                1996
                                                                  Understanding Development - Theory and Practice in the Third World        2
Rapp        Rayna                                                 Gender at the a Frontier of Knowledge (Ed. Di Leonardo)
                          Ch 12: Moral Pioneers: Women, Men, and Fetuses on Crossroadsof Reproductive Technology 1991                       2
Rapp        Rayna                                                  of Life                                                1995              3
                          Ch 3: Heredity, or: Revisiting the FactsNaturalizing Power, Essays in Feminist Cultural Analysis (Yanagisako, Delaney eds.)
Rappaport   Joanna                                                The
                          Ch 1: Introduction: Interpreting the Past Politics of Memory                                    1992              1
Rappaport   (continued)                                           Tama y Calambas
                          Ch 3: The Birth of the Myth: Don Juan The Politics of Memory                                    1992              3
Rappaport   (continued)                                            in Textual Community
                          Ch 8: Conclusion: Narrative and ImageTheaPolitics of Memory                                     1992              3
Rappaport   Roy A.        Foreword                                Ritual and Religion in the Making of Humanity           1999              3
Rappaport   (continued)   Ch 1: Introduction                      Ritual and Religion in the Making of Humanity           1999              3
Rappaport   Roy A.        Ch 2: The Ritual Form                   Ritual and Religion in the Making of Humanity           1999              3
Rappaport   (continued)   Ch 3: Self-referential Messages         Ritual and Religion in the Making of Humanity           1999              3
*Rappaport Roy A.                                                 Ecology, Meaning and Religion
                          Ritual Regulation of Environmental Relations among a New Guinea People                          1979              1
*Rawski     Evelyn S.                                             Death Ritual in Late Imperial and Modern China (Eds. Watson & Rawski)1
                          A Historian's Approach to Chinese Death Ritual                                                  1988
            Simon/Kevin
*Reader/Laland                                                    PNAS, Brain Size
                          Social Intelligence, Innovation, and Enhanced vol.99(7) in Primates                             2002              1
Rees        Tom                                                   Race' in Britain (Ed. Husband)
                          Ch 4: Immigration Policies in the United Kingdom                                                1982              1
Reid        Anthony                                               Southeast Asian Journal of Social Science, vol. 27(1) 1999
                          A Saucer Model of Southeast Asian Identity                                                                        3
Reitz       J.G.          Preface                                 The Survival of Ethnic Groups                           1980              1
Reno        William       Introduction                            Corruption and State Politics in Sierra Leone           1995              2
Reynolds    Pamela        Ch 1: Introduction                                                                              1989
                                                                  Childhood in Crossroads - Cognition and Society in South Africa           3
Reynolds    (continued)   Ch 5: The Children and Kinship                                                                  1989
                                                                  Childhood in Crossroads - Cognition and Society in South Africa           3
Reynolds    (continued)   Ch 7: The Children and Order                                                                    1989
                                                                  Childhood in Crossroads - Cognition and Society in South Africa           3
Ridley      Matt                                                  The
                          Ch 7: Monogamy and the Nature of WomenRed Queen: Sex and the Evolution of Human Nature          1994              3
Rival       Laura                                                 Nature and Society - Anthropological Perspectives       1996
                          Ch 8: Blowpipes and Spears: The Social Significance of Huaorani Technological Choices (Eds. Descola & Palsson)    3
Rival       Laura                                                 The Social Life of Trees Anthropological Perspectives 1998
                          Ch 1: Trees, from Symbols of Life and Regeneration to Political-Artefacts                                         3
                                                                                                                          on Tree Symbolism (Ed. Rival)
Riviere     Peter         Of Women, Men and Manioc                                                                        1987
                                                                  Natives and Neighbours in South America: Anthropological Essays (Eds. 2    Skar & Salomon
Robbins     Joel                                                  Paideuma 48-189-206                                     2002              3
                          My wife can't break off part of Her Belief and Give It to Me, Apocalyptic Interrogations of Christian Individualism among the Ura
Robbins     Joel                                                  The Making Modernization of the Subject among the Urapmin
                                                                                                                          2005              3
                          Ch 2:The Humiliations of Sin: Christiamity and the of Global and Local Modernities in Melanesia:Humiliation, Transformation and
*Robbins    Joel                                                  Becoming Sinners - Chrstianity and Moral Torment in a Papua New Guinea Society
                          Ch 8: Millenialism and the Contest of Values                                                    2004              1
*Roberts    R.H.          Ch 1: Class Structure                                                                            Century
                                                                  The Class Slum: Salford Life in the First Quarter of the1971              1
Roberts     Simon         Law and Dispute processes               Humanity, Culture and Social Life (Ed. Ingold)          1994              3
Roberts     Simon                                                 Law in Context,
                          Ch 2: Re-Exploring the Pathways to Decision-Making vol. 12                                      1994              3
Robey       David         Introduction                            Structuralism: An Introduction (Ed. Robey)              1973              3
*Robins     R.H.                                                  A Short the Nineteenth Century
                          Ch 7: Comparative and Historical Linguistics in History of Linguistics                          1979              1
Rogerson    J.W.                                                  Sacrifice (Eds. Bourdillon &
                          Sacrifice in the Old Testament: Problems of Method and Approach Fortes)                         1980              1
Rogoff      Barbara                                               The Cultural Nature
                          Ch 7: Thinking with the Tools and Institutions of Culture of Human Development                  2003              3
Roitman    Janet                                                  Law and                                                 Comaroff)
                         Ch 7: The Ethics of Illegality in the Chad Basin Disorder in the Post Colony (Eds. Comaroff & 2006                 2
Roldan     Martha                                                 A Home Divided (Eds. Dwyer & Bruce)                     1988              3
                         Renegotiating the Marital Contract: Intrahousehold Patterns of Money Allocation and Women's Subordination Among Domestic O
Rofel      Lisa                                                   Culture, Power China                                    1997              3
                         Rethinking Modernity: Space and Factory Discipline in and Place: Explorations in Critical Anthropology (Eds. Gupta & Ferguson)
*Rofel     Lisa          Ch 2: The Poetics of Productivity                                                                1999
                                                                  Other Modernities: Gendered Yeanings in China after Socialism             1
Rorty      Richard                                                On Human Rights - The Oxford Amnesty Lectures (Eds. Shute & Hurley)3
                         Human Rights, Rationality, and Sentimentality                                                    1993
Rosaldo    Michelle                                               Knowledge and Passion
                         Ch 5: Headhunting: a tale of 'fathers', 'brothers' and 'sons'                                    1980              3
Rosaldo    Michelle                                               and feeling
                         Ch 5: Towards an Anthropology of self Culture theory: essays on mind, self and emotion (Ed. 1984 Shweder)          3
Rosaldo    Renato                                                  Rage
                         Introduction: Grief and a Headhunter's Culture and Truth: The Rethinking of Social Analysis 1989                   2
Rosaldo    (continued) Ch 4: Putting Culture in Motion            Culture and Truth: The Rethinking of Social Analysis 1989                 3
*Rosaldo   Renato                                                 Writing Culture (Eds. Clifford & Marcus)
                         From the Door of his Tent: The Fireldworker and the Inquisitor                                   1986              1
Roscoe     Will                                                   Third Unified Analysis of Beyond Sexual Dimorphism in Culture and History (Ed. Herdt)
                         Ch 7: How to Become a Derdache: Toward a Sex, Third Gender: Gender Diversity                     1994              2
Rose       Nikolas       Introduction                                                                                     2007              1
                                                                  The Politics of Life Itself-Biomedicine, Power and Subjectivity in the Twenty-First Century
Rose                                                              The Politics of Life Itself-Biomedicine, Power and Subjectivity in the Twenty-First Century
           (continued) Ch 1: Biopolitics in the Twenty-First Century                                                      2007              3
Rose       (continued) Ch 5:Biological Citizens                                                                           2007              3
                                                                  The Politics of Life Itself-Biomedicine, Power and Subjectivity in the Twenty-First Century
Rose       (continued) Ch 7: Neurochemical Selves                                                                         2007              3
                                                                  The Politics of Life Itself-Biomedicine, Power and Subjectivity in the Twenty-First Century
Rose/Novas Nikolas/CarlosIntroduction: Biological Citezenship                                                             2004              2
                                                                  Global Assemblages: Technology, Politics and Ethics as Anthropological Problems (Eds. C
Roseman    Marina                                                 Healing Sounds from the Malaysian Rainforest
                         Ch 1: Introduction: Jungle Paths and Spirit Songs                                                1991              2
Rosengren  Dan                                                     of the vol. 63(2)
                         Matsigenka Myth and Morality: NotionsEthnos,Social and the Asocial                               1998              3
Roth       Christopher Ufology as Anthropology                                                                            2005
                                                                  E.T. Culture: Anthropology in outerspaces (Ed. Battaglia, Debora)         2
Rowe       William L.                                             Urban Anthropology: Cross Cultural Studies of Urbanisation (Ed. Southall)
                         Caste, Kinship, and Association in Urban India                                                   1973              2
*Roy       A.            Ch 3: Domestications                     City Requiem, Calcutta                                  2003              1
           Laura
Roychowdhury             Ch 1: Kharagpur Tales                    The Jadu House: Intimate Histories of Anglo-India       2000              3
           (continued) Ch 2: Bengali Lessons
Roychowdhury                                                      The Jadu House: Intimate Histories of Anglo-India       2000              3
*Rubin     David         Ch 1: Introduction                       Autobiographical Memory (Ed. Rubin)                     1986              1
Rubin      Gayle                                                  Toward and Anthropology
                         The Traffic in Women: Notes on the "Political Economy" of Sex of Women                           1975              3
*Ruby      Jay                                                    Visual Anthropology Alongside - 7(2)                    1991
                         Speaking For, Speaking About, Speaking With, or Speaking Review, vol. An Anthropological and Documentary Dilemma   1
Rudie      Ingrid                                                 Male and Support, Developing Southeast Asia Malay Households
                         Ch 10: The Significance of 'Eating': Cooperation,Female in and Reputation in Kelantan (Ed. Karim)1995              3
*Ruel      Malcolm       Ch 7: Christians as Believers            Reader in the Anthropology of Religion (Lambeck ed.) 2002                 1
Rutherford Danilyn                                                 The Anthropology of Christianity (Ed. Cannell)
                         The Bible Meets the Idol: Writing and Conversion in Biak, Irian Jaya, Indonesia                  2006              2
Saadawi    Nawal El                                               The that No One Would Women                             1984              3
                         Part 1: The Mutilated Half: 1. The Question Hidden Face of Eve: Answer in the Arab World (Tr. And Ed. By Sherrif Hetata)
Saadawi    (continued) 6. Circumcision of Girls                                                                                             2
                                                                  The Hidden Face of Eve: Women in the Arab World (Tr. And Ed. By Sherrif Hetata)
Saglio     Marie-C.                                               Contributions CHS
                         Political Mobility Amongst the Untouchables; Caste as a Political Tool                           1997              1
Sahlins    Marshall      Introduction, part 1                                                                             1976
                                                                  The Use and Abuse of Biology: An Anthropological Critique of Sociobiology 3
Sahlins                                                           The                                                     1976
           (continued) Ch 1: Critique of the Vulgar Sociobiology Use and Abuse of Biology: An Anthropological Critique of Sociobiology      3
Sahlins      (continued)                                            The Use and Abuse                                      1976              3
                           Ch 2: Critique of the Scientific Sociobiology: Kin Selection of Biology: An Anthropological Critique of Sociobiology
Sahlins      Marshall                                               The Use and Abuse of Biology: An Anthropological Critique of Sociobiology
                           Ch 3: Ideological Transformations of 'Natural Selection'                                        1976              3
Sahlins      (continued)                                            The                                                    1976
                           Ch 4: Folk Dialectics of Nature and Culture Use and Abuse of Biology: An Anthropological Critique of Sociobiology 3
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Culture in
                           Ch 10: Individual Experience and Cultural Order Practice: Selected Essays                       2000              3
Sahlins      Marshall      Ch 11: The Return of the Event, Again Culture in Practice: Selected Essays                      2000              3
Sahlins      Marshall      Ch 1: The Original Affluent Society      Stone Age Economics                                    1972              3
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Stone Structure of Underproduction
                           Ch 2: The Domestic Mode of Production: The Age Economics                                        1972              3
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Stone Age Economics
                           Ch 3: The Domestic Mode of Production: Intensification of Production                            1972              2
Sahlins      Marshall      Ch 4: The Spirit of the Gift             Stone Age Economics                                    1972              2
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Stone
                           Ch 5: On the Sociology of Primitive ExchangeAge Economics                                       1972              3
Sahlins      Marshall      Introduction                             Islands of History                                     1985              3
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Islands of History
                           Ch 1: Supplement to the voyage of Cook; or, le calcul sauvage                                   1985              2
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Islands of History
                           Ch 2: Other Times, Other Customs: The Anthropology of History                                   1985              3
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Islands of Fijians
                           Ch 3: The Stranger-King; or, Dumezil among the History                                          1985              1
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Islands
                           Ch 4: Captain James Cook; or The Dying God of History                                           1985              3
Sahlins      Marshall      Ch 5: Structure and History              Islands of History                                     1985              3
Sahlins      Marshall      Ch 2: Evolution: Specific and General Evolution and Culture (Eds. Sahlins & Service)            1982              3
Sahlins      Marshall      Ch 1: Marxism and Two StructuralismsCulture and Practical Reason                                1981              2
Sahlins      Marshall                                               Assessing Cultural Modern World Histroy
                           Goodbye to Tristes Tropes: Ethnography in the Context ofAnthropology (Ed. Borofsky)             1994              3
Sahlins      Marshall      Miscellanous:                                                                                                     2
Sahlins      (continued)                                            Culture and Practical Reason
                           Ch 4: La Pensee Bougeoise: Western Society as Culture                                           1981              1
Sahlins      (continued)                                             Trans-Pacific Sector of 'The World System'            1993
                           Ch 13: Cosmologies of Capitalism: The A Reader in Contemporary Social Theory (Eds. Dirks, Eley & Ortner)          1
Said         Edward        Introduction                             Orientalism                                            1978              3
*Salomon     Frank         Ch 25: Weavers of Otavalo                                                                       1973              1
                                                                    Peoples and Cultures of Native South America - An Anthropological Reader (Ed. Gross)
*Salzinger   Leslie        Ch 7: Gendered Meanings in Contention    Genders in Production                                  2003              1
*Sampson     Geoffrey                                               Schools of
                           Ch 6: Noam Chomsky and Generative Grammar Linguistics                                  ???                        1
Samuel       Geoffrey                                               Kailash, vol. and 2)
                           Religion in Tibetan Society- a New Approach (Part 16(1&2)                                       1978              1
Samuel       (continued)                                            Volumn
                           Religion in Tibetan Society- a New Approach VI No. 2                                            1978              1
Sanders      P             Ch 3: The Urban as a Cultural Form       Social Theory and the Urban Question                   1986              3
Sanders      Todd                                                   Research
                           Modernity, Wealth, and Witchcraft in Tanzania in Economi Anthropology, vol. 20                  1999              2
Sanjek       Roger         A Vocabulary for Fieldnotes                                                                     1990
                                                                    Fieldnotes - the Makings of Anthropology (Ed. Sanjek)`1990               3
Sanjek       (continued)   On Ethnographic Validity                                                                        1990
                                                                    Fieldnotes - the Makings of Anthropology (Ed. Sanjek)`1990               1
Sapir        Edward        Language                                 Selected Writings of Edward Sapir (Ed. Mandelbaum) 1949                  3
Sapir        (continued)                                            Selected Writings of Edward Sapir (Ed. Mandelbaum) 1949
                           The Unconscious Patterning of Behavior in Society                                                                 1
Sapir       J. David     Ch 1: The Anatomy of Metaphor           The Social Use of Metaphor (Eds. Sapir/Crocker)         1977          2
Sassen-Knob Saskia                                               Women, Division of Labour                               1983          3
                         Ch 8: Labor Migrants and the New International Men & the International Division of Labour (Eds. Nash & Fernandez-Kelly)
Sassen-Knob Saskia                                               Frontiers of Capital: Ethnographic Reflections on the New Economy (Eds. Fisher & Downe
                         Afterword: Knowledge Practices and Subject Making at the Edge                                   2006          2
Saussure    Ferdinand de Ch 1: Nature of the Linguistic Sign     Course in General Linguistics (transl. Harris)          1983          2
Saussure                                                         Course in General Linguistics (transl. Harris)
            (continued) Ch 2: Data and Aims of Linguistics: Connexions with Related Sciences                             1983          2
Saussure    (continued) Ch 3: Identities, Realities, Values      Course in General Linguistics (transl. Harris)          1983          2
Saussure    (continued) Ch 4: Linguistic Value                   Course in General Linguistics (transl. Harris)          1983          2
*Schapera   Isaac        Kinship and Marriage Among the Tswana   African Systems of Kinship and Marriage                 1950          1
            Nancy
Scheper-Hughes           Introduction: Tropical Sadness          Death Without Weeping                                   1992          2
            (continued) Ch 1: O Nordeste: Sweetness and Death
Scheper-Hughes                                                   Death Without Weeping                                   1992          2
            Nancy
Scheper-Hughes                                                    Coffin: The Social Production Of Indifference to Child Death
                         Ch 7: Two Feet Under and a CardboardDeath Without Weeping                                       1992          2
            (continued) Ch 8: (M)Other Love: Culture, ScarcityDeath WithoutThinking
Scheper-Hughes                                                    and Maternal Weeping                                   1992          2
            (continued) Ch 9: Our Lady of Sorrows: A Political Economy of theWeeping
Scheper-Hughes                                                   Death Without Emotions                                  1992          2
            Nancy
Scheper-Hughes                                                   Child Survival - Anthropological in Northern on the 1987              3
                         Culture, Scarcity, and Maternal Thinking: Mother Love and Child Death PerspectivesBrazil Treatment and Maltreatment of Child
Schieffelin Edward L.    Ch 1:Ceremonies and Reciprocity         The Sorrow of the Lonely and the Burning of the Dancers 1976          3
Schieffelin Edward L.    Ch 2: In the Shadow of the Mountain The Sorrow of the Lonely and the Burning of the Dancers                   3
Schieffelin Edward L.                                            The
                         Ch 3: I'm Sorry, Brother, I Don't Eat That Sorrow of the Lonely and the Burning of the Dancers  1976          3
*Schiller   Nina Glick   Ch 28: Transnationality                                                                         2007
                                                                 Companion to the Anthropology of Politics (Eds. Nugent & Vincent)     1
Schluchter  Wolfgang                                              and Typology of Religious Modernity (Ed. Max Weber, Rationality and Modernity (Eds. L
                         Ch 4: Weber's Sociology of RationalismMax Weber, Rationality andRejections of the World         1987          3
Schneider   Arnd                                                 Altreitalie, vol. 7
                         Ethnicity, Changing Paradigms and Variations in Food Consumption among Italians in Buenos 1992  Aires         1
Schneider   David        Introduction                            A Critique of the Study of Kinship.                     1984          2
Schneider   David                                                A Critique of the Study of Kinship.
                         Ch 14: The Fundamental Assumption in the Study of Kinship: 'Blood is Thicker than Water' 1984                 3
Schneider                                                        A Critique
            (continued) Ch 15: Institutions, Domains and Other Rubrics of the Study of Kinship.                          1984          1
Schneider   (continued) Ch 16: Conclusion                        A Critique of the Study of Kinship.                     1984          2
Schneider   David                                                 in American Culture: Towards a Definition of Kinship 1977            2
                         Ch 2: Kinship, Nationality, and ReligionSymbolic Anthropology: A Reader in the Study of Symbols and Meanings (Ed. Dolgin, Ke
            David/GeorgeKingship Terminlogy and the American Sentiments and Activities: essays in social science
Schneider/Homans                                                 Kinship System                                          1962          3
*Schrauwers Albert                                               Southeast Asian Identities (Ed. Kahn)
                         Ch 8: Returning to the Origin: Church and State in the Ethnogrpahies of the 'To Pamona'         1998          1
Schrauwers Albert                                                 Roots of a Moral Indonesian Highland (Ed. Tania Li) 1999
                         Ch 4: "It's Not Economical" The MarketTransforming the Economy in Highlands Sulawesi, Indonesia               3
Schrauwers Albert                                                Bijdragen
                         Houses, Hierarchy, Headhunting and Exchange                                                     1997          2
Schwartz    Adria                                                R
                         Ch 14: Taking the Nature Out of Mother epresentations of Motherhood (Eds. Bassin, Honey & 1994  Kaplan)       3
Scoones     Ian                                                  Policy                                                  1996          3
                         Ch 2: Range Management Science and The Lie of the Land: Challenging Received Wisdom on African Environment (Eds. Leach &
Scoones     Ian                                                  Living with Uncertainty
                         Ch 1: New Directions in Pastoral Development in Africa                                          1994          3
Scott       Alison       Ch 1: Introduction                                                                              1994          3
                                                                 Divisions and Solidarities: Gender, Class and Employment in Latin America
Scott       Alison                                               Male Bias in the Development Process (Ed. Elson)
                         Chapter 5: Informal sector or female sector?: gender bias in urban labour market models         1991          3
*Scott        David         Colonialism: Anthropology and Criticism International Social Science Journal                    1997            1
Scott         David                                                 Critique claims on anthropological
                            Criticism and Culture: Theory and post-colonial of Anthroplogy, vol. 12(4) disciplinarity       1992            3
Scott         James C.                                              The the Subsistence Ethic
                            Chapter 1: The Economics and Sociology ofMoral Economy of the Peasant                           1977            3
Scott         (continued)                                           colonial change
                            Chapter 3: The distribution of risk and The Moral Economy of the Peasant                        1977            1
Scott         James C.                                              Seeing Like a
                            Chapter 6: Soviet Collectivisation, Capitalist Dreams State                                     1998            2
Scott         James C                                               Tanzania: Aesthetics
                            Chapter 7: Compulsory Villagization in Seeing Like a State and Miniaturization                  1998            3
Scott         James C                                               Weapons of
                            Chapter 2: Normal Exploitation, Normal Resistance the Weak                                      1985            3
Scott         James C.                                              Weapons of the Weak
                            Chapter 7: Beyond the War of Words: Cautious Resistance and Calculated Conformity               1985            3
Scott         Michael                                               Social Analysis, vol. a Cosmological Polarity in the Solomon Islands
                            Ignorance is the Cosmos; Knowledge is Chaos: Articulating 44(2)                                 2000            3
Scott         Michael       Proto-People and Precedence             Exchange and Sacrifice (Eds. Steward & Strathern)       2008            2
*Scott        Michael       Prologue and Introduction               The Severed Snake                                       2007            1
Scott         W.H.          Ch 1: Physical Appearance               Barangay                                                1995            2
Scott         (continued)   Ch 2: Food and Farming                  Barangay                                                1995            2
Scott         (continued)   Ch 3: Trades and Commerce               Barangay                                                1995            2
Scott         (continued)   Ch 4: Religion                          Barangay                                                1995            2
Scott         (continued)   Ch 5: Literature and Entertainment      Barangay                                                1995            2
Scott         (continued)   Ch 6: Natural Science                   Barangay                                                1995            2
Scott         (continued)   Ch 7: Social Organisation               Barangay                                                1995            2
Scott         (continued)   Ch 8: Weapons and War                   Barangay                                                1995            2
Scruton       Roger                                                 A Short Ideas
                            Chapter 1: History of Philosophy and History ofHistory of Modern Philosophy                     1995            1
Scruton       (continued)                                           A Short History of Modern Philosophy
                            Chapter 10: Kant I: The Critique of Pure Reason                                                 1995            1
Scruton       (continued)   Chapter 15: Marx                        A Short History of Modern Philosophy                    1995            2
Scudder       Thayer                                                Understanding Impoverishment: The Consequences of Development-Induced Displaceme
                            Chapter 4: Development-Induced Impoverishment, Resistance and River-Basin Development 1996                      3
Seaman        Gary                                                  The
                            The Sexual Politics of Karmic Retribrution Anthropology of Taiwanese Society (Eds. Ahern & 1981 Gates)          3
*Segalen      Martine       Introduction                            Family and Kinship in Europe (Eds. Gullestad & Segalen) 1997            1
Seidler       Victor J.                                             The Cultural Construction of Sexuality (Ed. Caplan)
                            Chapter 3: Reason, Desire and Male Sexuality                                                    1987            3
Selwyn        Tom                                                   and Imprisonment: Landscape                             1995
                            Introduction: Landscapes of Liberation The Anthropology ofTowards an Anthropology of the Israeli Landscape 2
*Sen          Abhijit       Agriculture, Employment and Poverty Agrarian Studies (Eds. Swarninathan, Madhura & Ramchandran) 2002            1
Sen           Samita                                                Role In Indian XXII, no. 2
                            Beyond The 'Working Class'; Women's South Asia, VolIndustrialisation                            1999            2
Shah          Ghanshyam                                             Dominance and State Power in Modern India: Decline of a Social Order, 3 1. (Frankel, R
                            Chapter 10: Caste Sentiments, Class Formation and Dominance in Gujarat                          1990            vol
Shahidullah   Kazi                                                  Government Policy on Pathshala Gurumohashoys in Nineteenth-century 3
                            Chapter 6: The Purpose and Impact of The Transition of Knowledge in South Asia (Ed. Crook)2001                   Bengal
Shanin        Teodor        Chapter 9: The Zionisms of Israel                                                               1988            3
                                                                    State and Ideology in the Middle East and Pakistan (Ed. Halliday & Alavi)
Shapiro       Martin        Ch 1: The Prototype of Courts           Courts - A Comparative and Political Analysis           1981            2
Sharma        K.L           Preface                                 Caste and Class in India                                1994            3
Sharma                                                              Caste Class in India
              (continued) Introduction: Some Reflections on Caste and and Class in India                                   1994             3
Sharma        Ursula        Chapter 2: Shimla: City of Migrants     Women's work, class and the urban household            1984             1
Sharma                                                              Women's work, class of sociability
              (continued) Chapter 10: Networks, cooperation, and social life: patterns and the urban household             1984             1
Sharma        Ursula                                                Women and Property: Women as Property (Ed. Hirschon)
                            Chapter 4: Dowry in North India: It's Consequences for Women                                   1984             3
Sharp         Lesley                                                 Possession as Youthful Commentary and Social
                            Playboy Princely Spirits of Madagascar:American Anthropological Quarterly, vol. 68(2) Critiquw 1995             3
Shaw/StewartRosalind/CharlesIntroduction: Problematizing Syncretism Syncretims/Anti-syncretism (Eds. Stewart & Shaw)       1994             3
              Gary/Gordon Introduction: Mormon Growth and Mormon Mission in theA Missionary Chronicle
Shepherd/Shepherd                                                   Mormon Passage, Modern World                           1998             2
              Andrew
Shepherd/ Shepherd          Chapter 3: Case Studies of Famine: Sudan                                                       1988             2
                                                                    Preventing Famine: Policies and Prospects for Africa (Eds. Curtis, Hubbard & Shepherd)
Sheridan      Alan                                                  Reason
                            Ch 1: Madness, Death and the Birth of Michel Foucault: the Will to Truth                       1980             1
Sheridan      (continued) Chapter 2: Society, Power and Knowledge   Michel Foucault: the Will to Truth                     1980             2
                            The
Shils/Young Edward/Michael Meaning of the Coronation                The Sociological Review, vol. 1(2)                     1953             3
Shrestha      Nanda                                                 The
                            Ch 14: Becoming a Development Category Power of Development                                    1995             3
Shweder/Bourne              Ch                                      Culture Theory (Eds. Shweder & Levine)
              Richard/Edmund 6: Does the Concept of the Person Vary Cross-Culturally?                                      1984             3
Slater        D.            Ch 7: New Times?                        Consumer Culture and Modernity.                        1997             3
Slater/Miller D./D.         Ch 3: Relationships.                    The Internet: an Ethnographic Approach.                2000             3
                                                                    The Internet: an Ethnographic Approach.
Slater/Miller (continued) Ch 4: Being Trini and Representing Trinidad                                                      2000             1
                                                                    The
Slater/Miller (continued) Ch 5: The Political Economy of the Internet Internet: an Ethnographic Approach.                  2000             3
Sick          Deborah       Ch 6: To Market, To Market                                                                     1999             1
                                                                    Farmers of the Golden Bean: Costa Rican Households and the Global Coffee Economy
Sieder        Rachel                                                States of Imagination (Eds.
                            Rethinking Citizenship; reforming the Law in Postwar Guatemala. Hansen & Stepputat)            2001             3
              Rachel/Jessica. 9: Advancing Indigenous Claims Through the Law: Reflections on the Guatemalan Peace Process. Dembour & Wilson)
Sieder/Witchell             Ch                                                                                             2001
                                                                    Culture and Rights - Anthropological Perspectives (Eds. Cowan,          3
Silverman     Kaja                                                  The Subject of Semiotics.
                            Ch 1: From Sign to Subject, A Short History.                                                   1983             3
Silverstein   Michael                                               Meaning in Anthropology (eds. Basso & Selby)
                            Shifters, Linguistic Categories and Cultural Description                                       1976             3
Silverstein   Michael                                               Unpublished Manuscript
                            Discerning 'Cultural' Concepts: Whorf on Linguistically Mediated (Mis)recognition              1998             3
Simmel        Georg         Ch 6: Conflict                                                                                 1971
                                                                    On Individuality and Social Forms - Selected Writings (Ed. Levine)      3
Simmel        Georg         Ch 4: The Metropolois and Mental Life The Sociology of Georg Simmel (Ed. Wolff)                1950             3
Sinclair      John                                                  Paper presented at the conference Households in India  Association for Media and Commu
                            Globalisation and Grass Roots: Local Cable Operators and their Subscriberof the International 2004              3
Singer        Milton                                                Krishna: Myths, Rites, and Attitudes (Ed. Singer)
                            Ch 5: The Radha-Krishna Bhajanas of Madras City                                                1968             3
*Sinha        Pradip                                                Calcutta:
                            Calcutta and the Currents of History: 1690-1912The Living City, Vol I (Chadhuri ed.)           1980             1
              Krishna
Sivaramakrishnan                                                    The Social Life of in South-west Bengal, Perspectives 1998
                            Ch 13: Modern Forestry: Trees and Development SpacesTrees - Anthropological India                               3
                                                                                                                           on Tree Symbolism (Ed. Rival)
Slezkine      Yuri                                                  Stalinism: New Socialist (Ed. Promoted Ethnic Particularism
                            Ch 11: The USSR as a Communal Apartment, or how aDirectionsState Fitzpatrick)                  2000             2
Slobin        Dan I.                                                The Language Instinct
                            Ch 3: From 'Thouht and Language' to 'Thinking for Speaking' (Ed. Pinker)                       1994             1
Smith         David                                                 PEP
                            The Facts of Racial Disadvantage, a National Survey                                            1976             1
Smith         Linda TuhiwaiIntroduciton                                                                                    Peoples
                                                                    Decolonising Methodologies: Research and Indigenous 2001                3
Smith         Raymond T. The Matrifocal Family                      The Character of Kinship (Goody ed)                    1973             3
*Sneath       P.           Ch 8: Symbolism and Meaning            Changing Inner Mongolia                                2000              1
                           Ch 15                                  Perspectives Kalahari (Griaker & Steiner)
*Solway/Lee Jaqueline/Richard Foragers, genuine or Spurious? Situating the on AfricaSan in History                       1997              1
Sorensen      Christian                                           and Restore their Livelihoods
                           Ch 8: Alebu: Eritrean Refugees Return Risks and Reconstruction (Eds. Cernea/McDowell)         2000              2
Southall      Aidan                                               Man II
                           Nuer and Dinka are People: Ecology, Ethnicity and Logical Possibility                         1976              2
Southall      Aidan                                               The the Orthodox Texts                                 1993              Europe
                           The Problems of Socialism: A reappraisal ofCurtain Rises: Rethinking culture, ideology and the state in Eastern 3
Sowell        Thomas E.    Ch 6. Race and the Market              Race and Economics                                     1975              1
Spears        Arthur K.    Ch 6: Black American English           Anthropology for the Nineties (Ed. Cole)               1988              3
              Elizabeth/Ann/Amanda                                Causal Cognition: A Multidisciplinary Debate
*Spelke/Phillips/Woodward Ch 3: Infants' Knowledge of Object Motion and Human Action                                     1995              1
Spencer       Jonathan     Introduction: The Power of the Past                                                           1990
                                                                  Sri Lanka: History and the Roots of Conflict (Ed. Spencer)               3
Spencer       Jonathan                                            Violence
                           Problems in the Analysis of Communal Contributions to Indian Sociology, vol. 26(2)            1992              3
Sperber       Dan                                                 Explaining Culture- A Naturalistics Approach
                           Ch 1: How to be a True Materialist in Anthropology                                            1996              1
Sperber                                                           Explaining Culture- A
              (continued) Ch 2: Interpreting and Exxplaining Cultural Representations Naturalistics Approach             1996              1
Sperber       Dan                                                 Darwinizing Culture: The Status of Memetics as a Science (Ed. Augner) 3
                           Ch 8: An Objection to the Memetic Approach to Culture                                         2000
Sperber       Dan          Ch 2: Apparently Irrational Beliefs    On Anthropological Knowledge                           1985              2
Sperber       Dan          Ch 3: Claude Levi-Strauss Today        On Anthropological Knowledge                           1985              3
Spitulniki    Debra        Ch 17: Mobile machines and Fluid audiences, rethinking reception through Zambian radio culture2002              3
*Spiro        Melford E.                                          Buddhism and Society: A great tradition and its burmese vicissitudes
                           Ch 1: Theravada Buddhism: An anthropological problem                                          1982              1
Spiro         Melford E.   Ch 14: Supernaturalism and BuddhismBurmese Supernaturalism                                    1978              3
Srinivas      M.N.                                                Studies in                                             1
                           Chapter 3: The Indian Village: Myth and Reality Social Anthropology (Beattie & Lienhard eds) 975                2
Srinivas      M.N.         Ch 1: Pure and Impure                  Religion and Society Among the Coorgs of South India1952                 1
Srinivas      (continued) Ch 7: Hinduism                          Religion and Society Among the Coorgs of South India1952                 3
Srinivas      (continued) Ch 8: Religion and Society              Religion and Society Among the Coorgs of South India1952                 3
Srinivas      M.N.         The Social Sytem of a Mysore Village Village India                                            1955              2
Srinivas      M.N.         Miscellanous:                                                                                                   2
Srinivas      M.N.         Ch 1: Caste in Modern India            Caste in Modern India and Other Essays                 1962              3
Srinivas      (continued) Ch 3: Varna and Caste                   Caste in Modern India and Other Essays                 1962              3
Srinivas                                                          Caste in Modern
              (continued) Ch 4: Castes: can they exist in the India of tomorrow? India and Other Essays                  1962              3
*Srivistava Sanjay         Ch 3 The Garden of Rational Delights Constructing Post-Colonial India                         1998              1
              N.
*Ssorin-Chaikov                                                   The Social Life of the River
                           Ch 3: Primitive Communists on the Podkamennaia TunguskaState in Subarctic Siberia             2003              1
Stadler       Johnatan                                            Generational Relations                                 Village
                           Witches and Witch Hunters Witchcraft, African Studies 55(1) and the Life Cycle in a Lowveld 1996                3
Stafford      Charles                                             Separation and Reunion in Modern China
                           Introduction: An Anthropology of Separation                                                   2000              3
Stafford      Charles      Ch 1: Two Festivals of Reunion         Separation and Reunion in Modern China                 2000              3
Stafford      Charles      Ch 7: Developing a Sense of History Separation and Reunion in Modern China                    2000              3
Stafford      Charles      Introduction                           The Roads of Chinese Childhood                         1995              1
Stafford      (continued)   Ch 1: Two Roads                         The Roads of Chinese Childhood                         1995             1
Stafford      (continued)                                           The
                            Ch 4: Textbook Mother and Frugal ChildrenRoads of Chinese Childhood                            1995             3
Stafford      (continued)                                           The
                            Ch 5: Red Envelopes and the Cycle of YangRoads of Chinese Childhood                            1995             2
Stafford      (continued)   Ch 6: Going Forward Bravely             The Roads of Chinese Childhood                         1995             3
Stafford      Charles       Ch 7: Divining Children                 The Roads of Chinese Childhood                         1995             3
Stafford      Charles       Ch 8: Dangerous Rituals                 The Roads of Chinese Childhood                         1995             3
Stafford      Charles                                               Lecture given at
                            The Firecracker: Children and History in Post-Mao ChinaOxford University, 23/5-1997            1997             3
Stafford      Charles                                               Terrain, vol. 40
                            Language and Numerical Learning in Rural China and Taiwan                                      2003             3
Stafford      Charles                                               Cultures of laiwang
                            Ch 2: Chinese Patriliny and the Cycles o fyang andRelatedness (Ed. Carsten)                    2000             3
Stafford      Charles                                               Ritual Economy
                            Deception, Corruption and the Chinese ASIA RESEARCH CENTRE working paper, no. 3                2000             3
Stafford      Charles       Miscellanous:                                                                                                   2
Stafford      (continued)                                           Man, vol. 27(2)
                            Good Sons and Virtuous Mothers: Kinship and Chinese Nationalism in Taiwan                      1992             1
Stafford      (continued)   Wittgenstein as the patron saint of interpretive anthropology                          Not published            1
Starn         Orin          Villagers at arms                       Between resistance and revolution (Eds. Fox Starn) 1997                 3
Starrett      Gregory       Ch 4: Learning about God                                                                       1998             3
                                                                    Putting Islam to Work: Education, Politics and Religious Transformation in Egypt
Starrett      (continued)   Ch 5: The Path of Clarification                                                                1998             2
                                                                    Putting Islam to Work: Education, Politics and Religious Transformation in Egypt
Starrett      (continued)   Ch 6: Growing Up: Four Stories                                                                 1998             2
                                                                    Putting Islam to Work: Education, Politics and Religious Transformation in Egypt
*Stavenhagen  Rodolfo                                               Constructing Democracy: Human Rights, Citizenship and Society in Latin America (Eds. J
                            Ch 8: Indigenous Rights: Some Conceptual Problems                                              1996             1
Stenning      Derrick J.                                             Fulani
                            Household viability among the pastoralThe Developmental Cycle in Domestic Groups (Ed. Goody)   1958             3
Stern         David         The Return of the Subject?              Philosophy and Social Criticism, vol. 26(5)            1995             2
Stewart       Michael                                               Terrain, vol. 20
                            Bad Deaths, Polluted Priests and the Recuperative Power of Song                                1991             3
*Stewart      Michael                                               Unpublished
                            Substantial and Relational Identity: Are Hungarian Gypsies an 'Ethnic' Group?          Unpublished              1
Stirrat       R.L.          A Catholic Shrine in its Social Context Sri Lanaka Journal of Social Sciences, vol. 2          1979             3
*Stirrat      R.L.          Ch 4: Money, men and women              Money and the Morality of Exchange (Eds. Bloch & Parry)1989             1
Stirrat/HenkelR.L./H.                                               Report to the Overseas Development Administration September
                            Fundamentalism and Development - Bitter Foes or Unlikely Companions?                           1996             3
Stivens       Maila                                                 Matriliny and Modernity: Sexual Politics and Cultural Change in Rural malaysia
                            Introduction: A Modern Malaysian Matriliny                                                     1996             2
Stivens       Maila                                                 Matriliny and Modernity:                               1996
                            Ch 8: Modernising Kinship and Family in Contemporary RembauSexual Politics and Cultural Change in Rural malaysia3
Stocking      G.W.                                                  Victorian Anthropology
                            Chapter 5: The Darwinian Revolution and the Evolution of Human Culture                         1987             2
Stocking      G.W.                                                  Functionalism Historicized: Essays on British Social Anthropology
                            Radcliffe-Brown and British Social Anthropology                                                1984             3
Stocking      G.W.                                                  Historical Perspective                                 1982
                            Franz Boas and the Culture Concept in Race, Culture and Evolution: Essays in the History of Anthropology        3
Stoler        Ann Laura                                             Tensions of Empire: Colonial Cultures in a Bourgeois World
                            Ch 5: Sexual Affronts and Racial Frontiers                                                     1997             2
Stoler        A                                                     Carnal
                            Ch 3: Carnal Kn owledge and imperial Power Knowledge and Imperial Power                        2002             2
Stoler        Ann Laura     Preface                                                                                        1995             3
                                                                    Race and the Education of Desire (Foucault's History of Sexuality and the Colonial Order
Stoler        (continued)                                           Race and the                                           1995             3
                            Ch 1: Colonial Studies and the History of Sexuality Education of Desire (Foucault's History of Sexuality and the Colonial Order
Stoler                                                             Race and the Education of Desire (Foucault's History of Sexuality and the Colonial Order
             (continued) Ch 2: Placing Race in the History of Sexuality                                                  1995              3
Stoler                                                             Race and the Education                                1995              3
             (continued) Ch 6: The Education of Desire and the Repressive Hypothesis of Desire (Foucault's History of Sexuality and the Colonial Order
Stolcke      Verena       Is sex to gender as race is to ethnicity Gendered Anthropology (Ed. Del Valle, Teresa)         1993              3
Stoll        David                                                 Rigoberta
                          Ch 13: The Construction of "I Rigoberta Menchu" Menchu and the Story of All Poor Guatemalans   1999              1
Stoll        (continued) Ch 14: Rigoberta's Secret                 Rigoberta Menchu and the Story of All Poor Guatemalans1999              1
Stoll        (continued) Ch 17: Rigoberta and Redemption           Rigoberta Menchu and the Story of All Poor Guatemalans1999              1
Stoll        (continued) Ch 20: Epitaph for an Eyewitness Account  Rigoberta Menchu and the Story of All Poor Guatemalans1999              1
Stoll        David                                                 Human Rights: Culture and Context (Ed. Wilson)
                          Ch 8: To Whom Should We Listen? Human Rights Activism In Two Guatemalan Land Disputes1997                        3
Stoller      Paul         Ch 1: In the Past, in the Present        The Cinematic Griot - The Ethnography of Jean Rouch 1992                2
Stoller      Paul         Ch 1: Looking For Serci                  Fusion of the Worlds                                  1997              3
Stoller      Paul         Ch 2: Zimas From Tillaberi               Fusion of the Worlds                                  1997              3
Stoller      Paul         Ch 3: Gusabu's Mediums                   Fusion of the Worlds                                  1997              3
Stoller      Paul         Ch 7: Horrific Comedy: The Hauka         Fusion of the Worlds                                  1997              2
Stoller      Paul                                                  The 9: Les Maitres Fous
                          Chapter 1: In the Past, in the Present & Ch Cinematic Griot- The Ethnography of Jean Rouch 1992                  2
*Stone       Linda                                                 Kinship and Family: An Anthropological Reader         2004
                          Has the World Turned? Kinship and Family in the Contemporary American Soap Opera (Eds. Parkin & Stone) 1
Stone        Linda        Ch 3: The Power of Patrilines            Kinship and Gender: An Introduction                   2006              3
             M./A./P.
Stone/Haugerud/Little                                              Commodity, and Globalisation: anthropological perspectives
                          Ch 1: Commodities and Globalization: Anthropological Perspective                               2000              3
Strathern    Andrew       Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
             Andrew/Marilyn
Strathern/Strathern                                                 Symbolism among the Mbowamb
                          Marsupials and Magic: A Study of SpellDialect in Practical Religion (Ed. Leach)                1968              1
Strathern                                                          Finance and
             (continued) Despots and Directors in the New Guinea HighlandsProduction: Two Strategies in New Guinea1966                     1
Strathern    Andrew       Ch 1: The Social Body: Mauss to Douglas  Body Thoughts                                         1996              3
Strathern    Andrew       Death as Exchange: Two Melanesian Cases                                                        1981
                                                                   Morality and Immorality: the Anthropology and Archaeology of Death 3
Strathern    Andrew                                                The Character of Kinship (Ed. Goody)
                          Kinship, Descent and Locality: Some New Guinea Examples                                        1973              2
Strathern    Andrew                                                Inequality in Highland New
                          Ch 2: Two waves of African models in the New Guinea Highlands Guinea Societies                 1985              3
Strathern    Andrew                                                                                                      1975
                          Ch 9: Veiled Speech in Mount Hagen Political Language and Oratory in Traditional Society (Ed. Bloch)             3
Strathern    Marilyn      Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
Strathern                                                          Conceiving Consequences for Kinship                   1995              1
             (continued) Ch 19: Displacing Knowledge: Technology and the the New World Order - The Global Politics of Reproduction (Eds. Ginsburg & R
Strathern                                                          Questions of Cultural Identity (Eds. Hall &
             (continued) Ch 3: Enabling Idenity? Biology, Choice and the New Reproductive Technologies du Gay)           1996              1
Strathern                                                          Social Anthropology, vol.
             (continued) Potential Property. Intellectual Rights and Property in Persons 4(1)                            1996              3
Strathern    (continued) Ch 1: Kinship Assisted                                                                          1992              3
                                                                   Reproducing the Future: Essays on Anthropology, Kinship and the New Reproductive Tec
Strathern                                                          Reproducing the Future: Essays on Anthropology, Kinship and the New Reproductive Tec
             (continued) Ch 2: Enterprising kinship: consumer choice and the new reproductive technologies               1992              3
Strathern                                                          Reproducing the Future: Essays on Anthropology, Kinship and the New Reproductive Tec
             (continued) Ch 4: Between a Melanesianist and a feminist                                                    1992              3
Strathern                                                          Reproducing                                           1992              3
             (continued) Ch 5: Parts and Wholes: Refiguring Relationships the Future: Essays on Anthropology, Kinship and the New Reproductive Tec
Strathern    (continued) Ch 6: Partners and Consumers                                                                    1992              1
                                                                   Reproducing the Future: Essays on Anthropology, Kinship and the New Reproductive Tec
Strathern    (continued)   Ch 7: A Partitioned Process                                                                      1992            1
                                                                    Reproducing the Future: Essays on Anthropology, Kinship and the New Reproductive Tec
Strathern    Marilyn       Ch 1: Anthropological Strategies         The Gender of the Gift                                  1988            3
Strathern    (continued)   Ch 7: Some Definitions                   The Gender of the Gift                                  1988            3
Strathern    Marilyn                                                 Disconnections in Two New Guinea Highland Kinship Systems
                           Producing Difference: Connections and Gender and Kinship (Eds. Collier & Yanagisako)             1987            3
Strathern    Marilyn                                                Nature,
                           Ch 8: No Nature, no culture: the Hagen case Culture and Gender (Eds. MacCormack & Strathern)     1980            3
Strathern    Marilyn                                                Belonging, Identity Elmdon, Essex                       1981            3
                           Ch 4: The Place of Kinship: Kin, Class and Village Status inand Social Organisation in British Rural Cultures (Ed. Cohen)
Strathern    Marilyn                                                 and The New Reproductive Technologies
                           Enterprising Kinship: Consumer ChoiceCambridge Anthroplogy, vol. 14(1)                           1990            3
Strathern    Marilyn                                                Women and Property: Women as Property (Ed. Hirschon)
                           Ch 9: Subject or Object? Women and the Circulation of Valuables in Highlands New Guinea 1984                     3
Strauss/QuinnC./M.         Ch 1: Introduction                       A Cognitive Theory of Cultural Meaning                  1997            1
Strauss/Quinn(continued)   Ch 2: Anthropological Resistance         A Cognitive Theory of Cultural Meaning                  1997            1
Street       Brian         Introduction: The New Literacy StudiesCross-Cultural Approches to Literacy (Ed. Street)          1993            3
*Suzuki      Hikaru        Ch 19: The Phase of Negated Death                                                                2004
                                                                    Death, Mourning and Burial: A Cross Cultural Reader (Ed. Robben)        1
Suzuki       Nobue                                                  Cross Border and Fantasies of Transnational in Transnational            3
                           Ch 7: Tripartite Desires: Filipina Japanese Marriages Marriages: Gender and Mobility Traversal 2004 Asia (Ed. Consable, Nicole)
Suzuki       Nobue                                                  Gender Politics in the Asia-Pacific Region (Eds. Yeoh, Teo
                                                                                                                            2002
                           Ch 6: Gendered Surveillance and Sexual Violence in Filipina pre-migration experiences to Japan & Huang)          3
Swancutt     Katherine                                              Inner Asia, vol. 9
                           The Ontological Sprial: Virtuosity and Transparency in Mongolian Games                           2007            2
*Swift       Olivia                                                 Goldsmiths Anthropology Research Papers
                           The People's Puzzle: Crosswords and Knowledge Politics                                           2007            1
*Sykes       S.W.                                                   Sacrifice (Eds. Bourdillon & Fortes)
                           Sacrifice in the New Testament and Christian Theology                                            1980            1
Tadiar       Neferti       Ch 1: Sexual Economies                                                                           2003            1
                                                                    Fantasy-Production: Sexual Economies and Other Philippine Consequences for the New W
Tadiar       (continued)   Ch 2: Metropolitan Dreams                                                                        2003            2
                                                                    Fantasy-Production: Sexual Economies and Other Philippine Consequences for the New W
Tambiah      S. J.         Ch 1: The Magic Power of Words           Culture, Thought and Social Action                      1985            3
Tambiah      (continued)   Ch 2: Form and Meaning of Magical Acts   Culture, Though and Social Action                       1985            3
Tambiah      (continued)                                            Culture, Thought and Social Action
                           Ch 7: The Galactic Policy in Southeast Asia                                                      1985            2
Tambiah      (continued)                                            Culture, Thought and Social
                           Ch 9: A Reformation of Geertz's Conception of the Theater State Action                           1985            3
Tambiah      S. J.                                                  Magic, Science anthropology's Scope of Rationality
                           Ch 1: Magic, Science and religion in Western thought: and Religion: A intellectual legacy        1990            2
Tambiah      (continued)   Ch 2: Anthhopology's Intellectual legacy Magic, Science and Religion: A Scope of Rationality     1990            2
Tambiah      (continued)                                            Magic, Science and Religion: A Scope of Rationality
                           Ch 6: Rationality, relativism, and the translation and commensurability of cultures              1990            2
Tambiah      S.J.          Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
Tambiah      (continued)                                            Dialectic in Practical Religion (Ed. Leach)
                           The Ideology of Merit and the Social Correlates of Buddhism in a Thai Village                    1977            1
Tambiah      (continued)                                            Buddism and
                           Ch 19: A Kaleidoscopic View of the Religious Field the Spirit Cults in Northeast Thailand        1970            1
Tamisari     Franca                                                 Oceania, the Ancestors
                           Body, Vision and Movement: in the Footprints ofvol. 68(4)                                        1998            3
Tanaka       Masakazu      Miscellanous:                                                                                                    2
Tanaka       (continued)                                            Zinbun, vol. 34(1)
                           Sacrifice Lost and Found: Colonial India and Postcolonial Lanka                                  1999            1
Tanaka       (continued)                                            Living with Sakti (eds. Tanaka
                           Introduction: writing on Gender, Sexuality and Religion in South Asia & Tachikawa)               1999            1
Tanaka       Masakazu                                               From Vedic Altar to Village
                           Why are Brahman Temple Priests Highest in the Caste Hierarchy? Shrine (Eds. Nagano & Ikari)      1993            2
Tarlo      Emma         Miscellanous:                                                                                                   3
Tarlo                                                          Clothing Matters
           (continued) Ch 3: Gandhi and the Recreation of Indian Dress                                               1996               1
Tarlo      (continued) Ch 6: The "Forcible Deal"                                                                     2003
                                                               Unsettling Memories: narratives of the Emergency in Delhi                1
Tarlo      (continued) Ch 7: The Victims Turned Agents                                                               2003
                                                               Unsettling Memories: narratives of the Emergency in Delhi                1
Taussig    Michael                                             Shamanism, Colonialism, and                           1987
                        Ch 5: The Image of the Auca: Ur-Mythology and Colonial Modernism the Wild Man: A Study in Terror & Healing3
Taussig    (continued) Ch 28: To Become a Healer               Shamanism, Colonialism and the Wild Man               1987               3
Taussig    Michael                                             The Devil
                        Ch 1: Fetishism and Dialectical Deconstruction and Commodity Fetishism in South America 1980                    1
Taussig                                                        The Devil and Commodity Fetishism in South America 1980
           (continued) Ch 3: Slave Religion and the Rise of the Free Peasantry                                                          1
Taussig    (continued) Ch 4: Owners and Fences                 The Devil and Commodity Fetishism in South America 1980                  1
Taussig                                                        of Capitalism
           (continued) Ch 5: The Devil and the Cosmogenesis The Devil and Commodity Fetishism in South America 1980                     1
Taussig                                                        The Devil and Commodity Fetishism in South America 1980
           (continued) Ch 6: Pollution, Contradiction and Salvation                                                                     1
Taussig                                                        The Devil and Commodity Fetishism in South America 1980
           (continued) Ch 7: The Baptism of Money and the Secret of Capital                                                             1
Taussig    Michael                                             The Devil and
                        Part 3: The Bolivian Tin Mines- Ch 8-14-Conclusion Commodity Fetishism in South America 1980                    1
Taussig    Michael                                             Mimesis and Alterity
                        Chapter 1: In Some Way or Another One Can Protect Oneself From The Spirits By Portraying Them1993               3
*Taussig   Michael      Tactility and Distraction              Rereading Cultural Anthropology (Ed. Marcus)          1992               1
Taylor                  Ch                                     Beyond the Visible and the Material - the Amerindianization of Society in the Work of Pet
           Anne Christine 3: Wives, Pets, and Affines: Marriage among the Jivaro                                     2001               3
Taylor     Charles      Ch 2: Nature and Nurture               Human Agency and Language                             1985               3
Taylor     (continued) Ch 9: Language and Human Nature         Human Agency and Language                             1985               3
Taylor     Christopher Introduction                            Sacrifice as Terror                                   1994               2
Taylor     (continued) Chapter 1: Rwanda                       Sacrifice as Terror                                   1994               2
Taylor                                                         Sacrifice as Burundi
           (continued) Chapter 2: The Hamitic Hypothesis in Rwanda and Terror                                        1994               3
Taylor     Christopher Chapter 3: The Cosmology of Terror Sacrifice as Terror                                        1999               2
Taylor                                                         Sacrifice as Women
           (continued) Chapter 4: The Dialectics of Hate and Desire: Tutsi Terror and Hutu Extremism                 1999               2
Taylor     (continued) Conclusion                              Sacrifice as Terror                                   1999               1
Taylor     G.R.         Ch 1: Eros and Thanatos                Sex in History                                        1954               1
Taylor     (continued) Ch 12: Sex as Sacrament                 Sex in History                                        1954               1
Terray     Emmanuel                                             Abron Analyses and Social
                        Classes and Class Consciousness in theMarxist Kingdom of Gyaman Anthropology (Ed. Bloch) 1984                   3
Teubner    Gunther                                             Global Law Without a State (Ed. Teubner)
                        Ch 1: 'Global Bukowina': Legal Pluralism in the World Society                                1997               3

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:61
posted:11/11/2011
language:English
pages:72